RS27_OM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION

INTRODUCTION, WARRANTY

SAFETY NOTES

CONTROLS

CAB

INSTRUMENTS AND PROGRAMMING

OPERATION

TYRES, WHEELS, BALLASTING

REGULAR SERVICE INTERVALS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SPECIFICATIONS

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS

Valid for the following tractor

models:

X6.35 X6.45 X6.55

Operator's Manual

SECTION

X6.35

X6.45

X6.55

Publication N. 6622 427A2

Release 11/2019

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

via G. Matteotti, 7 | 42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italy

t. +39.0522.656.111 | f. +39.0522.656.476

webmaster@argotractors.com | www.argotractors.com

1-2

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING: Any warranties for modified operation

units (safety frame, electric and hydraulic systems

a.s.o) expire if cabs are mounted that are not ap-

proved by the tractor's maker. Moreover, noise levels

and compliance with the approvals cannot be verified

in this case.

CALIFORNIA

Statement 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents

are known to the State of California to cause cancer,

birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

Units of measurement

All units of measurement used in this manual are metric

unless otherwise stated.

Use the following table to convert from metric to impe-

rial units.

mm x 0.03937 = inches

kg x 2.2 = pounds

bar x 14.5038 = PSI

Litres x 0.22 = British gallons

Litres x 0.264 = US gallons

N (Newton) x 0.225 = pound/foot

Nm x 0.738 = pound/foot

Nm x 8.85 = pound/inch

°C x 1.8 (=32) = °F

km/h x 0.62 = MPH

This Operator’s Manual is valid in all countries in the world and for all models. The photos, warnings and instruc-

tions it contains concern both standard and optional equipment. Therefore you might find details on parts that are

not installed on your own tractor, depending on national laws and ordered optionals. All contents in this manual

are carefully drawn up and undergo accurate checks.

The illustrations in this manual are not comprehensive of all possible cases. All technical information and speci-

fications contained in the manual are updated to the date of its release. In a policy of continuous improvement

of our products, we reserve the right to introduce modifications in any moment without any prior notice.

Argo Tractors declines, however, any liability, either direct or indirect, to users and to third parties in general, for

any delay, inaccuracy, mistake, omission, direct and indirect damage deriving from the above mentioned contents.

Any mistake of whom we are advised shall be promptly corrected. As no guarantee can be given of the update status

of a document on paper, only the text published on our website ARGOSERVICE.NET shall be deemed as authentic.

The tractor is provided of safety features complying to national and international laws. For your own safety, such

features should be correctly used at any time and checked for operation. In case of doubts about their operation

or use, please refer to your Argo Tractors Dealer.

If the tractor is sold again, this operation manual should be left on it. The next owner will require the informa-

tion it contains.

This manual was compiled in compliance with the ISO 3600 standards and the here contained instructions comply

to the requirements of the following directive in force in the European Union: Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013. [1]

For tractors sold or used outside the European Union, local laws have priority.

Main guards present on tractors dealt with in this manual. [2.o][2.p][6.3.2b]

CAB

ROPS (protection against overturning) YES

FOPS (protection against objects falling from above) YES**

OPS (protection against penetration of objects from sides) NO

Protection against hazardous chemicals CLASS. 2*

* Complying to EN 15695-1:2009

** The protection level of the FOPS structure of the cab is approved to the Code 10 OCSE.

Always refer to the identification plate of the cab (Sect. 1 in this manual) to check the protection level.

1-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Contents ...............................................................................................1-3

Tractor identification .............................................................................1-9

Introduction ........................................................................................1-12

Warranty, pre-delivery inspections and installation ...........................1-12

Warranty claim ....................................................................................1-13

Spare parts warning ...........................................................................1-13

If you move .........................................................................................1-13

Post-warranty service .........................................................................1-13

Safety ..................................................................................................1-13

Safety notes .........................................................................................2-1

Regular use ...........................................................................................2-1

Alarm and safety texts and symbols ....................................................2-2

Safety - Tractor and implement ............................................................ 2-2

Safety - Introduction ............................................................................. 2-2

Safety - Advice for the operator ...........................................................2-2

Safety - Danger, Warning and Caution .................................................2-3

Safety - Decals ......................................................................................2-3

Safety - Following a safety program ....................................................2-3

Safety - Cab ..........................................................................................2-4

Safety precautions................................................................................2-7

Personal protection devices (DPI) ........................................................2-7

Check your equipment .......................................................................2-10

Cleaning the tractor ............................................................................ 2-11

Save the environment ........................................................................2-11

Safety - Tractor maintenance .............................................................2-11

Safety - Starting up .............................................................................2-13

Working in safety ................................................................................2-15

Follow the rules when using your tractor. .......................................... 2-15

Working in safety ................................................................................2-15

Beware of other people......................................................................2-17

Risk of overturning .............................................................................2-18

To avoid side overturning ...................................................................2-18

To avoid back overturning ..................................................................2-20

Dangerous operations ........................................................................ 2-22

To engage the power take-off ............................................................2-22

Implements and attachments ............................................................2-24

Road transport ....................................................................................2-25

Highway Code regulations .................................................................2-25

Safety - After use ................................................................................2-26

Further notes ......................................................................................2-27

Tractor stability ...................................................................................2-29

Tractor's lifting points .........................................................................2-31

Tractor access ....................................................................................2-32

Fuel tank filling ...................................................................................2-33

Filling with AdBlue™ or DEF ............................................................... 2-33

Wedges ..............................................................................................2-34

Risks from noise .................................................................................2-35

Positions of the safety decals ............................................................2-36

Positions of safety decals - Only North American markets ...............2-41

Table of contents Page n.

Section 1

Section 2

1-4

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Controls - Cab .......................................................................................3-1

Main controls ........................................................................................3-2

Controls on the left side of the driver's seat. ....................................... 3-3

Controls on the left side of the control turret ......................................3-3

Commutators........................................................................................3-3

LED and backlighting functions on switches .......................................3-4

Drive direction reversing lever .............................................................3-4

Tractor Warning Lamp Usage ...............................................................3-5

Turn indicator operation (North America version) ................................ 3-5

Implement Warning Lamps (if Equipped) ............................................3-5

Rotating Beacon ................................................................................... 3-6

Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) Symbol ....................................................3-6

Front right controls on instrument turret .............................................3-7

Adjustment of electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle effectiveness ........... 3-8

Battery master disconnect switch .......................................................3-8

Use of adjustment of Powershuttle effectiveness...............................3-8

Steering column adjustment ................................................................ 3-9

Auxiliary power socket (12 V) .............................................................3-11

Miscellaneous ....................................................................................3-11

Operator's seat ...................................................................................3-12

Seat belt .............................................................................................3-20

Instructor seat ....................................................................................3-21

Operator present sensor ....................................................................3-22

Cab .....................................................................................................3-24

Central controls on control turret ...................................................... 3-25

Rear window wiper ............................................................................3-25

Cab roof components ........................................................................3-26

Cab ventilation ....................................................................................3-27

Controls for cab temperature .............................................................3-28

Setup with heating only .....................................................................3-28

Setup with cab air conditioning .........................................................3-29

Use of the air conditioning system ....................................................3-29

Radio ...................................................................................................3-30

Additional Cab Features .....................................................................3-37

Instruments and Programming ............................................................ 4-1

Instruments - Instrument panel ............................................................4-2

Display operation ..................................................................................4-5

Alarm management priority display .....................................................4-8

Main display .........................................................................................4-8

Clock/Work timer ..................................................................................4-8

Rear electronic hitch ............................................................................4-9

Engagement/disengagement threshold of auto PTO ..........................4-9

Setup of limits for auto PTO engagement/disengagement. .............. 4-10

Air brakes pressure ............................................................................4-11

AdBlue™ or DEF level .........................................................................4-11

Engine operating modes .................................................................... 4-12

Service interval ...................................................................................4-15

Alarm from operator present sensor on seat.....................................4-16

Electra-hydraulic effectiveness ..........................................................4-16

Counters .............................................................................................4-17

Calibrations .........................................................................................4-17

Engine controller menu ...................................................................... 4-18

Standstill operation of the exhaust gas post-treatment system ........4-19

Adjustment of screen, lamps and indicators brightness ................... 4-20

Constant engine RPM rate ................................................................. 4-21

Selection of rear PTO engagement curve .......................................... 4-22

Selection of front PTO engagement curve .........................................4-23

Alarms ................................................................................................4-24

Table of contents Page n.

Section 4

Section 3

1-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Transmission display area .................................................................4-25

Power take-off menu .......................................................................... 4-27

Accessories menu ..............................................................................4-31

• Implement width .............................................................................4-33

• Euro/NAO market ............................................................................ 4-34

• Clock ................................................................................................4-35

• Service interval ................................................................................4-36

• Functionality (indicator lights/indicators/display on LCD) ............... 4-37

• Management of operator present control ......................................4-45

Operation ..............................................................................................5-1

General Operation ................................................................................5-2

Run In Procedure ..................................................................................5-2

Starting procedure ................................................................................5-3

Starting the tractor ...............................................................................5-4

Stopping the tractor .............................................................................5-4

Turning off the engine ..........................................................................5-4

Running in ............................................................................................5-4

Cold Temperature Operation ................................................................ 5-5

Cold weather starting (temperatures below 0°C) (cold engine) ...........5-6

Turning off the engine ..........................................................................5-7

Parking the tractor ................................................................................5-7

Battery master disconnect switch .......................................................5-8

Transmission - configurations ..............................................................5-9

Use of the gearbox .............................................................................5-10

Adjustment of electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle effectiveness ......... 5-11

Speed tables .......................................................................................5-12

Gearshift clutch ..................................................................................5-14

Reverse shuttle control lever .............................................................5-15

Gearshift lever ....................................................................................5-16

Operation of Power Shuttle gearbox ..................................................5-17

Starting the tractor with the clutch pedal ..........................................5-18

Changing gear with the declutch button ...........................................5-18

Changing gear with the clutch pedal .................................................5-18

Engagement of Powershift ranges under load (setup with HML transmission) ....5-19

Use of reverse shuttle under load ......................................................5-20

Use of reverse shuttle with clutch pedal ...........................................5-20

Stopping and parking the tractor .......................................................5-21

Manually releasing the Park Lock ....................................................... 5-22

Power take-off ....................................................................................5-23

• Power take-off engagement ............................................................ 5-24

• Synchronised power take-off (if equipped) ..................................... 5-25

• External PTO controls ......................................................................5-26

Rear Auto PTO (if equipped) ...............................................................5-27

• Auto PTO activation .........................................................................5-27

• Auto PTO deactivation .....................................................................5-27

• Memorisation of the ON and OFF positions ...................................5-27

Selecting PTO speed .......................................................................... 5-28

PTO overspeed ................................................................................... 5-29

Interchangeable PTO shaft. ................................................................5-29

Precautions when using the PTO ....................................................... 5-30

Front power take-off ........................................................................... 5-31

Front hitch...........................................................................................5-33

Brakes ................................................................................................. 5-36

Parking brake ......................................................................................5-37

Hydraulic trailer brake .........................................................................5-38

Control position for parking brake ......................................................5-43

Stationary ............................................................................................5-44

Differential lock ..................................................................................5-45

Table of contents Page n.

Section 5

1-6

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Operating the four-wheel drive .......................................................... 5-47

Engine set point .................................................................................5-49

Tractor transport ................................................................................. 5-51

Tow equipment - Front pull hook. .......................................................5-54

Drawbar ..............................................................................................5-55

Pick up hitch .......................................................................................5-56

Height adjustable hitch. .....................................................................5-60

Towable weights.................................................................................5-64

Rear hitch (mechanical control) ..........................................................5-69

• Sensitivity adjustment ..................................................................... 5-71

• Down speed control ........................................................................5-71

• Top link of the mechanical hitch .....................................................5-72

• External contro for hitch (if equipped) ............................................5-73

Rear hitch (electronic control) ............................................................5-74

• Electronically controlled hitch - activation ......................................5-75

• Hitching an implement .................................................................... 5-76

• Use during work .............................................................................. 5-77

Auxiliary control valves ....................................................................... 5-80

Use of the auxiliary control valves .....................................................5-82

• Free discharge ................................................................................. 5-83

• Single/double action selection ........................................................ 5-84

• Diverter valve ...................................................................................5-84

Quick couplers....................................................................................5-85

Connecting Remote Hoses ................................................................5-85

Disconnecting hoses and implements ..............................................5-86

Joystick lever to control midmount control valves ............................5-87

Auxiliary control valve with electro-hydraulic divider ......................... 5-88

Rear Three-Point Hitch .......................................................................5-89

Tyres, wheels, ballasting ......................................................................6-1

Tyre Inflation Specifications .................................................................6-3

Tyre pressures, Load Capacities And Service ...................................... 6-4

Tyre inflation procedure ........................................................................6-6

Tyre and wheel service ......................................................................... 6-7

Tyre installation .....................................................................................6-7

Wheel removing procedure ..................................................................6-8

Setting The Front Wheel Toe-In ............................................................6-9

Front axle - steering stops ..................................................................6-10

Track adjustment ................................................................................6-11

Front and rear wheels bolt torques .................................................... 6-18

Front to rear tyre size combinations ..................................................6-19

• wheels with bolted rims ..................................................................6-19

Front wheel fenders ...........................................................................6-20

Tractor ballast .....................................................................................6-22

Regular service intervals ......................................................................7-1

Routine maintenance table ..................................................................7-2

Recommendations before you service ................................................7-8

Lubrication and maintenance ............................................................... 7-9

Running in ..........................................................................................7-10

Servicing intervals ..............................................................................7-10

Miscellaneous checks ........................................................................ 7-10

Lubrication/Greasing ..........................................................................7-11

General tractor inspection ..................................................................7-11

Fuel tank filling ...................................................................................7-12

Engine oil specifications ....................................................................7-13

Approved fuels ...................................................................................7-15

Protective agent for the cooling system ............................................ 7-16

AdBlue® (urea solution AUS 32) ........................................................7-17

Exhaust gas post-treatment system ..................................................7-18

Table of contents Page n.

Section 7

Section 6

1-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Table of contents Page n.

Section 8

Selective Catalytic Reduction ............................................................. 7-19

Access for inspection and maintenance ............................................7-23

Variable maintenance (every 10 hours or daily) .................................7-25

Check coolant level ............................................................................7-32

Cab filter - Variable maintenance .......................................................7-81

General maintenance .........................................................................7-83

Preparing for long idle periods ........................................................... 7-86

Fire prevention ....................................................................................7-87

Electrical system ..................................................................................8-1

Electrical system - Battery ....................................................................8-2

Battery system servicing ...................................................................... 8-3

Headlights ............................................................................................8-5

Lamp replacement ...............................................................................8-6

Fuses and relays ...................................................................................8-8

7-pin power socket for trailer .............................................................8-12

EBS power socket for trailer diagnosis (ISO 7638) ............................ 8-13

Auxiliary power socket .......................................................................8-14

Diagnostic connectors .......................................................................8-15

Specifications - Alphabetical index ......................................................9-1

Weights and dimensions ......................................................................9-2

Engine ...................................................................................................9-3

Electric system ..................................................................................... 9-4

Transmission.........................................................................................9-5

Clutch ...................................................................................................9-5

Rear axle ...............................................................................................9-6

Rear brakes ...........................................................................................9-7

Front axle ..............................................................................................9-7

Track adjustment ..................................................................................9-8

Power steering system .........................................................................9-8

Hydraulic circuit ....................................................................................9-9

Electronically controlled hitch ..............................................................9-9

Three-point linkage .............................................................................9-10

Auxiliary control valves ....................................................................... 9-10

Cab .....................................................................................................9-10

Optional extras ...................................................................................9-10

Radio specifications ...........................................................................9-11

Noise levels ........................................................................................9-12

Vibration levels ...................................................................................9-13

Issue of authorization .........................................................................9-14

Weights ..............................................................................................9-14

Lubricants and fuels chart .................................................................. 9-15

Implement attachment points ............................................................9-17

Alphabetical index ..............................................................................9-19

Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013 ...............................................................9-21

Section 9

1-8

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

NOTE

This manual has been published for worldwide circulation. The standard and optional equipment and the availability of

individual models may vary from one country to the next. Argo Tractors reserves the right to undertake modifications

without prior notice to the design and technical equipment at all times without this resulting in any obligation whatso-

ever to make such modifications to units already sold. Whilst every effort is made to ensure that the specifications,

descriptions, photographs and illustrations in this manual are correct at the time of going to print, these are also subject

to change without prior notice. The photographs and illustrations used in this manual may show optional equipment

or may not show all standard equipment. Any reproduction or translation, even partial, is forbidden without the written

authorization of Argo Tractors.

1-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tractor identification data

The tractor ant its main components are identified by

serial numbers and manufacturing codes. The positions

of each identification code are illustrated as follows.

NOTE: Identification data should be communicated to

your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer for requests of spare

parts or service.

Tractor and safety frame identifica-

tion plate

The manufacturer's plate is applied on the outside, at the

rear of the cab floor/platform, on the left side.

The manufacturer's plate shows the following data:

1. Class

2. Number of approval

3. Chassis number

4. Maximum allowed weight (total)

5. Maximum allowed weight (front axle)

6. Maximum allowed weight (rear axle)

Maximum towed weight

7. Trailer with no brakes

8. Trailer with inertia brakes

9. Trailer with hydraulic brakes

10. Trailer with air brakes

Other data are indicated on the authorization certificate.

The plate that identifies the cab is applied just over the

manufacturer's plate.

11. Safety frame type

12. Tractor model

13. FOPS approval*

14. ROPS approval

* NOTE: this field identifies the approval type. If the field

is left empty, the cab does not do not give a satisfactory

protection against objects falling from above. The cab with

an approved FOPS structure gives protection against fall-

ing objects according to the Code 10 of OCSE standards.

Fig.1-1 Tractor identification plate.

Tractor identification

1-10

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tractor identification

Engine identification data

Engine data plate (Fig.1-3.)

The plate (C) can be installed in two positions: in the top

position and on the left side of the crankcase.

Fig.1-3

Fig.1-4

Engine number (Fig. 1-4)

The engine number (D) is punched onto the crankcase

(arrow) and onto the model plate.

Tractor identification number

The vehicle identification number is shown both on the

data plate and on the right-hand front side of the weight

frame. (Fig.1-2)

Fig.1-2 Tractor type and chassis serial number (on the

weight frame).

1-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.1-6

Fig.1-7

Front hitch serial number

The serial number plate of the front end hitch unit is ap-

plied on the left side in the front end, on the radiator core

bearing of the hitch. (Fig.1-6).

Front axle identification plate

The identification number of the front axle assembly is

positioned on the left side, in the rear end of the axle.

Serial numbers of post-treatment components of

exhaust gases (Fig. 1-5)

Serial numbers of post-treatment system components of

exhaust gases are printed on data plates.

Fig.1-5

Tractor identification

1-12

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: This manual is distributed with tractors all over the

world. The equipment indicated as standard or optional

may vary according to the country where the tractor oper-

ates. Please ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for full details

of the equipment available in your country.

The purpose of this book is to enable the owner and driver

to operate the tractor in a safe manner. Provided that the

instructions are followed carefully, the equipment will give

years of service in our tradition.

If you should not understand any part of this booklet,

please do not hesitate to ask your Argo Tractors Dealer

for advice, as these instructions must be correctly under-

stood and complied with. It is advisable to perform a daily

maintenance routine and to keep a register to record the

work hours of the machine.

When new parts are required it is important that only

genuine service parts are used. Authorised Argo Trac-

tors Dealers supply genuine parts and can give advice

regarding their fitness and use. If lesser quality spare

parts are mounted, this can cause major damages and be

a danger to the operator's safety and health. Customers

are therefore required to buy their service parts only from

an authorised Argo Tractors Dealer.

This tractor is designed only for general agricultural

operations. For his full and safe operation, follow the

directions given in this manual.

THE TRACTOR IS UNSUITABLE FOR USE IN

FORESTRY OPERATIONS.

It may become suitable for such use if a forestry kit is

installed which is EC marked and approved and whose

installation is approved by the manufacturer.

The installation and modification of the tractor must

be carried out with the highest technical standards by

specialised workshops with qualified personnel. Such

workshops must be able to guarantee and attest the

risk analysis provided for in the Machinery Directive

2006/42/EC concerning the foreseen and predictable

use of the tractor for forestry work and environment,

in order to carry out all required adaptations of the

tractor. This specific forestry kit must protect the

driver's seat from falling and penetrating objects.

Use in any other way as described hereunder is consid-

ered as contrary to the intended use. The Manufacturer

of the tractor accepts no liability for any damage or injury

resulting from misuse; any resulting risks must be borne

solely by the user.

Also compliance with and strict adherence to the opera-

tion, service and maintenance conditions specified by the

Manufacturer are substantial part of the intended use.

If the tractor must be used in very heavy-duty conditions

Introduction - Warranty

(e.g. deep water or extremely muddy soils), you should

ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for specific instructions, to

avoid invalidating the guarantee.

For the correct operation, service and maintenance of this

tractor you need to be fully acquainted with its specific

features and any associated safety hazards to prevent any

personal injury or damage.

Customers should use an authorised Argo Tractors Dealer

in connection with any problem regarding service and

adjustments.

WARRANTY, PRE-DELIVERY INSPEC-

TIONS AND INSTALLATION

The Company Argo Tractors, when selling new goods

to their Dealers, gives a warranty that, subject to certain

conditions, guarantees that the goods are free from

defects in material and workmanship. As this manual is

published for worldwide distribution, it is impossible to

give a precise and detailed description of the terms and

clauses of the warranty granted in each country for retail

sale. The buyers of new tractors should therefore ask their

Dealer for full details.

According to the Company's policy of continuous improve-

ment to its machines, changes in their technical features

may be made at any time without notice. The Company

accepts no responsibility for discrepancies which may

occur between the specifications of its machines and the

descriptions thereof contained in its publications.

An Argo Tractors Dealer is required to carry out certain

activities when supplying a new tractor. These consist

of a full pre-delivery inspection to ensure that the tractor

supplied is ready for immediate use, and full instruction

in the basic principles of operation and maintenance of

the tractor. These instructions will cover instruments and

controls, routine maintenance and safety precautions. All

persons who will be concerned with the operation and

maintenance of the machine should be present for these

instructions.

NOTE: The Manufacturer will not accept responsibility for

any claim resulting from the fitment of non-approved parts

or attachments, or unauthorized modification or alteration.

1-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARRANTY CLAIM

A correct installation, followed by a regular maintenance,

will help in preventing malfunctions or breakdowns. If you

should detect any assembly defects or malfunctions dur-

ing the warranty period, it will be necessary to immediately

inform the Argo Tractors Dealer stating the problem, the

tractor's model, the serial number and number of worked

hours.

Immediate communication of these information to your

Dealer within the warranty period will make it possible to

analyze the problem to find the correct resolution.

The Warranty will be null and void it such communication

is not within the warranty period.

It should be noted that normal maintenance services such

as tuning, brake/clutch adjustments, and the supply of

materials used to service the tractor (oil, filters, fuel and

antifreeze) are not covered by terms of the warranty.

SPARE PARTS WARNING

Only genuine spare parts should be used as inferior

quality parts may not only impair performance, but also

be dangerous for the operator's health and safety. The

manufacturer of the tractor will not take any responsibility

for any loss, damage or liability resulting from the fitment

of such parts, and, if fitted during the normal warranty

period will invalidate the manufacturer's warranty.

IF YOU MOVE

The Argo Tractors Dealer by whom you bought your trac-

tor is sole responsible for the protection given by your

warranty. We recommend that any repair of your machine

should be made by the Dealer. If you move outside of your

selling dealer's area of responsibility, or the tractor should

operate in a different area, you should enquire and notify

the relevant authorised Argo Tractors Dealer in your new

area about your machine. This will ensure any remaining

warranty and servicing can be supported. If you moved

from the area of your original Argo Tractors Dealer without

any arrangements with the new Dealer, the latter will give

you assistance for emergencies, but will charge normal

prices, unless:

a. You make it clear that the warranty has not expired, and

b. The Argo Tractors Dealer making the repair can make

the due arrangements with the original Dealer.

POST-WARRANTY SERVICE

During the warranty period it is advisable to let your Argo

Tractors Dealer perform every repair and servicing. In this

way the Dealer is able to keep under control operation and

performances of your new tractor.

Introduction - Warranty

In order to obtain the best performances from your tractor,

it is important to go on with regular checks and servic-

ing even after the warranty is expired. Turn to your Argo

Tractors Dealer for all main service operations. A trained

engineer will spot any problems between one service

and the next.

Our engineers are regularly trained and updated on the

product, servicing techniques and the use of modern

service tools and diagnostic equipment. They receive

regular Service Bulletins, have all Workshop Manuals and

other such technical information to ensure that the repair

or service is to the standard required.

SAFETY

The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns

in designing and developing a new tractor. Designers

build in as many safety features as possible. However,

every year many accidents occur which could have been

avoided by a few seconds thought and a more careful

approach to handling farm machinery and implements.

Therefore you are required to read through and imple-

ment the safety instructions detailed in the Safety Notes

section of this book.

CAU-

TION: In some of the illustrations used in this

Operator Instruction Book, panels or guards

may have been removed for clarity. Never op-

erate the tractor without these components

in position. If the removal of panels or guards

is necessary to make a repair, they MUST be

replaced before operation.

1-14

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

IMPORTANT:

Keep with care this operation and mainte-

nance manual on your tractor. Before driving or operating

your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual carefully,

with special attention to the chapter concerning safety

rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the manual

storage compartment for easier reference. If the tractor

should be used also by persons that do not understand

the language of the Country, the employer (or the machine

user) must translate the operating instructions in the lan-

guage understood by these operators.

NOTE:

If the tractor is sold again, this operation manual

should be left on it. The next owner will require the infor-

mation it contains.

Introduction - Warranty

Fig.1-8 Document pocket

2-1

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 2

Safety notes

REGULAR USE

This is an agricultural tractor, whose function consists essentially in traction power. It is therefore specially designed to

push, pull, carry or operate some interchangeable implements for agricultural purpose, or to tow agricultural trailers.

This machine must be driven and operated by an operator suitably instructed and, for countries where it is requested,

firmly seated and wearing a fastened seat belt. [2.x] [2.ab]

This machine is NOT designed for the following purposes:

- To be driven or operated standing high or from outside the cab or the operator's seat, or without fastened seat belts. [2.ab]

- To lift persons.

- To transport persons, within or outside the cab or the operator's seat, in any condition (work or road transport).

- To be used in hazardous atmosphere.

- To be used in forestry.

- To be equipped with front loaders if the tractor is not provided with a suitable structure to protect the operator's seat

from falling and projected objects.

More basic rules

- Keep the cab doors closed while the machine is being used.

- The machine must be used only by a skilled and suitably instructed operator who knows perfectly controls and driving

technique. [2.x]

- External controls of hitch and electro-hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) MUST BE OPERATED standing on one side

outside the tractor and keeping oneself out of the overall width of mudguards [3.b]. It is expressly forbidden to operate

the controls from the rear of the tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.

- Before any operations, carefully analyse all risks and check that the user is skilled enough to safely operate the machine.

WARNING: Improper use of the machine, specially on rough terrain or slopes, can make it tilt over. Pay

particular attention in case of rain, snow, ice or anyway on slippery ground. It may be necessary to step

out of the tractor to check personally ground quality. In the described conditions, always keep the load as

close as possible to the tractor and the ground. [2.v]

WARNING: Do not try to get off the moving tractor, even if it is overturning, to avoid being crushed under

it, but remain seated with the well fastened seat belt and hold firmly the steering wheel. [2.e][2.ab]

WARNING: If the tractor is used as a fixed power unit without supervision (e.g. connection to a pump unit

for irrigation), put up warnings against this dangerous situation and barriers to keep off unauthorized

personnel.

2-2

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS AND TERMS

This safety symbol means WARNING! BEWARE! YOUR SAFETY IS IN DANGER!

This alert symbol draws your attention on important warnings on the implement, in the manual or anywhere else. Pay

great attention whenever you see this symbol: there is a great danger of serious or deadly injuries. Follow the instruc-

tions given in the warning.

WHY IS SAFETY IMPORTANT FOR YOU?

 ACCIDENTS CAN DISABLE and KILL 

 ACCIDENTS COST A HIGH PRICE 

 ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED 

SAFETY - TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT [3.a]

• The tractor is a source of mechanical and hydraulic power.

• This Operator's Manual is compiled to cover safe working practices that are associated with the base tractor

operation.

• It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known implements and attachments that

may be fitted to your tractor in the future.

• All implements connected to the tractor must bear the CE mark (Europe only). All equipment to be connected

must be accompanied by a operation and maintenance handbook, to be read before assembling and using the

equipment.

• It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant Operator's Manual which accompany such im-

plements and attachments not treated in this book.

SAFETY - ADVICE FOR THE OPERA-

TOR

It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the

safety section in this manual before operating your tractor.

You must follow these safety instructions that take you

step by step through your working day. DO NOT USE THE

MACHINE IF YOU HAVE ANY DOUBTS:

In reading this section, you will note that illustrations have

been used to highlight certain situations. Each illustration

is numbered and the same number appears in the text in

parenthesis. This reference number is at the end of the

written text concerning the picture and is composed of

two digits separated by a dash: the first digit before the

dash identifies the section, the second one the progres-

sive number of the picture in the section. (e.g. Fig.2-34 =

Figure 34 of Section 2).

Remember that YOU are the only key to safety. Good

safety practices not only protect you, but also the people

around you. Study the features in this manual and make

them a working part of your safety program.

SAFETY - INTRODUCTION

This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is

intended to point out some of the basic danger situations

that may be encountered during the normal operation and

maintenance of your tractor, and to suggest possible ways

of dealing with these situations. This section is NOT a

replacement for other safety practices featured in other

sections of this book.

Additional precautions may be needed according to the

implements used and to work conditions in the field or

in repair or maintenance areas. The Manufacturer of the

tractor has no direct control over application, operation,

inspection, lubrication or maintenance of utility tractor.

Implementation of correct safety practices in such areas

is therefore YOUR own responsibility.

2-3

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Keep in mind that this safety section is written only for this

type of machine. Practice all other usual and customary

safe working precautions, and above all - REMEMBER -

SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU CAN PREVENT

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

SAFETY - DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION

Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below,

used in this book and on decals, you MUST take note of

their instructions as they relate to personal safety.

DANGER: The symbol and the word DANGER

indicate an imminently hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, will result in DEATH OR

VERY SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING: The symbol and the word WARNING

indicate a potentially hazardous situation. If the

instructions or procedures are not correctly

followed, it could result in DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY IN EXTREME CASES.

CAUTION: The word CAUTION indicates a limited risk

situation which, if not avoided, will result in MATERIAL

DAMAGES AND/OR MINOR INJURIES.

IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify

special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly

observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of

the machine, of the work carried out or its surroundings.

NOTE: The word NOTE is used to indicate points of par-

ticular interest for more efficient and convenient repair

or operation.

SAFETY - DECALS

WARNING: DO NOT remove or efface Danger,

Warning, Caution or Instruction decals.

Any lost or effaced Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruc-

tion decals must be replaced. Replacement decals are

available from your Dealer in the event of loss or damage.

The actual location of these Safety Decals is illustrated at

the end of this section.

If a second-hand tractor has been purchased, refer to

the illustrations at the end of this section to ensure that

all the safety warning decals are in the correct position

and readable.

SAFETY - FOLLOWING A SAFETY

PROGRAM

Safe use of the tractor

Only qualified and authorised operators are able to use

farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you must under-

stand the written instructions supplied in this Operator

Instruction Book, have training in the work area, and know

the safety rules and regulations for the job.

Some regulations state, for instance, that no one younger

than 18 (according to European regulations) may use

machines with engines. Tractors are such machines. It is

your responsibility to know these regulations and comply

with them in the area or the situation in which the tractor

is used.

Such regulations include, without limitation, the following

instructions for a safe use of the tractor.

WARNING: The operator must not be under

influence of alcohol or drugs that can impair

his/her coordination or alert conditions. An

operator under prescription for narcotic drugs

needs a medical certificate stating if he/she is

able to use the tractor safely.

Take the following precautions:

•

Do NOT allow children or unauthorized persons to

drive or use your tractor. Keep others away from your

area of work.

•

Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with an

upright safety frame or a cab. [2.ab]

•

Whenever possible, do not operate the tractor near

ditches, pits or holes in the ground. Slow down when

steering, driving on slopes or driving over rough, slip-

pery or muddy terrain. [2.v]

•

Keep clear from slopes too steep to operate safely.

[2.v]

•

Drive carefully, specially on headlands, on road, near

a ditch and around trees. [2.v]

•

NEVER let anyone get on to the tractor or the imple-

ment.

•

Hitch only from the recommended hitch points. Never

hitch above the central line of the rear axle.

•

Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden turns,

starts or stops. Apply the parking brake whenever

the tractor is stopped.

•

Do not remove or alter any part of the equipment or of

the guards. Do not use the tractor if the safety frame

is removed or damaged. Never use attachments that

are not designed for your tractor.

2-4

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

SAFETY - CAB [2.o][2.p]

The safety cab is designed on purpose for this tractor

series and complies with all law requirements concerning

safety and noise level.

The safety cab complies with international safety stand-

ards prescribed by laws in force. The cab MUST NEVER

be drilled or modified in order to install accessories or

implements. IT IS FORBIDDEN to weld components to

the cab or to repair damaged cab components. Never at-

tach chains or cables to the main framework of the cab

for towing purposes.

WARNING: tractors equipped with cab may have

a roof compliant with standard OCSE Code 10

that gives a limited protection against objects

and loads that might fall from above in typical

agricultural work conditions, but not against

objects and loads that might be projected into

the area normally occupied by the operator.

• Seat belts must always be worn and adjusted snugly

(Fig.2-2). [2.ab]

• From time to time, carefully inspect the seat belt and

replace it if worn or damaged (Fig.2-2). [2.ab]

WARNING: Always fasten your safety belt. [2.ab]

After an accident, let a specialised workshop check the

safety frame, the driving seat, the safety belts and the

anchor points of the safety belts. Replace all damaged

parts before using the tractor again.

ROPS, FOPS, OPS protection

ROPS (safety frame against overturning)

The tractor is provided with a cab with a ROPS safety

structure that protects the driver in case the machine

overturns. In any case the following precautions are

recommended:

• Always fasten your seat belt when the tractor is used

for works at risk for rolling over or overturning. The

ROPS cab is can protect only if the operator is correctly

fastened to the seat.

• Do no use the tractor on slopes of in conditions that

beyond its safety and stability limits. If operated be-

yond such limits, the tractor can roll over or upset.

Please follow the recommendations of this manual

and take great care when driving down steep slopes

with a loaded tractor.

• Take the utmost care when working with the tractor

upon piled-up ensiled crops without concrete trenches

on the sides. Mount dual wheels or increase the track

of the tractor for greater side stability.

Fig.2-1

Fig.2-2

2-5

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

CAUTION

The safety frame is a special safety component

of the machine.

Never connect any towing attachments to the

safety frame. Do not drill holes on the safety

frame.

The safety frame and its connected components are

certified. Any damages, fire, corrosion or modifications

weaken the frame and reduce the protection level. In

this case, the safety frame must be replaced with a new

one to get back to the same protection level as before.

Ask your Dealer for inspections and replacement of the

safety frame.

Following an accident, fire or overturning, the following

operations must be performed by professionals before

using the tractor again on work.

• The ROPS frame must be replaced wit a new one.

• Check carefully for damages the support or suspen-

sion of the ROPS frame, the operator’s seat and its

suspensions, the seat belts, the mounting components

and the wiring of the protection system.

• Any damaged parts must be replaced.

Do not attempt welding, drilling, straightening or repairing

the ROPS frame. Any modification may impair the struc-

ture’s integrity and cause severe injuries or even death

in case of fire, overturning, rolling over, collision or crash.

FOPS (protective structure against

falling objects)

This tractor is provided with a FOPS cab.

The protection level of the FOPS structure of the cab is

approved to the Code 10 OCSE.

The cab with an approved FOPS structure protects against

hazards from falling objects according to the Code 10

of OCSE standards. It is recommended to mount an ap-

proved FOPS structure when you are working with a front

loader or for forestry operations. Cabs with non-approved

FOPS structures do not give a satisfactory protection

against falling rocks, bricks or concrete blocks.

OPS (protection against penetration

of objects)

This tractor is not equipped with an OPS protection struc-

ture. Please read the following important information very

carefully, in particular if forestry work must be carried out.

The protection against penetration of objects (OPS) can

only be obtained by installing a specific kit. Ask your

Dealer for availability of an OPS kit that is approved for

your tractor.

Forestry applications

This tractor is not designed tor heavy forestry work. On

the contrary, such an use is forbidden, unless an approved

KIT FOR FORESTRY APPLICATIONS is installed. Ask your

Dealer for availability of a forestry kit for the tractor model.

Only the specific kit for forestry applications will give a

suitable protection against falling trees.

Mounting and using a front loader

on tractors

Respect the following precautions when working with a

front loader:

Do not use a front loaded on a machine that is not provided

with FOPS structure.

• Do not lift the front loader to such a height that ob-

jects could fall on the operator. Objects or parts of the

load could fall out from the loader bucket and crush

the operator. Take care when loads are lifted. Use

suitable lifting equipment. Do not lift the load more

than required. Lower the load during the transport.

Take care to keep a suitable clearance to the ground

or any obstacles.

• Always use a suitable equipment (forks, buckets

etc.) for the specific work, to be sure the load has the

maximum stability.

• It is recommended that the front loader is mounted

with a parallel driving system. This must be constantly

used to make sure the load in the buckets remains

horizontal, regardless of the height of the lift links.

• Keep the whole operation range of the machine and of

the equipment, and do not let anyone enter the work

area of the machine when it is operating. Do not go,

nor let anyone go under the equipment when it is in

the lifted position. Equipment or loads in lifted posi-

tion may lower or fall abruptly, crushing anyone under

them in that moment.

• Do not use front loaders, buckets, forks etc. or any

further lifting, handling or excavation equipment to lift

persons. Do not use equipment in lifted position as

a work platform.

• Do not use the front loader near overhead electric

lines. In case of contact with overhead electric lines,

jump off the tractor so that you are not touching the

machine and the ground at the same time. If possible,

try and break the contact between the electric lines

and the ground.

• Do not leave any equipment in lifted position when

the tractor is parked or during maintenance operations,

unless if is safely supported. The hydraulic rams must

be mechanically locked or supported if they are to be

left in a lifted position for service or access.

• Loader buckets, forks and any further lifting, handling

or excavation equipment, as well as their loads, tend to

shift the machine barycentre. In this case the machine

could overturn or roll over on slopes or rough terrain.

• The equipment and their loads can obstruct the view

and cause accidents. Do not work if visibility conditions

are unsatisfactory.

2-6

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

2-7

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.2-3

PRECAUTIONS FOR WORKING IN

SAFETY

Protect yourself

NEVER take any risks. Wear all protective clothing and any

personal protection devices (DPI) called for by the work

conditions. (Fig. 2-3).

PERSONAL PROTECTION DEVICES

(DPI)

WARNING: Compulsory personal protection

devices (DPI)

While mounting, operating or servicing the

machine, always wear protective clothing and

personal protection devices (DPI) as necessary

for the specific procedure. Personal protection

devices (DPI) that could be necessary include

safety shoes, eye and/or face protection, hard

hat, heavy gloves, airways and ear protection.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

The following personal safety devices DPI are always neces-

sary:

- Hearing protection.

- Safety footwear.

As personal protection device (DPI) is intended any equip-

ment that the worker must wear and keep as protection

against one or several risks of the work operations that

could jeopardize the worker's safety or health, as well as

any complements or implements to this purpose.

DPI's must be used when, though reducing danger at

the source, a few risks cannot be eliminated in any way.

Such DPI's are therefore necessary and mandatory when

residual risks are present.

WARNING: The tractor is not protected against

dangerous matters and emissions. If you are

working in an environment where there is a

danger of inhaling, ingesting or contacting

dangerous matters, the operator should wear

specific personal safety devices.

[2.o][2.p][6.3.2b]

DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewellery or other

items and tie up long hair that could get entan-

gled in controls or moving parts.

Fig.2-3a

2-8

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.2-3b

A first aid kit should be available on any work site (Fig.2-

3b).

First aid kit

If the tractor's owner or the person responsible for safety

requires that a first aid kit should be on board, the kit

should be kept in a safe and suitable place, as the con-

tained material is highly perishable.

WARNING: The tractor is designed and built to avoid

risks from fire in normal use conditions: For this

reason it is not provided with a self-extinguishing

system or a fire extinguisher on board. The tractor is

anyway preset for the installation of a 1 kg dust-type

fire extinguisher complying with UNI EN 3/7 2004, that

should be placed in the space reserved and indicated

to this purpose (Fig.2-4a).

The fire extinguisher with its support can be bought

as a kit by our Dealers or authorised workshops. The

kit consists in a fire extinguisher, support, fastening

means, directions for its mounting and a decal to be

applied in the indicated area. The decal, when applied,

declares that the tractor may not be used if the fire

extinguisher is not in its place.

It is up to the owner of the farm or to the person

responsible for safety at the farm to judge the oppor-

tunity of using the tractor in areas at high fire risk.

They are also responsible for use of the tractor with

the extinguisher duly mounted.

NOTE: the owner of the farm or the person responsible

for safety at the farm carry the responsibility for the perfect

service order of the fire extinguisher on board. Always

refer to the directions given by the producer of the fire

extinguisher. The regular service intervals as prescribed

by the producer of the fire extinguisher are mandatory.

Before using the tractor in conditions of increased fir risk,

make sure the fire extinguisher is loaded and in perfect

service order.

Fig.2-4

2-9

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Know your tractor

You should learn which are the features of your tractor.

You should also learn how to use all equipment provided

on your machine and all the implements and links that can

be used in connection with it. Learn use and function of

each control, indicator and instrument. You must know

rated load capacity, speed ranges, brake and steering

features, steering radius and handling spaces.

You should always keep in mind that rain, snow, ice, gravel

or muddy soil may affect the drive conditions of your trac-

tor. In heavy conditions, slow down and take utmost care.

Engage four-wheel drive, if provided.

You should also thoroughly study the DANGER, WARN-

ING and CAUTION signals on your tractor and all pertain-

ing information before beginning work (Fig. 2.5.

READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE

STARTING THE ENGINE.

IF THERE IS SOMETHING YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND,

ASK SOMEONE SPECIALISED (e.g. your Dealer) FOR

EXPLANATION.

IMPORTANT: This manual concerns general safety rules

for agricultural tractors. Always keep this manual in your

utility tractor. For further copies, contact your Dealer.

Always use all available protective and safety

devices.

Keep all protective devices in place and securely fastened.

Make certain all guards, shields and safety signs are

properly installed, as specified, and are in good condition.

To help keep yourself and others around you

safe, your tractor should be equipped and kept

in perfect service order with:

•

Safety belts.

•

Power take-off shields.

•

Shields against heat.

•

Shields and guards against shearing, pinching and

moving parts.

•

Rear view mirrors.

•

Anti-explosion shields on tubes, if required.

•

Dust filters in the cab

•

Decals and pictograms.

•

Means to access the driver's seat.

•

Driver's seat.

•

Controls

•

Operator's and service manual.

•

Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem. Additional

safety guards, lights or decals and a back-up alarm

(Fig.2-38 and 2-39) (North America).

Know which devices are required for safe operation of

your tractor. Use them at all times. Make sure they are in

place and in good condition. NEVER remove or disconnect

any safety device.

Fig.2-5

2-10

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.2-7

Check your equipment

Check your tractor before beginning your workday. Make

sure that all systems are correctly operating.

CAUTION: personal safety devices DPI must be worn

for each check and maintenance operation.

•

DO NOT smoke while filling the fuel tank. Keep away

from any type of open flame (Fig.2-7). [2.l]

•

Check for loose, broken, lost or damaged parts. Make

sure that all safety devices are in place.

•

Check safety frame and seat belt for damage. A dam-

aged safety frame or seat belt MUST be replaced.

[2.ab]

•

Ensure that implements and attachments are properly

installed and that the tractor and implement PTO RPM

ratings match.

•

Check the tyres for cuts, bulges and correct pressure.

Replace worn or damaged tyres.

•

Check foot and parking brakes for proper operation.

Adjust if necessary.

•

Before filling up the tank, turn the engine off and wait

for it to cool down.

•

Check the engine oil level and top up if required.

•

Carry out all maintenance and adjustment operations

described in the proper section of this manual.

•

Check that the PTO drive locking devices are latched.

•

Check that the tractor PTO shield and driveline guards

are in place and operating properly.

•

Check the tractor and implement hydraulic system.

Have any leaks or damaged parts repaired or renewed.

•

HYDRODYNAMIC SYSTEMS: HOSES Hoses are an

important component in modern machines. Hoses

can change their characteristics in the course of time

because of pressure, vibrations, weather etc. Laws

in force prescribe that hoses are replaced within 6

years from their construction. WE RECOMMEND

COMPLIANCE WITH THIS RULE. [2.i]

WARNING: When using the auxiliary control

valves, quick couplings may reach high tem-

peratures. Therefore it is mandatory to use

suitable safety gloves when hitching or unhitch-

ing implements connected to these couplings.

Fig. 2-8

WARNING: Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under

pressure can pierce the skin or eyes and cause

serious personal injury, blindness or death.

Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.

Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks.

Never use your bare hands. Wear safety goggles

for eye protection. If any fluid is injected into

the skin, it MUST be surgically removed within

a few hours by a doctor familiar with this type

of injury (Fig. 2-8).

Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system,

be sure all connections are tight and that lines, pipes,

and hoses are not damaged. Before disconnecting fuel

or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all pressure.

Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed

and not crossed or tangled.

WARNING: Liquid cooling systems build up

pressure as the engine gets hot. Before remov-

ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and let the

system cool.

2-11

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Cleaning the tractor

• Keep work surfaces and engine compartments clean.

• Before cleaning the machine, always lower imple-

ments to the ground, engage the first gear, engage

the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove

the key.

• Always use specific PERSONAL SAFETY DEVICES

for each service operation.

• Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or oil.

Brush away dust or mud. In winter, scrape away snow

and ice. Remember - slippery surfaces are dangerous.

• Avoid using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc. when

cleaning plastic parts, e.g.; console, instrument clus-

ter, monitors and gauges etc.

• Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when

you clean these parts.

• Using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc., will cause

cracking or deformation of the part being cleaned.

• Remove and put away any tools, buckets, chains

and hooks.

Save the environment

• Polluting canals, watercourses or soil is illegal. You

must use authorised drains, including communal areas

and workshops provided with suitable containers for

used up oil. If you have any doubts, contact your

local authority for information.

• Check with your local environmental or recycling

centre or your dealer for correct disposal information

on oils, filters etc.

• North American Tractors only:

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide infor-

mation about the chemical substances within a

product, safe handling procedures, first aid measures

and procedures to be taken when the product is

accidentally spilled or released. In North America,

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available

from your dealer.

Before you service your machine, check the MSDS

for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in this machine.

This information indicates what the risks are and how

to service the machine safely. Follow this information

when servicing the machine.

• Disposal of the tractor: the tractor is composed of

parts whose scraping is subject to rules and laws.

Therefore is must be scraped at authorised Centres

when it is no longer used. Do not pollute the envi-

ronment with the tractor or its parts.

SAFETY - TRACTOR MAINTENANCE

[2.h]

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

CAUTION: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

CAUTION: With exception of normal service, as ex-

plained in the Maintenance section, all other servicing

or reparations must be carried out by properly skilled

personnel in authorised workshops.

• DO NOT carry out maintenance operations while the

engine is hot or the tractor is moving.

WARNING: Hot parts of the machine are suitably

guarded, wherever possible. This does not ex-

clude, however, that great care should be used

when working on the machine, to avoid burns

or scalding. [2.n]

• Before any adjustments or servicing on the electri-

cal system, disconnect the battery by operating the

master disconnect switch (if equipped) or discon-

necting the cables of the battery. See the section

concerning battery servicing. [2.aa]

• To prevent fire or explosion, do not go with free

flames near the battery or cold starting device. Care-

fully follow the directions for the use of coupling

cables to avoid sparks that may cause an explosion.

• Check regularly that all nuts and bolts are securely

tightened, specially the nuts in wheel hubs, disks

or rims. Tighten to the prescribed driving torques.

• Check the oil level at regular intervals and top up

if required.

• Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir and/

or adjust where necessary. Make sure that the brakes

are evenly adjusted, especially when using a trailer.

WARNING: When maintenance, fill-up, adjust-

ment, cleaning and any other operations are

required on elements at an height over 1.5

meters, e.g. cab air filters or field lights lamps,

a stable and safe climbing means is mandatory,

such as a ladder solidly secured on the ground.

It is forbidden to climb or grab on to elements

such as the tractor access ladder. They must

only be used to climb up and down the control

compartment of the tractor. Maintenance opera-

tions such as window and roof cleaning or cab

filters replacement must be carried out in utter

safety for the operator and the vehicle. Always

2-12

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

use specific personal safety devices for each

operation. If it is required to work suspended

high on above the ground, always make sure to

be in a safe position so as to avoid falling. [2.h]

WARNING: Work and road lights can be very

hot and dangerous if on since a long time. Take

care to avoid contacts that could cause burns.

If work on these lights is needed, turn them off

and let them cool down.

Always use safety gloves suitable for high tem-

peratures. [2.n]

•

Carry out the following operations before any opera-

tion about the tractor: engage the first gear, engage

the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove

the ignition key. Keep the key in a safe place, only

accessible to authorised users.

Maintenance operations must be carried out when the

engine is cold. If the maintenance operation must be

carried out while the engine is hot (e.g. when changing

engine oil), start the engine and let it idle for the required

time, then turn it off before the maintenance operation.

If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure

indicated under "How to open the bonnet". In this case

beware the risk of burning and shearing.

Personal safety devices DPI must be worn for each check

and maintenance operation.

2-13

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING: for maintenance operations that require

the tractor to be lifted, the tractor must be taken to

your authorised Argo Tractors dealer. All maintenance

operations that involve tractor lifting must be carried

out by skilled and trained technicians at your dealer's.

NEVER try to lift it in unsuitable spaces and with un-

suitable means.

Carry out the following operations before any opera-

tion about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive (if

equipped), the first gear and the parking brake and put

chocks to the wheels touching the ground.

Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means

of wooden wedges applied to the front axle (Fig.2-9a):

the chocks (2 - Fig. 2.9a) must avoid any swinging of the

tractor.

Always lift only the rear or front end, NEVER both ends

at the same time.

Use jack lifts (1) of suitable capacity and apply them at the

centre of the front and rear axles (Fig. 2-9a and 9b) paying

due attention to weight distribution.

[2.k]

Apply the jack lift to the lifting points (Fig. 2-10a) according

to the type of operation and following the safety proce-

dures given before.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

WARNING: Never work under a vehicle only

supported by rams.

SAFETY - START [2.c]

Warn bystanders before starting the engine.

Before starting, walk around the whole tractor and any

attached equipment. Make sure that no one is under, on,

or close to the tractor or equipment. Let other workers

and bystanders know you are starting up and don't start

until everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and

towed equipment.

Make sure that everyone, particularly children, is in a

safe position before starting the engine.

Mount and dismount safely [2.e]

Always use 'three point contact' with the machine, and

face the machine when you mount it. Three point contact

means both hands and one foot or one hand and both

feet are in contact with the machine at all times during

mounting and dismounting.

Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on.

Use handrails, grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided)

when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER use control levers as a hand hold and NEVER step

on foot controls when mounting or dismounting.

DANGER! NEVER try to go on or off the moving

tractor. Before going off the tractor: engage the

parking brake, turn off the engine and take the

ignition key out.

Fig.2-9a

Fig.2-9b

Fig.2-10a

2-14

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 2-13

Fig. 2-12

Fig. 2-11

Fig. 2-10b

Safe start [2.c]

WARNING: Make sure that there is enough ven-

tilation before starting the engine. Never start

the engine in an enclosed space. Exhaust fumes

may cause asphyxiation (Fig.2-10b).

Make sure that the tractor dual brake pedals are locked

together at all times unless you are making turns in the

field which require independent use of the brakes. Make

sure the brakes are properly adjusted so that both brakes

engage at the same time.

Adjust the seat and fasten your seat belt (if applicable,

according the description in this book), [2.ab]

Always start the engine from the operator's seat, after

depressing the clutch pedal, with all the levers of transmis-

sion, PTO and auxiliary control valves in neutral.

DANGER: The engine must be started only

with the ignition key and exclusively from

the driver's seat. DO NOT attempt to start the

engine by shorting across the terminals of the

starter motor. If the starter circuit is bypassed to

neutral, the tractor could start with an engaged

gear, with danger of serious injury or death to

bystanders (Fig.2-11).

Follow recommended starting procedures.

Follow the starting procedures recommended in the

Operation section of this Operator Instruction Book. This

includes normal starting, cold starting, and the use of

starting fluids.

Overhaul the controls.

After engine ignition, overhaul all instruments and lights.

Be sure that all are operating correctly. If the machine

does not respond properly to controls, DO NOT use it

until the fault is mended.

Make sure that the starter motor solenoid valve fuse is

always installed.

Starting fluid

WARNING: do not inject fluids (ether) to make the

engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is

equipped with a cold weather starting system (Fig.2-

12).

Before starting the tractor, make sure that there are no

persons or hindrances in its operating range (Fig.2-13).

2-15

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.2-14

DIRECTIONS TO AVOID IMPROPER USE OF THE TRACTOR

WORKING IN SAFETY

WARNING: An unbalanced tractor could over-

turn and cause injury or death. If required,

put ballast weights on their front supports and

on rear wheels as described in this section of

the Operation chapter. Ballast weights must be

used according to the manufacturer's directions.

NEVER add extra counterweights to compensate

for an overload. It is better to reduce the load.

WARNING: keep all parts of your body inside the opera-

tor's compartment while operating the tractor.

Follow the rules when using your tractor.

Be sure the tractor is ready for the job on hand. Learn the

rated loads by heart and never exceed them. Make sure

that any implement or equipment you are going to use

does NOT exceed the load capacity of your tractor. Check

that the coupling PTO shaft/implement is correct (see the

Technical Specifications section for mass data).

Take into account that the tractor operates normally on

bumpy, unpaved, rough or sloping surfaces. Operating

conditions might affect the maximum allowed load for

transport or towing.

Working in safety

• Operate the controls smoothly, avoid sudden turns

and jerky operations with any controls.

• Keep a firm grip on the steering wheel at all times,

with your fingers clear of the spokes when driving

the tractor.

• Always use specific personal safety devices for each

service operation.

• Make sure you have adequate clearance in all direc-

tions for tractor, cab, safety frame and implement.

• NEVER play games with a tractor or equipment.

• NEVER attempt to work the controls except from

the operator's seat.

• Before going off the tractor, always disengage the

power take-off, lower links and implements to the

ground, shift the gears lever into neutral, engage

the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove

the key.

• Carry out the following operations before leaving the

tractor: engage the first gear, engage the parking

brake, turn the engine off and remove the key.

As an alternative, if the tractor is to be used as a

fixed power unit, before leaving the tractor shift the

gear to neutral, engage the parking brake and use

Before starting the tractor, ensure you have a sure control

over speed and direction controls (Fig.2-14).

every protection or perform every operation neces-

sary to make sure there are no people within the

operating range of the machine.

• Before beginning work, inspect the area to be

worked to assess which is the best and safest work

procedure. Plan your work in order to drive straight

forward, whenever possible. Pay due attention to

ditches, pits, depressions in front of the tractor or on

its side, slopes, tree logs and stumps, swamps and

to any hindrance encountered during word. Check

our for any conditions that could be harmful. Make

a plan to avoid such conditions. If you are using a

front loader or foldable implements or implements

containing high components, make sure there are

no hindrances on its way or in the work area, such

as overhead electric lines of high voltage poles [2.g].

When driving on roads, pay attention to overhead

electric lines that could be encountered on the way.

It may be necessary to change your route to avoid

them. [2.q]

2-16

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.2-15









WARNING: If, unluckily, the machine should

touch an electric line, the operator must remain

seated, avoid touching metal parts and steer the

tractor or loader to free it from the contact and

bring it to a safe distance.

The operator must also make sure that no one

comes near the machine. In these cases the elec-

tric shock often hits per person who is working

on the ground, in contact with the metal frame

of the machine or next to it. [2.q] [6.1.1]

WARNING: Contact with high voltage lines can

cause death. Should you contact conductor

lines, DO NOT leave the tractor, but drive the

tractor or loader so as to go a safe distance to

get rid of the contact (Fig.2-15). [2.q] [6.1.1]

WARNING: in case of storms and weather events

such as lightning that can be dangerous for the

safety both of the operator and the tractor, seek

a shelter immediately.

When you are on the road during a storm, keep

yourself away from phone poles, trees or high

places. Do not seek shelter under trees. Drive

back into the garage immediately and close

doors and windows. [2.r]

2-17

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Beware of other people

•

You must be aware of the operations you are about to

do. NEVER allow unqualified or untrained persons

to operate your tractor. They could be a danger for

themselves or for others.

WARNING: your tractor is designed to be oper-

ated by one person. DO NOT allow others to

ride on the tractor or the implement (Fig.2-16).

Never allow anyone to ride on the implements

or other equipment including trailers, unless

this use is specifically intended. Such equip-

ment must have provision for a safe riding area.

NEVER allow children on a tractor.

WARNING: make sure you can safely control

speed and driving direction of the tractor before

moving it. Start slowly until you are sure every-

thing is operating regularly. After starting, turn

the steering right and left to check for correct

operation. Check steering and brake system for

operation. If the differential is locked, DO NOT

operate at high speed or turn the tractor until

the differential lock is disengaged.

•

Keep others away from your operation area. Never al-

low anyone to stand or pass under a raised implement

(Fig.2-17).

•

DO NOT lift objects that cannot be contained safely

in the bucket, get the appropriate attachment. Never

allow anyone to stand on the safety frames or fenders.

•

When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts,

turns, or changes of direction. Keep loads as near

as possible to the ground during transport. [6.1.1]

•

Never stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front of,

under, or behind loaded or loading equipment. Never

drive a tractor up to someone standing in front of a

fixed object.

DANGER: NEVER lift a load over anyone (Fig.2-

17).

• Keep others away from articulation joints, hitches,

drawbar, lift arms, PTO drives, cylinders, belts, pulleys,

and other moving parts. Keep safety guards in place.

[3.e]

WARNING: NEVER stand, or allow anyone else

to stand between the tractor and implement,

or between the tractor and trailer, unless the

engine is turned off and the parking brake is

engaged, a gear is engaged and all attachments

or implements are lowered to the ground. [3.n]

WARNING: footstep tractors equipped with

just a safety frame are never equipped with an

approved sun roof at the factory. If the owner

wants to mount a device as protection from sun

or rain, such device must not be a danger dur-

ing normal operation or in case of overturning.

Sun roofs normally available on the market are

no protection for the driver against falling or

penetrating objects.

Fig.2-17

Fig.2-16

2-18

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Risk of overturning [2.m]

For your safety, it is mandatory that all footstep tractors

are fitted with original Roll Over Protective Structures

and seat belts.

In the event of overturning with a tractor fitted with a cab

or ROPS, hold the steering wheel firmly and DO NOT at-

tempt to leave the seat until the tractor has come to rest.

If the doors are locked, leave the tractor through the duly

indicated emergency exits (Fig.2-18).

IMPORTANT: the safe working practices listed hereunder

concern only a few cases of overturning risk. The list is

therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible cases.

CAUTIONS to avoid side overturning

•

Adjust the wheels to the maximum possible track

width for the type of work you are doing.

•

Lock both brake pedals together before driving on

road.

•

Reduce your speed according to work conditions.

If the tractor is equipped with a front-end loader, carry

the bucket and load as low as possible. [6.1.1]

•

Reduce your speed before making wide turns.

•

DON'T pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could

run away on the down slope or the tractor could

jack-knife around a towed load (Fig.2-19)

•

DON'T brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and

gradually.

•

When going down a slope use the throttle to slow

the tractor engine and use the same gear you would

use to up the slope. Shift into gear before you start

downhill.

•

Engage four-wheel drive (if equipped); this will give

greater stability.

WARNING: NEVER disengage the clutch or

attempt to shift gear after you have started

downhill.

•

Always go up and down slopes following a straight

upward or downward line.

•

Do not put any overloads on a front implement or a

trailer. Use suitable counter-weights to keep the tractor

stable.(Fig.2-20)

•

NEVER use your tractor to round up farm animals.

Fig.2-18

Fig.2-19

Fig.2-20

2-19

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

•

When operating near ditches and banks, always keep

your tractor behind the shear line (A, Fig.2-22). Avoid

ditches, embankments and river-banks which might

cave in (Fig.2-21). [2.v]

Fig.2-21

•

If you need cross a steep slope, do not steer uphill,

slow down and take wide turns. Always drive straight

up or down a slope, never across it. When travelling

up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of the tractor

and the implement pointed uphill. (Fig.2-23) [2.v]

•

When driving across a slope with mounted imple-

ments, keep such implements on the uphill side

(Fig.2-24). Do not raise implements. Keep them as

low and near to the ground as possible.

•

Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must

do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the downhill

side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or raised areas

on the uphill side. (Fig.2-25)

Fig.2-22

DANGER!

A list of cases and advice to avoid side over-

turning of course cannot be a complete one:

it is up to YOU to consider whether the opera-

tion you want use your tractor for involve a

higher overturning risk. In this case the use

of the tractor is forbidden. [2.m] [2.v]

Fig.2-23

Fig.2-24

Fig.2-25

2-20

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

CAUTIONS to avoid back overturning [2.m]

[2.u]

IMPORTANT: the safe working practices listed hereunder

concern only a few cases of overturning risk. The list is

therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible cases.

WARNING: Hitching to the rear axle, or any

other point above the swinging drawbar, can

cause a rear overturn.

•

DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection,

or from any point above the centre line of the rear

axle. Always use an approved drawbar, and only use

a drawbar pin that locks into place.

•

High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may

cause serious injury or death. Hitch loads to the

drawbar only.

•

Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability

when towing a heavy load or to counter balance a

heavy rear mounted implement (Fig.2-26).

•

DO NOT overload your tractor and DO NOT ballast

it beyond its capacity. Never add ballast to counter-

weight an overload. Reduce the load (Fig.2-27).

WARNING: overload is ALWAYS dangerous.

Check the load capacity of your tractor and

NEVER exceed it (Fig.2-28). See the Technical

Specifications section. [2.u]

Fig.2-27

Fig.2-28

Fig. 2-26

2-21

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

•

Start slowly and increase your speed gradually. DO

NOT rev the engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor

is attached to a heavy load, or immovable object,

improper clutching may cause overturn (Fig.2-30 and

2-31).

•

If the front part of the tractor begins lifting, disengage

the clutch at once (Fig.2-29).

•

If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to

the ground, DO NOT attempt to drive forwards. The

tractor can spin around its rear wheels and overturn

(Fig.2-29). Lift any attached implement and attempt

to BACK OUT. If this is not possible, tow it out with

another vehicle.

•

If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If

you must drive on, drive very slowly and carefully.

•

When a trailer is hitched behind a tractor, the tractor

should typically be driven in forward gear both when

uphill and downhill.

•

A tractor with a loaded front-end (e.g. loader, bucket

etc.) and without a rear trailer should be backed down

the slope and travel forward uphill. Always keep the

loader bucket as low as possible. (Fig.2-31b) [6.1.1]

•

Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill.

Never let the tractor coast with clutch disengaged or

transmission in neutral.

Fig.2-29

Fig.2-30

Fig.2-31

Fig.2-31b

2-22

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Warning:

Dangerous operations [3.b] [3.e]

Safe use of power take off

WARNING: if the guards were removed from the

PTO shaft, it is mandatory to install a suitable

cover and guards to protect bystanders and

connected implements.

Do not use the PTO without installing suitable

guards to protect the safety of operators.

•

Make sure that the PTO shield (1) is in its positions

and that the not rotating shaft cover (2) is mounted

when the power take-off is not used (Fig.2-32).

To engage the power take-off:

a. Make sure that all safety guards and shields of the

PTO shaft are in place and follow the directions of

the safety decals.

b. Make sure that everyone stands clear of the tractor

before engaging the PTO.

c. Make sure that the implement and the driveline uni-

versal coupling are suitable for the use, provided with

specific guards, fully mounted and in perfect order.

d. Make sure that the power take-off rotation rate is

suitable for the mounted implement and for the work

to be carried out.

e. The power take-off must be engaged only from the

driver's seat, carefully operating the specific control.

f. When the power take-off is engaged, never leave

your seat. Before leaving the driver's seat, always

disengage the power take-off shifting the control to

the idle position, wait for the drive transmission shaft

and the implement to stop, engage the parking brake

and turn off the engine.

DANGER: Before connecting, disconnecting,

cleaning, adjusting or carrying out any op-

eration on implements or machines operated

by the power take-off, always disconnect the

power take-off, turn off the engine, wait for the

implement to be stopped and to the ground,

remove the ignition key from the driving posi-

tion (Fig.2-34).

Stationary use of the tractor:

•

You must always make sure that any bystander are

well clear of the tractor and moving implement. Place

the tractor on a flat surface. Engage the power take-

off as described previously. Before leaving the tractor,

always shift gearbox, reverse shuttle and ranges to

neutral, then engage the parking brake acting with

enough force on the control lever. If soil conditions

so require, block the tractor and implement wheels

with suitable wedges.

DANGER: Do not go near the moving implement

or to the drive shaft, and do not allow other

persons to do so. (Fig.2-33)

Fig.2-32

2-23

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

•

If the power take off is provided with controls outside

the driver's seat, besides using the above mentioned

precautions, always operate the controls from a safe

position, far from implement and drive shaft, standing

beside the outer edge of the front or rear tyres, as

the case may be.

•

DO NOT use adapters, reducers or extensions that

could extend the coupling shaft to the PTO or the

universal joint outside the protection of the PTO shield.

•

The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond

the point where threads begin to show.

DANGER: NEVER attempt to unplug the hydrau-

lic connections, adjust or service an implement

with the engine running or the PTO drive in

operation. There is a great danger of serious

or deadly injuries (Fig.2-34).

•

When using chemicals, carefully follow any directions

for their use, storage and discharge. Also follow the

directions given by manufacturers of equipment for

applying chemicals. Always use specific PERSONAL

SAFETY DEVICES for each service operation.

•

When operating under poor visibility conditions, or

in the dark, use your tractor field lights and reduce

your ground speed. (DO NOT use your field lights

when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed

white lights are illegal except when reversing and

may confuse following drivers).

•

Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest

setting possible, consistent with the particular task

you are performing. To adjust wheel settings, refer

to Section 6 "Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting".

•

Slow down when working on rough or slippery ter-

rain, and when visibility is reduced by bushes or

foliage.

•

DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.

WARNING: some mounted or semi-mounted imple-

ments can interfere with the cab and damage it. In

this case the operator may be wounded by a broken

glass or the ROPS frame can be damaged.

Fig.2-33

Fig.2-34

2-24

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Implements and attachments [6.1.1] [3.o]

WARNING: Use exclusively front loader ap-

proved by the tractor's manufacturer, with CE

mark and parallelogram type. The installation

and modification of the tractor must be carried

out with the highest technical standards by

specialised workshops with qualified person-

nel. Such workshops must be able to guarantee

and attest the risk analysis provided for in the

Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC concerning the

foreseen and predictable use of the tractor with

front loader, in order to carry out all required

adaptations of the tractor. Use the front loader

and all supplied equipment as prescribed by

the loader's operator manual.

IMPORTANT: Keep the loader's operation manual together

with the tractor's manual, always at hand in the storage

compartment of the tractor. Before driving or operation

your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very care-

fully, with special attention to the chapter concerning

safety rules.

DANGER: Use of the front loader and of the

tractor equipped with front loader, if not cor-

rectly carried out, and handling not secured

loads or with unsuitable equipment constitute

a serious danger for the operator and everyone

standing by, because of the danger of falling

objects. (Fig.2-35)

[6.a]

•

Three-point hitch and side mounted implements make

a much larger arc when turning than towed equipment.

Make certain to maintain enough clearance for safe

turning. [3.b]

•

To use mounted, semi-mounted and towed equipment

it is required to use exclusively CE marked implements,

after reading their operation and service handbooks

carefully, giving maximum attention to risks connected

with their association to the tractor. [3.a]

•

If implements are hitched to the tractor by means of

the three-point linkage, check for compliance of the

implements according to category. [3.a]

The implement has to be fitted with suitable supports

in order to avoid tipping or accidental shifting during

hitching.

Always check three-directional fastening to the tractor

of the mounted or semi-mounted implement, to avoid

dangerous swinging and shaking during transport and

work that could jeopardize the stability of the tractor-

implement assembly. [2.u] [2.z]

•

The cardan shaft must be always CE-marked and

suitable to tractor-implement coupling. Follow all

directions of the operation manual, concerning both

the fastening according to connection direction and

safety rules to avoid rotation of protections (chains)

and overlaying of the telescopic tubes. Also keep

articulation angles. [3.e] [3.l]

•

Hitch loads to the drawbar only. Towing or attaching

to other locations may cause the tractor to overturn.

(Fig.2-36) [2.u] [2.z]

•

Improper use of the drawbar, even if correctly posi-

tioned, can cause a rear overturn. [2.u] [2.z]

Fig.2-36

Fig.2-35

WARNING: a tractor provided with 2-post frame

or cab, cannot be provided with a front loader

if not also provided with a protection from fall-

ing objects (FOPS). In such conditions there is a

residual risk from lack of passive protection from

objects falling from above due to improper use of

the equipment.

To reduce risks, the following precautions should be

used.

- Only use loader equipped with a load self-levelling

system, i.e. of the parallelogram type.

- Only use specific implements for the operation to be

performed. Strictly follow the directions and warnings

in the loader's operation manual.

[2.g]

- Use the machine and the implement with caution,

drive on plane ground and avoid pits, excavations and

ditches. Do not turn, start or stop abruptly.

- If a front loader is mounted afterwards, it is advis-

able to use a tractor with cab or with a 4-post frame

with FOPS safety system. The loader installer should

carefully analyse all risks and make all required ad-

justments.

2-25

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

•

Check for correct coupling between tow hook and

trailer. Refer to the “Operation” section 5 in this

manual. [2.z]

•

Use ballast as recommended. NEVER add more ballast

to compensate a higher load than allowed. Reduce

load.

•

Only North American markets. A safety chain will help

control drawn equipment should it be accidentally

separated from the drawbar while transporting. Us-

ing the proper adaptor parts, attach the chain to the

tractor drawbar support or other specified anchor

location. Provide only enough slack in the chain to

permit turning. See your Dealer for a chain with a

strength rating equal to, or greater than the gross

weight of the

towed machine (Fig.2-37)

Road transport

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number

of precautions must be taken.

•

Make yourself familiar with all driving controls of your

tractor.

•

Comply with all local bye-laws, and national laws

appropriate to your tractor.

•

Lock your brake pedals together.

•

Raise all implements to their transport position and

lock them in place.

•

Place all implements into their narrowest transport

configuration.

•

Disengage the PTO and differential lock.

•

Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with

slow moving vehicle (SMV) signs or beacon if local

laws requires them (Fig.2-38 and 2-39).

•

Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard

lights are in place and in working order.

•

Make sure you use a proper safety hitch pin with a

safety clip retainer.

•

Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear,

and be certain they are in working order.

•

Three-point hitch and implements jutting out from

the sides make a much larger arc when turning than

towed equipment. Make certain to maintain enough

clearance for safe turning.

Highway Code regulations

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number

of precautions must be taken.

WARNING: DO NOT allow any passengers on the

tractor, trailer or towed equipment.

•

Know the route you are going to travel.

•

Use the prescribed lights or, if required, the rotating

beacon, both in the daytime and in the night-time

(Fig.2-39).

•

North America - Use regulation lights and blinking

hazard lights when travelling on road.

•

Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds

especially if the towed equipment is NOT equipped

with brakes.

•

Observe all local or national regulations regarding the

road speed of your tractor.

•

Use extreme caution when transporting on snow-

covered or slippery roads.

Fig.2-38 - Use the symbol in force in your country

Fig.2-39

Fig. 2-37

CAUTION: To drive the tractor on public roads, it

is mandatory to abide by the laws in force in the

country where the tractor is being used, includ-

ing the dictated speed limit and the correct use of

lights, hazard light and slow moving vehicle signs.

When driving on public roads, it is also mandatory

to use the tractor with the brake pedals coupled

with the relative latch.

2-26

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.2-40

Fig.2-41

•

Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public road.

•

Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you

have a clear view.

•

DO NOT attempt to pass at any intersection.

•

Slow down for turns and curves.

•

Make wide, gentle turns.

•

Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.

•

Shift to a lower gear before going up or down hills.

(Fig.2-40)

•

Keep tractor in gear. Never coast with the clutch

disengaged or transmission in neutral (Fig.2-40).

•

Check for correct coupling between power steering on

the tractor and corresponding system on the tractor.

•

STAY OUT of the path of oncoming traffic.

•

Drive in your correct lane keeping as near to the curb

as possible.

•

If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and

let it go by.

•

Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might

do.

•

When towing a heavy load, start braking sooner than

normal and slow down gradually.

•

Watch out for overhead obstructions (bridges, trees

etc.).

SAFETY - AFTER USE [3.c]

Always stop the tractor safely (DO NO park the tractor on

a slope). Engage the parking brake, engage the Park-Lock

(if equipped), disengage the PTO, engage the lowest gear,

lower any implement to the ground, stop the engine and

remove the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver's seat

(Fig.2-41).

WARNING: To prevent accidents do not park

the tractor with equipment raised.

2-27

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Further notes

The following notes are designed to complete the Opera-

tion and Maintenance Manual to ensure that your tractor

always works safely, reliably and efficiently.

Tractors are mainly designed for hitching implements

that are held by a three-point linkage, for towing them by

the tow-hooks or for driving implements using the PTO.

To obtain the greatest possible towing force, particularly

when using a tractor with dual rear wheels, you should

observe the following rules concerning axle loads and

wheel slip.

If an extra implement is attached, the extra loads must

conform to the specifications given in the Manual or by

your dealer.

1. Front axle payload: 4WD tractors.

A front axle carries normally about 40% of the tractor

on road without implements. Therefore an additional

weight on the front and could be required to give the

front axle proper drive.

If an implement is mounted on the front end of the

tractor, check the weight of the fully loaded implement

by placing the front axle on a scale: the maximum

axle load must be less than the capacity of the front

axle.

Consult this manual or your Dealer to know maximum

load capacity of front axle (max. weight on front axle)

according to tyres mounted on your tractor.

2. Rear axle payload.

The maximum permissible payload for the rear axle

depends on whether or not the tractor is carrying a

weight or towing a load.

When the tractor is only carrying a load, without tow-

ing, the wheels must have sufficient capacity that is

ensured if the tyres are of the exact size and have

the specified number of warps (plies).

In certain conditions, extra weight may be applied to

the rear axle but it is not normally necessary unless

the ground offers very little grip.

Consult this manual or your Dealer to know maximum

load capacity of rear axle (max. weight on rear axle)

according to tyres mounted on your tractor.

When fully loaded, the weight of the tractor must be

less than the maximum permissible ballasted weight

since the tractor cannot be loaded right up to the

maximum static payload for each of the axles, front

and rear, at the same time.

3. Ballast and wheel slip.

Wheel slip must be measured for the tractor to oper-

ate efficiently during tillage.

On normal terrain in good operating conditions, wheel

slip should be between 4 and 10%.

On wet soil, wheel slip can exceed 12%.

If wheel slip is found to be greater than this amount,

proceed with care as operating conditions might

quickly become unstable and cause early tyre wear.

In certain conditions, it might be better to add ballast

in order to reduce wheel slip, but this increases the

workload of the transmission and thus reduces the

working life of the tractor.

This manual will help you ascertain the maximum bal-

last weight that you can use in your normal working

conditions.

Using dual wheels (if allowed) or wider tyres, the

tractor will have greater grip but the workload on the

transmission will also be greater, thus reducing the

working life of the tractor.

The only torque limiter in transmission is wheel slip.

Front axle lead when four-wheel drive is en-

gaged.

In a 4WD tractor, the ground speed of the front wheels

must be slightly faster than the rear wheels, in order

to ensure traction in any condition.

Therefore the front wheel lead should be between

1% and 4%, but not over 5%

The tyres supplied with your tractor have been checked

for the correct lead of the front wheels, but when you

change them, make sure you use tyres of the same

make and size in order to maintain the same speed

ratio between front and rear wheels.

If tyres of different makes are used, their size and

internal pressure may modify this ground speed ratio,

or advance. This could increase the load on the front

axle and lead to unacceptable operating conditions,

excessive tyre wear and, in extreme conditions, dam-

age to the front axle or transmission.

Always use the correct tyre pressures based on

tractor loading and ground conditions. This ensures

optimum performance greater operator comfort and

overall safety and reduces wear and tear to the drive

train components

2-28

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

9. Operating the clutch.

Prolonged clutch slipping at high engine speed with

large loads will cause the clutch disc to heat up,

thereby reducing its working life. For optimum life of

the clutch, both the tractor load and the engine speed

rate should be reduced when starting from parking

position.

10. Further instructions for the operator.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides

instructions to ensure that the tractor is always used

in safe conditions. Please comply strictly to them.

If your tractor is also driven by other people, make sure

that they are fully aware of these accident prevention

instructions and that they are licensed for driving this

vehicle.

It is forbidden to carry anyone on the outer structure

of the tractor or on mudguards in any circumstances.

This is because the safety frame that protects against

overturning is only designed to protect persons inside

the cab or roll-over protection structure, correctly

seated and wearing properly fastened safety belts.

[2.ab]

11. Instructor's seat use [2.w] [2.ab]

a. An eventual second seat in the cab is only provided

for a driving instructor.

b. The passenger must always fasten the safety belt

when the tractor is moving.

c. It is forbidden to transport any passenger during

normal work operation on the field or on road.

12. Chemical filters for the cab.

Use of a filter with chemical absorbent in air-condi-

tioned cabs can reduce ambient contamination on

the cab.

PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT FOR THE

DRIVER MAY BE HOWEVER NECESSARY WHEN

USING CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES.

Wash the tractor and driver's seat accurately accord-

ing to the directions on the product label.

ALWAYS follow the instructions on the labels of the

chemical substances and on the filters to be used.

13. Battery

For detailed information, see the sections Maintenance

- Electric system.

5. Economy Power take-off

As shown in the Operation and Maintenance Manual,

the economy PTO is a feature that makes it possible

to use the PTO at standard speed using lower RPM

rates to reduce fuel consumption.

The economy PTO does not need to use the maximum

power of the engine, but it is designed to save fuel.

When using the Economy PTO, make sure that the

implement input shaft RPM NEVER exceeds the rec-

ommended RPM for the implement, e.g. max. 610

RPM for a 6 spline shaft (540 RPM), and max. 1170

RPM for a 21 spline shaft (1000 RPM).

6. Working on slopes.

It is important to note that, when working on very steep

slopes, the lubrication conditions in the transmission

may be reduced. This is caused by the oil flowing

towards the front or rear part of the transmission unit.

Special measures and extra lubrication may be re-

quired when using the tractor in a safe condition.

Your dealer will be able to assist you if you expect to

work on slopes of over 15°.

WARNING: Risk of overturning.

Stability and adherence on sloping ground

might easily change according to soil and

weather conditions. Use the tractor with ut-

most care. [2.m]

7. Remote hydraulic controls.

The hydraulic system of the tractor may be used in

some particular applications to operate the hydraulic

motors.

When using these applications, note that the hydraulic

motors can generate considerable heat and the oil

cooling system of the tractor may not be sufficient

when these high-power hydraulic motors are used.

Some remote applications have an extra cooling sys-

tem. However, every time they are used, make sure

that the oil is cooled and filtered sufficiently in order

to avoid damage to the tractor's hydraulic system.

8. Towing heavy loads (trailers, etc.)

When heavy loads are towed, the road rules in some

countries require a supplementary braking system

(e.g. air or hydraulic trailer brakes).

Consult your dealer for any further requirements there

may be for special applications.

2-29

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tractor stability

[2.m] [2.u] [2.z]

The following procedure describes the conditions for a

proper stability and gives instructions to calculate correct

front and rear ballasting. For ballasting, also consult the

pertaining recommendations in this manual. For maximum

allowed weight in running order, refer to weight and load

data in this manual.

RISK OF OVERTURNING!

To prevent machine instability, ALWAYS evalu-

ate and comply with stability requirements as

given in this manual.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

The following procedure and calculations refer to the

tractor on level ground.

RISK OF OVERTURNING!

ALWAYS keep in mind the possible conse-

quences of downhill driving and steep slopes

on tractor's stability. Such conditions can affect

operation, turning and braking performances.

Adjust ballasts and ground speed to ensure

a safe and stable braking, as well as braking

performances required in critical conditions.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

How to calculate tractor stability as suggested by EN

12525.

Data required to evaluate tractor stability

1. The weight of the implement (seed drills, fertiliser

spreaders, etc.) and of the relative filling material must

be added to the weight data of the loaded tractor.

2. Ballasting data, either with ballast blocks or liquid

ballast, on front or rear wheels must be added to MF,

MR and MT data.

3. If two-wheel trailed implements are mounted, value

c corresponds to the distance of the rear axle centre

line and the attachment point, value d is 0 (zero) and

BR corresponds to the downward load of the trailer

on its attachment point.

Key

Please

refer to:

Tractor's empty weight = trac-

tor with standard equipment,

fuel at min. level, without liq-

uid ballast or blocks, without

operator and with single tyres

This manual

MF Empty load on front axle This manual

MR Empty load on rear axle This manual

Distance from front load centre

of gravity to centre line of the

front axle

Implement's

manual or to be

measured

Centre distance

This manual

Distance from rear axle centre

line to bottom attachment

point of three-point linkage

This manual or

to be measured

Distance from centre of grav-

ity of rear load to bottom at-

tachment point of three-point

linkage

Implement's

manual or to be

measured

and

Distance from centre line of

rear axle and centre of gravity

(COG) of MT (tractor's empty

weight)

To be calculated

(according to

formula in the

following pages)

Weight of front equipment or

front ballasts

Implement's

manual or to be

measured

Weight of rear equipment or

rear ballasts

Implement's

manual or to be

measured

MPT

max

Max. allowed weight with

loaded tractor

This manual

MPF

max

Max. allowed weight on front

axle

This manual

MPR

max

Max. allowed weight on rear

axle

This manual

2-30

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Constant parameters

0.2

Min. distribution ratio of loads:

actual load on front axle in condi-

tions of loaded tractor/tractor's

empty weight

Law require-

ment

0.45

Min. distribution ratio of loads:

actual load on rear axle in condi-

tions of loaded tractor/tractor's

empty weight

Law require-

ment

Ballasts required on front

To be calculated

BFr

Ballasting required on tractor's front end when

transporting a load on rear end BR

Calculation of the value of BFr

MT * and = MF * b

e = (MF * b)/MT

BR * (c+d) - (MT * e) + (MPF * b) = BFr * (a+b)

MPF > 0.2 * MT

Value MPF must be grater than 0.2 * MT

BFR > [BR*(c+d) - (MF*b) + (0.2*MT*b)] / (a+b)

Ballasts required on rear

To be calculated

BRr

Ballasting required on tractor's rear end when

transporting a load on front end BF

Calculation of the value of BRr

MT * (b - e) = MR * b

BF*a - MT*(b - e) + (MPR*b) = BRr * (b + c + d)

MPR > 0.45 * MT

Value MPR must be grater than 0.45 * MT

BRr > [(BF*a) - (MR*b) + (0.45*MT*b)] / (b + c + d)

Load limits on axle

To be calculated

MPF

MPF < MPF

max

MPR

MPR < MPR

max

MTP

MPT < MPT

max

Calculation of MPF

(MPF*b) - BF*(a + b) - (MT*e) + BR*(c + d)

MPF =

[BF*(a + b) + (MF*b) - BR*(c + d)]/b

MPF

max

Calculation of MPT

MTP = BF + MT + BR < MPT

max

Calculation of MPR

MPR = MPT - MPF < MPR

max

To know the value of MPFmax, refer to the values indicated

by the manufacturer in Section 9 "Specifications" of this

manual. [3.h]

2-31

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tractor's lifting points [2.k]

WARNING: for maintenance operations that require

the tractor to be lifted, the tractor must be taken to

your authorised Argo Tractors dealer. All maintenance

operations that involve tractor lifting must be carried

out by skilled and trained technicians at your dealer's.

NEVER try to lift it in unsuitable spaces and with un-

suitable means.

Carry out the following operations before any opera-

tion about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive (if

equipped), the first gear and the parking brake and put

chocks to the wheels touching the ground.

Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means

of wooden wedges applied to the front axle (Fig.2-42):

the chocks (2 - Fig. 2-42) must avoid any swinging of the

tractor..

Always lift only the rear or front end, NEVER both ends

at the same time.

Use jack lifts (1) of suitable capacity and apply them at

the centre of the front and rear axles (Fig. 2-42 and 2-43)

paying due attention to weight distribution. [2.k]

Apply the jack lift to the lifting points (Fig. 2-44) according

to the type of operation and following the safety proce-

dures given before.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

WARNING: Never work under a vehicle only

supported by rams.

Fig.2-42

Fig.2-43

Fig.2-44

2-32

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Access to the tractor with cab

CAUTION: Do not jump on or off the tractor.

It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,

use the hand rails and steps, and get on or off

slowly. Maintain a minimum three point contact

to avoid falling (both hands on rails and one

foot on the step, or one hand on the hand rail

and both feet on the steps).

Fig.2-45

Enter or leave the tractor through the left-hand door.

Cab emergency exit [2.d]

The rear and right side windows of the cab may be used

as an emergency exit only if really necessary.

In case the cab should be left quickly in an emergency,

and it would not be possible from the left door, turn the

engine off, and open the rear door by means of the middle

handle (Fig.2-46) to leave quickly.

As an alternative, the right-hand side door may be used

for a quick exit.

Fig.2-46

ACCESS TO TRACTOR [2.e]

2-33

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fuel tank filling [2.l]

(Fig. 2-47a)

WARNING: before filling fuel, always turn off the

engine.

WARNING: Never smoke while refuelling. Keep

away from naked flames.

Filling with AdBlue™ or DEF

(Fig. 47b)

WARNING: avoid any contacts with your eyes, skin

or garments.

• If ingested. If a great amount of the fluid is ingested,

seek immediately medical help. DO NOT induce vom-

iting it not expressly indicated by medical personnel.

Do not administer liquids to an unconscious person.

• In case of contact with your skin, wash with plenty of

water and remove the contaminated garments..

• In case of contact with your eyes, wash immediately

with plenty of water. In case of rash, seek medical help.

• If gases should be inhaled, go immediately in the open

air and seek medical help, if necessary.

• Avoid any contacts of AdBlue™ or DEF with other

chemicals.

• Do not drain AdBlue™ or DEF spills into the sewers.

Fig.2-47a

Fig.2-47b

2-34

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Wedges

(if equipped).

DANGER:

The tractor could move unexpectedly!

When using implements that require a tractor at

standstill but with running engine, put into neutral

the gearshift, range and reverse shuttle levers, then

engage the parking brake. For greater safety, use

wedges on the wheels.

Failure to comply with these directions could cause

injuries or death.

WARNING : The tractor could move unexpect-

edly!

Use suitable wedges when the tractor is parked on

steep slopes with engine off.

Place the wedges (Fig.2-48) in front of or behind one of

the rear wheels, according to the direction with respect

to the slope. When the wedge is at rest in its seat, check

that it is secured with its locking hook (Fig.2-49).

WARNING: When installing a wedge under the

wheel, take care not to catch your hands between

the folding metal parts.

Fig.2-48

Fig.2-49

2-35

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Risks from noise

Noise Characteristics and Measurement

Noise is a pressure variation in an elastic medium, gener-

ally the air, produced by the vibration of a material body

(source) that determines an undesired and often annoy-

ing acoustic sensation. Noise is mainly characterised by:

sound intensity or level: expresses the entity of the

pressure variation due to the sound wave. Measured in

decibels (dB), it doubles the sound intensity and, thus,

the energy that reaches the ear.

frequency: expresses the number of pressure varia-

tions of the wave per second and is measured in Hertz

(Hz) - high-pitched noises have high frequencies (2000-

4000 Hz or more), while low-pitched noises have low

frequencies (250 Hz or less).

How the risk is evaluated

The higher the sound level and exposure time, the greater

the noise risk will be.

Two parameters are used:

LAeq (Equivalent continuous weighted level A): this

is a sound level measurement that takes into account

noise fluctuations and the varying sensitivity of the ear

to the frequencies: LAeq is measured with a sound-level

meter;

PEL (Personal Exposure Level): this is a measurement

that takes the various noise levels into account along

with the time the worker remains on the individual

machines or working at certain processes: PEL is

calculated mathematically.

Noise Pathologies

Damage To The Hearing

Noise causes hypoacusis or deafness because it destroys

the acoustic receptors, nervous cells able to transform

the mechanical sound vibrations into nervous impulses

that, on reaching the brain, determine the aural sensation.

These receptors are irreplaceable if they are destroyed and

the resulting damage is irreversible: hypoacusis worsens

if exposure to noise continues and does not improve even

if this terminates.

Moreover, it is also bilateral since it can be accompanied

by annoying buzzing and whistling sounds, and by intoler-

ance to loud noise.

The damage is insidious since it proceeds slowly and

unnoticed: in the initial phase, when it is limited to a di-

minished ability to perceive acute sounds (music, bells)

or the spoken voice when there is a background noise,

it can only be detected by means of an audiometric test.

Pulsating noises of great intensity lasting a very short time

are highly damaging since the ear is unable to actuate any

physiological protective measures in time.

Hypoacusis from noise generally arises after several years

of exposure and depends on the PEL (risk almost null

below 80 dBA) and on individual characteristics. It is an

incurable disease: the only effective means of protection

against it is prevention.

Other Effects

Noise does not just determine aural sensation. For levels

exceeding 70 dBA, it causes stress by means of the

cerebral integration centres and determines a specific

neurovegetative reaction responsible for effects that lead

to cardiocirculatory and gastroenteric diseases.

Amongst these, it is worthwhile noting: an increase in

gastric acidity, a decrease in the heart rate, visual range

and reflex speed; a sensation of discomfort and weariness

with an increased sense of fatigue.

These effects are dangerous because they also increase

the risk of accidents.

Personal protections against noise

Individual protective equipment attenuates the sound

energy transmitted to the ear through the air.

This equipment is used when dangerous exposure cannot

be avoided in any other way.

There are different types of devices with different attenu-

ating capacities: helmets, ear muffs, ear plugs (Fig.2-50).

Helmets and headsets have the highest dampening ca-

pacity and their use is mandatory when working off road

and noise is over the limits given hereunder.

Earplugs are generally better tolerated and are particularly

useful for prolonged exposition to lower noise levels.

WARNING: It is prescribed that suitable personal hear-

ing protection be used if exposed every day to a noise

level equal or higher than 85 dBA.

Consult the "Technical specifications" section of this

manual in relation to tractor noise measured in in-

stantaneous conditions in compliance with the laws

in force.

WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or

the side and rear windows during work. The noise in

the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-

tor to wear headsets or other individual protection

against noise.

Fig.2-50

2-36

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS

All markets (North America excluded)

WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for new ones.

Position on the tractor

2-37

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Decal 1

WARNING: Very hot surfaces.

The hands and fingers could be

scorched. Warning: keep well clear

of hot parts. Keep at a safe distance.

Decal 2

WARNING: Danger of entangle-

ment. Keep your hands well clear

of spinning parts. Take care not to

become entangled in the belts or

pulleys whilst the engine is run-

ning. Keep the guards in place.

Decal 3

DANGER: Jets of hot steam or hot

water. Protect your face. The radia-

tor will be under pressure when the

engine is hot. Remove the plug with

caution and only when the engine

is cold.

Decal 5

WARNING: Danger of being

crushed. Always wear the seat belt

when the safety frame is in the

vertical position.

Decal 6

WARNING: Take care. Carefully

read this operation and mainte-

nance manual before using the

machine. Pay particular attention

to the instructions about safe use

of the machine.

Decal 4

WARNING:

Danger of

damaging tractor com-

ponents and the brake

circuit in particular. Be-

fore servicing the tractor,

it is essential for you

to have read through

the warnings and the

instructions in the opera-

tion and maintenance

manual.

Decal 8

DANGER: Danger of entanglement.

Keep well away from spinning shafts.

Take care NOT to remain caught up

by the PTO driveline. Keep all the

guards mounted on the transmission

shafts of the tractor or implements.

Decal 7

Affixed to the safety frame (only on

footstep tractors).

WARNING:

Danger of being crushed.

Always keep the safety frame in its

correct position during work. Never

use the tractor without mounting

the safety frame.

Decal 9

DANGER: Danger of being crushed.

Always apply the parking brake

(and the park lock if installed)

when you stop the tractor and

before getting off it.

Decal 10

On lh mudguard for tractors with

safety frames.

WARNING: Danger of being

crushed. DO NOT allow anyone

to sit on the fenders or on any

other part of the tractor or towed

implements.

2-38

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Decal 13

WARNING:

Electrocution. Always

disconnect the negative

battery terminal before

removing the cover of

the solenoid and before

servicing the electrical

system.

Decal 12

DANGER: Danger of be-

ing crushed. DO NOT

start the engine by short-

ing across the terminals

of the starter motor. This

operation will place your

life in danger. Only start

the engine when you are

sitting in the driving seat.

Decal 11

DANGER: The tractor could over-

turn and crush the chest. Hold

firmly on to the steering wheel

if the tractor is overturning. DO

NOT leave your seat or jump off

the tractor.

Decal 14

WARNING: Danger of entangle-

ment and shearing. Keep your

hands well clear of the fan blades

when the engine is running. Al-

ways keep the guards and screens

mounted.

Decal 15

WARNING: Danger of electric

shock. Always disconnect the

negative battery terminal before

removing the battery or before

servicing the electrical system.

Decal 16

DANGER:

Risk of impact and seri-

ous accidents. Keep to one side of

the tractor when using external lift

controls. NEVER STAND between

tractor and implement - you could

be hit by the implement.

Decal 18

Footstep tractors

WARNING: Danger of being crushed.

Enter or leave the tractor through

the left-hand side. Take care not to

touch the control levers if you get

in or out of the tractor from the

right-hand side.

Decal 18

Tractors with cabs

WARNING: Danger of being crushed.

Climb in and out of the tractor us-

ing the left-hand door. If entering

or leaving the tractor through the

right-hand door, avoid any contact

with control levers.

Decal 19

WARNING:

Use individual protections during work, such

as overalls, heavy duty gloves and safety footwear.

DECAL 20

CAUTION: Do not step or climb onto

parts that are not specifically designed

or mounted to this purpose.

2-39

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Decal 24

WARNING:

Danger of liquid under pres-

sure being ejected from hydraulic circuits.

Decal 23

WARNING:

General warning. Turn off the

engine and remove the ignition key be-

fore any servicing operations and before

getting off the machine for any reason.

Decal 22

WARNING: Tractors with cabs have no protection

against dangerous substances, but do have protection

against dust (protection level 2). If the tractor is used

to spray phytosanitary products or chemicals gener-

ally thought of as hazardous to health, the operator

must wear individual protections (mask) suitable to

the harmfulness of the actual product used.

Decal 25

WARNING: Emergency exit indication.

Decal 26

On the right-hand side in the front, on the

radiator core of the front hitch (if installed).

DANGER: Beware of hanging loads.

Keep at a safe distance to avoid being

hit or crushed.

Decal 27

(If the tractor is equipped

with instructor seat).

WARNING: The seat for an

instructor (with a seat belt

that must be worn at all

times) may be occupied

only when driving on road,

but not when working in

the field.

Decal 28

Only for the Italian market - Only 4WD tractors

WARNING: The four-wheel drive MUST be engaged

before the parking brake is operated.

Decal 29

WARNING: Take care. Consult the operation and

maintenance manual for information about safety

and how to use the tractor.

DANGER: Danger of entanglement. Keep well away from

spinning shafts. Take care NOT to remain caught up

by the PTO driveline. Keep all the guards mounted on

the transmission shafts of the tractor or implements.

2-40

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Decal 30

Provided by the front PTO maker (if equipped with front

PTO).

WARNING: Keep yourself at a safe distance. Speed

(rpm) and spinning of the front

PTO shaft.

Decal 32

CAUTION:

only use the points as indicated in this decal

to hoist the tractor.

Decal 31

WARNING:

General warning. Posi-

tion where the fire extinguisher and

its support are placed.

2-41

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS

North American tractors

WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for new ones.

Position on the tractor

2-42

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING

Whenever clearance permits:

- Keep Rollover Protection Structure

fully extended and locked.

- Keep seat belt fastened.

When structure must be lowered:

- Drive with extra care.

- Seat belt use is not recommended.

No ROPS protection is provided in the

lowered position.

Decal 5

ROPS upper frame missing.

To avoid injury or death from

tractor rollover, reinstall upper

frame before using tractor.

WARNING

Decal 4

WARNING

Personal injury could result from PTO driveline separation.

1. Drawbar supplied provides standard distance “A”. Do not change.

2. Three-point link distance “C” and mounter implement distance “D” may not be standard.

PTO SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE “A”

540 35mm (3.51 cm) 356mm (35.56 cm)

1000 35mm (3.51 cm) 406mm (40.64 cm)

Measure distance “B” over complete lift range for

tractor and implement combination. Select driveline

length to ensure that driveline will not bottom out at

minimum distance “B” and will have sufficient overlap

at maximum distance.

Decal 6

Serious personal injury or ma-

chine damage may result from

overspeed of PTO driven equip-

ment.

Never use the 1000 rpm setting

with the 6 spline shaft installed.

WARNING

Decal 7

DANGER

Pull only from ap-

proved drawbar or

lower links of 3-point

linkage at horizontal

position or below.

Rotating driveline con-

tact may cause serious

injury or death.

Keep all driveline, tractor

and equipment shields in

place during operation.

Decal 8

Decal 10

Decal 2

High pressure steam and

hot water.

Remove filler cap with

extreme care.

WARNING

To avoid personal in-

jury, keep all shields,

covers and guards in

place while engine is

running.

Beware hot parts

Decal 1

Use only mineral type brake fluid as

specified in the Operator’s Manual.

Incorrect fluid could cause brake sys-

tem fallure and loss of control, resulting

in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Decal 3

WARNING

Serious personal injury

or machine damage

may result from over-

speed of PTO driven

equipment.

Select tractor PTO

speed to match imple-

ment specified speed.

Do not operate PTO

above recommended

maximum speed.

Nominal Maximum

540 630

1000 1170

Decal 9

2-43

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING

Do not jump if

tractor tips

USE SEAT BELT.

Keep seat belt adjusted snugly

Decal 11

Decal 12

CAUTION

Read the operator instruc-

tion Book for safety infor-

mation.

Fasten your seat belt be-

fore tractor operation.

Start engine only when

seated in operator’s seat.

Make sure everyone is

clear of tractor and equip-

ment before starting en-

gine or operation.

Keep all shields, covers

and guards and place and

stay away from moving

parts while engine is run-

ning.

Place transmission shift

lever in neutral and apply

parking brake before us-

ing external 3-point hitch

controls.

Apply parking brake,

lower equipment, stop

engine and remove key

before leaving the tractor

unattended.

Wait for all movement to

stop before servicing trac-

tor or equipment.

Securely support or block

lifted implements which

must be in the raised

position for servicing or

adjustment.

Couple brake pedals to-

gether for road travel.

Use flashing warning

lights and SMV emblem

when on public roads,

except where prohibited

by law.

Always drive with care and

attention.

Decal 13

WARNING

Stand clear when

using switch to

move 3-point

hitch.

Decal 18

DANGER

Start only from seat

with transmission and

PTO in neutral.

Starting in gear kills.

Decal 14

Decal 15

WARNING

Remove negative ca-

bles from batteries

before removing sole-

noid cover and before

servicing the electrical

system.

WARNING

Keep hands clear of fan

and belts while engine

is running.

Decal 16

DANGER

Shield

eyes

Explosive

gas

Avoid sparks

and flame

Sulphuric

acid

EXPLOSIVE GASES

Always shield eyes and face from bat-

tery. Cigarettes, flames or sparks could

cause battery to explode.

Do not charge or use booster cables or

adjust post connections without proper

instructions or training.

POISON: causes severe burns

Contains sulphuric acid. Avoid contact

with skin, eyes or clothing.

In event of accident flush with water

and call a physician immediately.

Keep out of reach of children.

Decal 17

Decal 19 Decal 20

DANGER

CAUTION

Read the operator instruc-

tion Book for safety infor-

mation.

Rotating driveline contact

may cause serious injury

or death.

Keep all driveline, tractor and

equipment shields in place

during operation.

2-44

Safety notes

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Controls

3-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 3

Controls - Cab

3-2

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-1

Main controls

Main instruments and controls - Fig.3-1

1. Powershuttle reverse shuttle control lever

2. Control and instrument panel

3. Hi-Lo button (green) (HML as option)

4. Declutch button (orange)

5. Speed control lever

6. Rear hydraulic control valve levers

7. Rear hydraulic control valve lever (with diverter valve

button, optional)

8. Rear PTO engagement/disengagement switch

9. Cigarette lighter

10. Transmission reactivity adjustment potentiometer

11. Control panel of electronic hitch

12. Hydraulic top link control

13. Hydraulic right link rod control

14. Differential lock button

15. 4WD switch

16. Front PTO button (only with front PTO)

17. Stationary button

18. Rear auto PTO button

19. Retainer block for auxiliary control valves lever

20. Hand throttle

21. Range selector lever

22. Constant engine revolutions (if equipped)

23. Throttle pedal

24. Brake pedals

25. Clutch Pedal

26. Disconnect switch

27. Joystick lever (only mounted in setups with midmount

control valves)

28. Suspended axle activation button (if equipped)

Controls

3-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-2

Controls on the left side of the

driver's seat.

(Fig.3-2)

1. Parking brake hand lever

2. PTO type selector lever (standard - eco)

3. Rear PTO operation selector lever

4. Rear PTO speed selector lever

5. Control position for parking brake

See the Operation section of this manual for the correct

use of each control.

Fig. 3-3

Controls on the left side of the con-

trol turret

Switches (Fig. 3-3)

1- Front field lights switch:

0. Off

A. Field lights on roof are on

B. Field lights on roof + field lights on bonnet are on

2- Rear field light switch:

0. Off

A. Rear field lights are on

3- Hazard lights switch

(1)

0. Off

A. Hazard lights are flashing

4. Revolving beacon switch

(2)

0. Off

A. The revolving beacon is on (if 2 beacons are in-

stalled, both will be turned on at the same time)

NOTES:

(1): for the correct use of hazard lights, see further in this

section.

(2): for the correct use of the revolving beacon, see further

in this section.

3-4

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

LED and backlighting functions on

switches - Fig.3-4

NOTE: The following indications are valid for all switches

and buttons installed on this tractor.

1- Backlighting: WHITE. Backlighting lights up as soon

as the function controlled by this switch/button is

activated.

2- Activation indicator LED: BLUE. The LED lights up to

show that the function controlled by this switch/but-

ton is activated.

3- Backlighting: RED. Backlighting flashes when the func-

tion is activated.

Mechanical hitch controls - Fig.3-5

1- Automatic raising control (ELS) (if equipped)

2- Automatic lowering control (ELS) (if equipped)

3- Position control

4- Draft control command

See the “Operation” section of this manual for the cor-

rect use of the hitch.

Fig. 3-4

Fig. 3-5

Drive direction reversing lever

(1 - Fig. 3-6)

See the Operation section of this manual for the correct

use of each control.

Fig. 3-6

Controls

3-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tractor Warning Lamp Usage

- The flashing amber warning lamps must be used ac-

cording to road traffic laws.

The amber warning lamps are used to indicate a hazard

to other road users. Press button (1) to activate. By this

switch all four turn indicators will flash on and off.

IMPORTANT:

When operating the tractor, towing an

implement or trailer, the complete rear area warning

system (amber warning lamps, when applicable, and red

tail lamps) must be easily seen by any vehicle operator

coming near the tractor.

Turn indicator operation (North Amer-

ica version)

When the hazard light control switch is on (1 - Fig. 3-7) all

amber hazard lights are flashing intermittently.

When the turn indicator lever (1 - Fig. 3-8) is operated, the

amber hazard lights will operate as follows:

A. When the right turn indicator is operated, the right

amber hazard lamp will flash ON and OFF and the left

amber warning lamp will illuminate but will not flash.

B. When the left turn indicator is operated, the left amber

hazard lamp will flash ON and OFF and the right amber

warning lamp will illuminate but will not flash.

NOTE: When driving on roads, it may be required that the

hazard lights button remains activated. Refer to the laws

in force in your Country.

Fig. 3-7

Implement warning lamps

(if equipped)

It is recommended that implement warning lamps are

used:

- If the flashing warning lamps and red tail lamps on the

tractor cannot be seen because they are obstructed by

the implement.

- If the towed implement is 1219 mm or more behind the

hitch point of the tractor.

- If the towed implement is 1219 mm or more to the left

or right of the centre of the tractor.

- If the towed implement has a minimum 3000 mm width.

Install the warning lamps to indicate the side of the imple-

ment nearest the centre of the road.

Fig. 3-8

3-6

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Rotating Beacon

- The rotating amber beacon must be used according to

local road traffic laws.

The revolving beacon is operated by pressing the switch

(2) with the flashing beacon symbol. If the tractor is

provided with 2 revolving beacons, the switch (2) lights

up both.

Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) Symbol

- For correct use of the SMV symbol, respect local road

traffic laws.

If a Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) symbol is equipped it must

be installed on the rear part of the tractor.

To install the SMV symbol on an implement or trailer a

special bracket must be obtained from your dealer.

CAUTION: Collision of high speed road traffic

and tractors or implements can cause personal

injury or death. On roads, use amber warn-

ing lamps according to local laws. Keep SMV

emblem visible. Pull over to let faster traffic

pass. Slow down and signal before turning off.

Controls

3-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Front right controls on instrument turret

Ignition switch (1 - Fig.3-8)

The key switch has four positions as follows:

Start Position - Turning the key fully

clockwise against spring pressure

the starter motor is energised in addi-

tion to the circuits already mentioned

above.

Accessories position - The instrument

cluster display and the radio can be

operated in this position. This posi-

tion is also used for programming the

digital instrument panel.

OFF Position - Turn from On/Run posi-

tion anticlockwise to stop the tractor.

The key can only be removed when it

is in this position.

Light switch (2-Fig.3-8)

Operation (Fig. 3-8)

● Horn. Press lever (1) at point (2) in the direction indi-

cated by the arrow to operate the horn.

● Turn indicators. Push down lever (1) to operate the

right turn indicator, up to operate the left indicator.

When the indicator is active, also the relative lamp

on the control panel is flashing.

● Light switch. Turn the switch (3) to the required posi-

tion to obtain the following functions:

O Lights off

Side lights on

dipped beams

● Driving beams. Turn switch (3) to the position

"dipped beams", then, to switch the driving beams

on, pull lever (1) up until it locks. Raise it towards the

steering wheel and release to return to the dipped

beams.

● Flashing function (driving beams). Pull up and re-

lease lever (1) for flashing.

Fig. 3-8

Fig. 3-9

3-8

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Adjustment of electro-hydraulic reverse

shuttle effectiveness

(Fig. 3-10)

The electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle effectiveness can be

adjusted by means of potentiometer (1). Turn anticlock-

wise to reduce it, and clockwise to increase it.

NOTE: If the potentiometer is moved but the relative

menu is not displayed on the instrument, the menu will

be displayed as a pop-up. See also “Electro-hydraulic ef-

fectiveness” in Section 4 of this manual.

Fig. 3-10

Master disconnect switch [2.aa]

(Fig. 3-11)

The master disconnect switch disconnects the battery

from the tractor electric system.

The master disconnect switch (1) can only be activated

with the ignition key in the OFF position.

The master disconnect switch is placed in the control

turret, on the dashboard at the left of the driver's seat.

WARNING: When the engine is running, the battery

cannot be disconnected in any way.

This switch has two positions:

● Position A (knob turned clockwise): battery connected,

all systems are supplied

● Position B (knob turned anti-clockwise): battery discon-

nected. Only the following items are powered: instru-

ment cluster (clock inner memories), courtesy light in

cab, radio inner memories, transmission diagnostic

sockets, electronic master disconnect switch circuit

For a correct use of the battery disconnector switch,

refer to the "Operation" section, "Battery disconnector

switch" chapter.

Fig. 3-11

Controls

3-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING: Never adjust the steering column

while driving.

The steering column can be adjusted up or down, and

tilted as required.

STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT

Tilt adjustment (TILT)

Fig. 3-11a - 3-11b

To adjust the steering column tilt:

• push and hold down pedal (2)

• move column (2) up or down to the required position.

• release the pedal (2) to hold the column in the required

position

Fig. 3-11a

Fig. 3-11b

Fig. 3-11c

Height adjustment (TELESCOPE)

(optional) Fig. 3-11a - 3-11c

To adjust the steering column height:

• Unscrew the knob (1).

• push or pull the column (B) to the required position.

• screw down the knob (1) to hold the column in the

required position

3-10

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Pedal Controls

1. CLUTCH PEDAL

The clutch pedal is used to temporarily disengage drive.

Use the clutch pedal when moving the tractor over short

distances. Use the clutch pedal to start the tractor moving

from stationary. Gradually and completely releasing the

clutch pedal for a controlled smooth start.

WARNING: DO NOT ride the clutch pedal when the

transmission is under load. Release the clutch pedal

completely within 5 seconds for improved clutch

service life. While the tractor is moving the transmis-

sion must always be in drive. Never allow the tractor

to coast downhill with the transmission in neutral or

with the clutch pedal depressed. To do so could result

in the operator not having full control of the tractor

and may result in personal injury.

2. BRAKE PEDALS - The left brake pedal stops the

left rear wheel and the right brake pedal stops the right

rear wheel.

CAUTION: Extra weight and bad traction

conditions such as mud or ice increase your

stopping distance. Remember that liquid in

the tires, weights on the machine or wheels,

tanks filled with fertilisers, herbicides or in-

secticides; all these add weight and increase

the distance you need to stop. Do not exceed

maximum permitted operating weights on

axle or tractor.

CAUTION: all service operations on the trac-

tor’s braking system MUST BE carried out by

the specialized personnel of your authorized

Argo Tractors Dealer.

3. BRAKE PEDALS INTERLOCK - Used to lock the

brake pedals together.

CAUTION: Brake pedals must be locked to-

gether for road travel. This will ensure uni-

form brake operation and maximum stopping

ability.

4. THROTTLE PEDAL

Controls

3-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Auxiliary power socket (12 V)

The auxiliary power socket (1) is mounted at the base of

the right console, behind the driving seat.

Miscellaneous

Tool box (1)

The supplied box contains a kit of tools required for minor

service.

In case of major malfunctions, always ask your Argo

Tractors Dealer.

The box is installed on the right-hand side, just under the

entry ladder.

2. Trailer power socket (7-pin)

3. EBS power socket for trailer diagnosis (ISO 7638) (if

equipped)

3-12

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-12

Seat with mechanical suspension

1. Seat distance adjustment

2. Handle for continuous weight adjustment

3. Adjustment to operator's height

OPERATOR’S SEAT[2.a][2.ah]

Various types of seat can be fitted: The type of seat is dictated by market requirements and by the tractor's specifications.

CAUTION: Danger! Danger of losing control.

DO NOT adjust the seat while the machine is running. All adjustment to the seat must be carried out while

the machine is at standstill and with the parking brake engaged. Failure to comply with these directions

could cause injuries or death.

We recommend a seat adjustment that guarantees a safe driving even in harsh conditions. To avoid dangers, comply

with the following directions:

WARNING: The driver's seat must be mounted or repaired only by skilled personnel.

Check at regular intervals that the retainer screws are perfectly tightened and that the adjustment controls are normally

operating, to guarantee safety and stability during work.

NOTE: The safety belt is not to be neither modified nor altered. If it is replaced, the new belt must be approved and de-

signed to be mounted in the same position as the old one. Replace must be carried out by specialised personnel.

The safety belt must be replaced in the following cases: overturning of the machine, damage or wear (unstringing or cuts

on the belt, damage of the plastic covers), faulty operation of the winding mechanism and of the buckle.

The driver's seat is provided with controls to adjust its suspension, height and distance from the controls. Therefore it is

possible to choose the adjustment position most suitable and change it even during work.

Controls

3-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-13

1. Seat distance adjustment

Move the lever (1) to the right to release the guides.

After the adjustment, make sure that the lever blocks the

guides with a click and that the seat will not move either

forward or backward.

Armrests

Turn the armrests backward to bring them to the vertical

position.

2. Adjustment to operator's weight

The adjustment has to be made while the operator is

seated down, so that the seat is loaded.

Turn clockwise or anticlockwise the lever (1) on the front

of the suspension.

The correct adjustment is reached when the height of the

seat is at half the travel of the suspension.

If the seat is provided with a weight indicator window, the

adjustment must be carried out according to the weight

value read on the indicator.

A few suspension versions have a ratchet lever. The handle

must be positioned according to the rotation direction of

the lever. Pull the handle out and turn it by 180° to bring

it into its position again.

Fig. 3-14

3-14

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-15

3. Height limiter

It limits the suspension run upwards.

The limitation is continuous and must be carried out while

the operator is seated down, so that the seat is loaded.

The height of the seat can be adjusted in both senses, up

or down, by means of the knob (1).

After each height adjustment, a weight adjustment shall

also be carried out.

Cleaning and maintenance

Any actions, maintenance included, must be carried out

by skilled technicians and using suitable personal protec-

tion devices.

To keep the seat in optimum operating conditions, it must

be regularly cleaned. The cleaning intervals should be cal-

culated according to the amount of soiling. This interval,

however, must not be longer than 200 work hours.

Check at regular intervals the bellow (if present) that

protects the suspension.

Remove dust from upholstery with compressed air or a

vacuum cleaner.

To clean synthetic leather upholstery: use a cloth or

sponge, moist but not dripping.

To clean fabric upholstery: use a moist, but not dripping

cloth or a mild cleansing agent. You may use any cleans-

ing agent for car seats.

To clean the safety belt: use a sponge moistened with

lukewarm water or water and a mild soap.

An air jet at low pressure (max. 1 bar) may be used to

clean the winder and the clasp mechanism. Clean dust

collected on mechanical parts (guides and suspension)

of the seat with a compressed air jet or a moist cloth or

a dry brush. Do not use water or cleansers. To access

the inner suspension, lift up the rubber bellow by pulling

out the plastic nail by means of a mechanical aid. After

cleansing, fit all the nails back to close it again.

Do not clean the seat with steam or high pressure jets.

The guides and the suspension must be lubricated with

synthetic grease. Use spray lubricants to grease any

couplings that are difficult to reach.

All remaining maintenance materials must be disposed

of according to law. Do not dispose of them in the envi-

ronment.

Controls

3-15

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Troubleshooting

Fault Possible causes Remedies

The guides have too much play Worn guides Replace the guides

Sliding on the guides is difficult

The guides are dirty

The guides are not properly aligned

Clean the guides

Check guides alignment

The armrests keep falling down The armrests are broken Replace the armrests

Operator present sensor is not operating No electrical connection Check the electrical connection

The suspension is not dampening shocks Shock absorber unloaded or broken Replace the shock absorber

The compressor cannot be operated No electrical connection Check the electrical connection

The mechanical suspension is not operating Broken springs Replace springs

The belt rewinding mechanism does not

lock or wind up the belt (belts with winder)

The belt winder is worn or damaged

Replace the safety belts

The clasp does not lock or unlock the belt The belt clasp is worn or damaged

Replace the safety belts

3-16

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Mechanic suspension seat (if pro-

vided)

1. Adjustment to operator's weight

2. Seat height adjustment.

3. Seat distance adjustment

4. Tilt adjustment of armrests (*)

5. Height adjustment of armrests (*)

6. Head restraint adjustment (*)

7. Lumbar support adjustment (on the back) (*)

8. Back rest tilt adjustment

(*)

subject to availability

Fig. 3-16

Fig. 3-17

Fig. 3-18

1. Adjustment to operator's weight

The seat can be adjusted to the weight of the operator by

pulling up or pressing down the button (1) while the seat

is occupied by the operator. The adjustment to the opera-

tor’s weight is correct when the green mark is completely

visible in the little window.

NOTE: To avoid any health hazards, the adjustment to

the operator's weight should be checked and eventually

adjusted before beginning the use of the tractor.

2. Seat height adjustment.

The seat height can be adjusted by pulling up or pressing

down the button (1) while the seat is being occupied by the

operator. The seat height can be adjusted continuously.

After the height adjustment, check the seat is correctly

adjusted to the operator’s weight. The green mark must

be completely visible in the little window.

NOTE: to avoid any damages to the compressor during

the weight adjustment, do not operate the compressor for

longer than 1 minute.

Controls

3-17

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

3. Seat distance adjustment

CAUTION: Risk of accidents!

DO NOT use the lever that blocks the seat

while driving.

Pull the lever (1) up for the horizontal adjustment of the

seat.

After the adjustment, make sure that the lever blocks the

seat with a click and that the seat will not move either

forward or backward.

4. Tilt adjustment of armrests (subject to

availability)

Turn the knob (1) under the armrest to adjust the tilt.

Turn the knob:

• to the outer side of the seat to tilt the armrest up,

• to the inner side of the seat to tilt the armrest down.

5. Height adjustment of armrests (subject

to availability)

The armrests can be tilted back and adjusted in their

height as required by the operator.

To adjust the height of the armrests:

• Remove the protective panel (1).

• Loosen the nut behind the panel.

• Raise or lower the armrests to adjust their height.

• Tighten the nut and fit the protective panel (1) back

again.

Fig. 3-19

Fig. 3-20

Fig. 3-21

3-18

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

6. Head restraint adjustment (subject to

availability)

Pull up or push down the head restraint (1) to adjust its

height with pre-set increments.

Pull the head restraint vigorously until the stop at end of

travel is overcome.

7. Lumbar support adjustment of the

backrest (if available)

Pull up or push down the head restraint (1) to adjust its

height with pre-set increments.

Pull the head restraint vigorously until the stop at end of

travel is overcome.

8. Back rest tilt adjustment

Pull up the lever (1) to release the back rest. Rest your

back on the backrest until the required position is reached,

then release the lever to lock.

Fig. 3-22

Fig. 3-23

Fig. 3-24

Controls

3-19

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-25

Cleaning and maintenance

Soiling may impair seat functionality. A regular cleaning

is therefore very important.

The seat upholstering can be easily and quickly removed

from the seat’s frame to be cleaned or replace, if required.

CAUTION: beware of the backrest frame: it

could jump forward and cause injuries!

Do not wet the upholstery while cleaning it.

Use any normal commercial detergent for upholstery or

plastic.

Before cleaning, test the detergent on a small hidden area.

3-20

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Seat belt [2.ab]

CAUTION: Always fasten your safety belt se-

curely. Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS

for your protection. The seat belt can help

insure your safety if it is properly used and

maintained. Never wear the belt in a twisted

condition or pinched between the seat struc-

tural members.

Adjust the seat to your requirements.

Lean with your back straight against the back rest. Pull the

seat belt completely across your body and push the metal

eye (1) into the latch assembly (2) until it locks.

Adjust the position of the seat belt as low on your body

as possible.

To release the seat belt, push the button (3) on the latch

assembly.

IMPORTANT: From time to time, carefully inspect the

seat belt and replace it if worn or damaged.

IMPORTANT: Check at regular intervals the correct op-

eration of the safety belt.

NOTE: The safety belt is not to be neither modified nor

altered. If it is replaced, the new belt must be approved and

designed to be mounted in the same position as the old

one. Replace must be carried out by specialised personnel.

The safety belt must be replaced in the following cases:

overturning of the machine, damage or wear (unstringing

or cuts on the belt, damage of the plastic covers), faulty

operation of the winding mechanism and of the buckle.

Controls

3-21

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 3-26

Instructor's seat [2.w]

Fig. 3-26

CAUTION: Avoid injuries!

The instructor seat must be used only when

training a new operator or when a service

technician carries out troubleshooting. Use of

this seat is not allowed to anyone, particularly

children. Keep cab doors closed. Always wear

the seat belt. Failure to comply with these direc-

tions could cause injuries or death.

The seat (1) must be used only by an instructor to train

new operators or service technicians for diagnostics and

troubleshooting. The passenger in this seat must always

wear fastened seat belts (2). Fold the seat when it is not

in use.

This seat MAY NOT be used to transport children.

When the instructor's seat is occupied, the following

precautions must be taken:

• Tractor should be driven at a slow speed and on

level ground.

• Avoid quick starts or stops.

• Avoid sharp turns.

• The left-hand door MUST be closed at all times, while

the tractor is in motion.

Please read attentively the "Safety Note" section in this

manual for further information.

CAUTION: A frequent cause of personal injury

or death is persons falling off and being run

over. DO NOT permit others to ride, except on

the designated instructor seat.

WARNING: The seat for an in-

structor (with a seat belt that

must be worn at all times)

may be occupied only when

driving on road, but not when

working in the field.

IMPORTANT: Check at regular intervals the correct op-

eration of the safety belt.

NOTE: The safety belt is not to be neither modified nor

altered. If it is replaced, the new belt must be approved and

designed to be mounted in the same position as the old

one. Replace must be carried out by specialised personnel.

The safety belt must be replaced in the following cases:

overturning of the machine, damage or wear (unstringing

or cuts on the belt, damage of the plastic covers), faulty

operation of the winding mechanism and of the buckle.

3-22

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Operator present sensor

The seat cushion acts as a switch.

CAUTION: Do not tamper with this component

in any way.

CAUTION: if the tractor is not correctly used,

the operator is informed by the sound of a

buzzer and a warning symbol on the instru-

ment cluster.

For a correct use, the operator must be seated in the

driver's place. As soon as there is no load on the seat

given by the operator's weight, a buzzer sounds and a

warning symbol (1-Fig. 3-28) is shown on the instrument

cluster as a pop-up.

Fig. 3-28

The buzzer sounds each time the operator leaves the

driver's seat while the engine is running without engaging

the parking brake and putting the gearshift lever in neutral.

Whenever the operator leaves the driver's seat with the

engine running and the tractor not moving, the hydraulic

clutches of forward and reverse are disabled. If the tractor

is on the move, the system inhibits the same clutches as

soon as the neutral position of the reverse shuttle lever

is sensed. In this case, the transmission goes automati-

cally to Neutral.

The operator must then return to his/her seat and the

reverse shuttle shifted to Neutral in order to get the trac-

tor started again.

Fig. 3-27

Controls

3-23

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Logic of the operator's seat switch

• With key turned to ON, released parking brake lever, engine off:

Operator

Indicator on instrument cluster

Buzzer Instrument cluster dis-

play

(1-Fig.3-28)

Not seated FlashiNg active For 5 secoNds active

• With key turned to OFF, released parking brake lever:

Operator

Indicator on instrument cluster

Buzzer Instrument cluster dis-

play

(1-Fig.3-28)

Not seated FlashiNg active For 10 secoNds No

• With ignition key turned to ON, engine running:

In the cases given in the following table, the indicator

on the instrument cluster and the buzzer are active

until

the conditions for a correct use of the tractor are restored.

Operator position Reverse shuttle

lever position

(FNR)

Parking brake Buzzer sounding

Indicator on instrument cluster

sittiNg Neutral eNgaged

OFF

steady oN

sittiNg Neutral released

OFF OFF

sittiNg selected directioN eNgaged

OFF

steady oN

sittiNg selected directioN released

OFF OFF

Not seated Neutral eNgaged

OFF

steady oN

Not seated Neutral released

oN aNd FlashiNg

Not seated selected directioN eNgaged

steady oN

Not seated selected directioN released

oN aNd FlashiNg

3-24

Controls - Cab

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

CAB

All non-metallic components within the cab comply with the ISO 3795 standard.

The cab is approved according to OECD codes concerning ROPS test (protection against overturning) and safety belts.

The cab is also approved for FOPS test (protection against falling objects) according to the required code.

The cab is made of steel sections and is fastened to the

tractor by means of a double system of rubber dampers

(silent block) protecting the driver's seat both from vibra-

tions and from engine noise. The noise peak is therefore

limited to low values, for greater comfort for the operator.

Doors (3)

Both doors can be opened both from the inner and outer

side, and kept open by dampening cylinders. Both doors

are provided with a lock with key. The key for the door

lock is the same as for ignition.

Adjustable field lights

The cab is provided with front (1) and rear (4) field lights

to improve visibility when working at night. The on/off

switches are in the cab.

Revolving beacon (2)

The revolving beacon is mounted on the front of the cab

roof. As an option, a second revolving beacon can be

mounted on the other side of the cab. Both beacons are

controlled by a switch in the cab.

Rear window (5)

Release the rear window lock and turn the handle (6)

counterclockwise to open it. The window is kept open

by dampers.

WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or

the side and rear windows during work. The noise in

the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-

tor to wear headsets or other individual protection

against noise.

NOTE: See the "Maintenance" section for filter use and

maintenance.

Controls - Cab

3-25

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Central controls on control turret

Windscreen wiper and washer can be operated with the

ignition key in the contact position.

1 - Front windscreen wiper switch:

A. intermittent operation

0. Off

B. continuous operation

2 - Additional low beams switch (only with front hitch)

The additional low beams on the side handgrips can

be switched on as an alternative to the beams on the

bonnet.

The switch has two positions:

upwards, the beams on the handgrips are on

downwards, the beams on the bonnet are on

3 - Windscreen/rear window washer switch:

0 . central position, off

pressed upward, front window washer operating

pressed downward, rear window washer operating

Rear window wiper

(if equipped)

1 - Rear window wiper switch:

0. Off

A. Windscreen wiper operation

3-26

Controls - Cab

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Cab roof components

Fig. 3-29

1. Sound diffusers

2. Air conditioner console

3. Air vents

4. Sunroof

5. Ceiling light

6. Radio

7. Front windscreen demisting/defrosting vents

8. Sunshade (for sunroof)

9. Sunshade (for front window)

10. Microphone

Controls - Cab

3-27

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Cab ventilation [2.b]

(Fig. 3-30)

The cab ventilation is controlled by means of 4 adjustable

air vents (A). Direct the air flow as required direction by

turning the vents.

Front windscreen demisting/defrosting

(Fig. 3-31)

In the front part of the cab roof there are 4 vents to defrost

and demist the windscreen and the side windows.

On each vent, turn the little wheel (1) on the left to adjust

the position of the fins, and on the little wheel (2) on the

right to open or close the vent.

To defrost the windscreen:

1. Open all air discharge vents (B) and direct their air flows

toward windscreen and windows.

Fig. 3-31

Fig. 3-30

3-28

Controls - Cab

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Controls for cab temperature [2.b]

Temperature control is achieved by means of the knobs

in the console (1 - Fig.3-32) inside the cab, on the left

side of the roof.

Setup with heating only

(Fig. 3-33)

Use knob (1) to adjust the temperature of the hot air,

decreasing or increasing the circulation of fluid from the

engine.

• Knob (1) turned anticlockwise to shut off hot air circu-

lation

• Knob (1) turned clockwise for max. heating inside the

cab

The knob (2) is used to adjust the speed of the fan send-

ing air into the cab.

• Knob (2) on 0, fan off

• Knob (2) on 3, fan at max. speed

Fig. 3-32

Fig. 3-33

Controls - Cab

3-29

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Setup with cab air conditioning [2.b]

(Fig. 3-34)

Use the button (3) to activate the air conditioning system

in the cab. When the system is operating, the LED (4) in

control console will light up.

The button (3) is operating when the ignition key is on

the contact position (Key On). Turn the fan knob (2) to the

required speed, then turn knob (1) to turn on the condi-

tioner. Turn the fan knob (2) further until the required air

temperature is reached.

To let air flow into the cab, turn by hand the fins of the

vents on the cab roof.

The air is automatically recirculated in the cab by the air

vents (1- Fig. 3-35) on the rear posts..

CAUTIONS:

The air conditioner will not operate when the engine

is at a standstill as the compressor is operated by the

engine itself.

Make sure that the air conditioner control is in the off

position before starting the engine.

Always turn on the electric fan before operating the

air conditioner.

The conditioner cannot operate when the electric

fan is off.

WARNING: If the tractor is to remain unused for a long

period of time, or if the system is not used, remember

to allow the air conditioner to operate for about 15

minutes each week. This precautionary measure pre-

vents gas from leaking from the compressor.

Use of the air conditioning system [2.b]

(Fig. 3-34)

To operate the air conditioner, the blower must be on. The

blower speed, temperature control and all vents must

be adjusted to obtain the best cooling for the ambient

temperature and dust conditions. Under normal operating

conditions, and with the windows and doors closed, tem-

peratures in the cab of 6°C÷15°C less than the ambient

temperature will occur. When operating the air conditioner

system, the moisture level is decreased.

NOTE:During cold weather, with ambient temperature

above 0°C, operate the air conditioner at least once per

month, for a period of 10 to 15 minutes. This operation is

useful to lubricate gaskets and helps to prevent leaks of

cooling fluid.

NOTE:The system is provided with safety devices to pro-

tect the system for low refrigerant level and restrictions in

the system. If the air conditioner stops operating while the

tractor is running, ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for help.

NOTE: The air conditioning system is equipped with an

environmentally safe refrigerant, HFC-R134a. Never re-

charge the air conditioning system with refrigerant other

than HFC-R134a as this will result in loss of cooling and

permanent damage to all air conditioning components.

Starting: With the engine and the fan running, press but-

ton (3) to operate the air conditioner.

Stopping: Before turning the engine off, always stop the

air conditioner by pressing the button (3) and turning the

fan knob (2) anticlockwise to the stop position.

Fig. 3-34

Fig. 3-35

3-30

Controls - Cab

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

RADIO

Multifunction buttons (2 - Fig. 3-37)

The buttons on the front panel may have different func-

tions if the operator is listening to the radio or playing

multimedia files (USB stick or SD card).

• Radio: stored station

• Function to operate in media: control Play

Fig. 3-37

Context of functions (1 - Fig. 3-38)

The function of some controls depends on context. For

instance, the button “1” (1) tunes in the first stored radio

station. After playing a multimedia file, however, this but-

ton can be pressed to play/interrupt a track.

• Radio: stored station

• Function to operate in media: playing/interrupting a

multimedia file

Fig. 3-38

“Volume” knob (1 - Fig. 3-39)

Turn the knob clockwise to raise, anticlockwise to lower

the volume.

If the options MENU or AUDIO are used, volume adjust-

ment is temporarily disabled and by turning the knob the

menu items are displayed instead. Apply a short pressure

(press and release) the volume adjustment knob to access

the controls of the AUDIO option, i.e. balance, fader, bass

and treble.

The volume has 41 positions, with a range 0 to 40.

Fig. 3-39

General information

Switching on (Fig. 3-36)

To switch on the unit, press the ON/OFF button (1); to

turn off, press and hold the same button for 1 second.

NOTE:

Many buttons on the front panel can be operated

in two modes: a momentary press or press and hold.

Fig. 3-36

Controls - Cab

3-31

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Radio

Radio stations search (Fig.3-40)

Use the buttons (1) and (2) to search a radio station: press

briefly to search automatically the next available frequency

(the search stops at the next available station).

1. Forward button

2. Backward button

Manual tuning (Fig. 3-40)

Hold (1) or (2) pressed for the manual search mode. In this

mode, a short pressure on one of these buttons gradually

changes the frequency, while a longer pressure makes the

search quicker until the button is released.

The radio returns to the automatic search mode if no but-

ton is pressed for 3 seconds.

Radio stations storing (Fig. 3-41)

When hearing a radio station, apply a longer pressure on

one of the buttons (1) to store the station. Apply a short

pressure on a button (1) to go to an already stored station.

The stored frequency can be changed by tuning on a dif-

ferent station and applying a longer pressure to the button

where you wish it to be stored.

• Longer pressure: the station is stored.

• Short pressure: the stored station is recalled.

FM radio

The RDS (Radio Data System) service is active in many

countries. In case of RDS transmission, it is possible to

enable or disable its settings in the menu, e.g. AF and TA.

RDS is only available in the FM bands.

• AF: alternative frequency

• TP: traffic program

• TA: traffic announcement

Fig. 3-41

Fig. 3-40

3-32

Controls - Cab

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Other audio equipment

Playing multimedia files (Fig.3.42)

To play WMA or MP3 music files previously stored on a

USB stick (1) or a SD card (2), just insert the support in

its slot to start playing. The radio turns automatically on.

Use the SRC button (3) to select ‘radio’, ‘media’ or ‘AUX’

(auxiliary inlet) (4). If both supports are in their slots, the

radio uses the last slot that had been used.

NOTE:

Supports in SD/USB – selection is possible only if

multimedia files are available.

Double inlet AUX-IN (4), 3.5 mm on front and rear: these

sockets share the same circuit. Though it is possible to

use both, it is advisable to establish a connection only

with one of them and to leave the other one disconnected.

Audio tracks selection (Fig.3-43)

Use the buttons (1) and (2) to search the required track.

Press the button briefly:

1. to select the previous track

2. to select the next track

Press and hold the button:

1. for the rewind function

2. for the fast forward function

After reaching the desired position in the audio track,

release the button to start playing normally again.

AUX inlet 3.5 mm (4 - Fig.3-42)

The front panel features a stereo aux-in inlet. By means

of a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug, the music played through

the headset outlet of a portable multimedia player can

be played, for instance, through the tractor's speakers.

Fig. 3-42

Fig. 3-43

Controls - Cab

3-33

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Radio menu

Menu (Fig. 3-44)

Apply a short pressure to the MENU button (1) to open

the radio menu. Afterward, the LCD display shows the

available menu items. By the ‘Reset – confirm’ function

the default settings can be restored.

After entering the required menu, use the following but-

tons to browse:

1. ‘MENU’ = EXIT, MOVE UP ONE LEVEL (to go from the

right to the left in the menu tree).

2. Turn the volume knob = PREVIOUS ITEM/NEXT ITEM

(to scroll the menu tree up or down).

3. Middle button = SELECT ITEM, CONFIRM, MOVE

DOWN INTO SUB-LEVEL (to scroll the menu tree left

to right).

Press and hold 'MENU' to exit.

NOTE:

if no button is pressed for 3 seconds, the radio

quits the 'MENU' mode automatically.

Audio

To change AUDIO settings, apply a short pressure on the

volume knob. It is a shortcut key to enter the software

menu. In this way, the user can change the settings BAL-

ANCE, FADER, BASS and TREBLE:

- Apply a short pressure on the volume knob.

- Use in the same way as MENU.

Knob

volume

Access to ‘MENU’ and ‘AUDIO’ menus is described as

"browsing the menu tree". The middle button is used to

move to a lower level in the tree, while the MENU button

has the opposite function, i.e. to move from a lower to a

higher level (right to left) in the menu tree.

Other buttons:

•

to move to a higher level (right to

left)

•

to select an item, to move to a lower level

(left to right)

Fig. 3-44

3-34

Controls - Cab

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Bluetooth

General operation (Fig. 3-45)

The buttons in the front panel of the Bluetooth version

of this radio there are the following additional symbols

“answer” (1) and “hang-up” (2). Press and hold the “An-

swer” button (1) to call the last dialled number.

Pairing

To use the speakerphone function in Bluetooth, a Blue-

tooth mobile phone must be connected by “pairing”. To

pair the mobile phone to the radio, check that the radio

is turned on. On your mobile, search for an available

Bluetooth connection. Pair to “6515700M91” by the code

“1234”. The mobile should confirm the successful pairing.

After the pairing, many mobiles can automatically restore

the Bluetooth connection when the radio is turned on

again (e.g., when next using the tractor), therefore no

pairing is needed on such phones.

Once the mobile is paired to the radio device, the mobile

can be used in speakerphone mode.

When the mobile is used for outgoing or incoming calls,

the speakers in the cab and the microphone (1 - Fig.

3-46) in front of the operator can be used for voice com-

munication with the cell phone connected to the radio

via Bluetooth device.

If the radio is on, when the phone is paired to the radio,

the audio signal automatically is turned down to allow

the phone communication.

Bluetooth profiles

The Bluetooth version of this radio can be connected in

wireless mode to Bluetooth devices, such as cell phones.

The Bluetooth connection modes are named “profiles”. This radio supports the following profiles:

(1) A2DP: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile – Music playing in streaming of music by means of Bluetooth.

Bluetooth devices with A2DP function can play music from the radio through the sound system of the tractor. Further,

if the device supports the Bluetooth profile AVRCP (Remote Control Profile), the radio can be used to operate func-

tions such as ‘next track’ and ‘previous track’.

(2) HFP: Hands Free Profile – Call or receive calls through Bluetooth (see the previous sections “General operation” and

“Pairing”).

To ensure an optimal sound quality of the connected Bluetooth HFP, the user can select the speakers to use for sound

reproduction. The menu path of the software MENU->SYSTEM->ALT_VOL->HFP_SPKR has three options:

HFP_ALL: sound is output from all four speaker channels (default option).

HFP_FRNT: sound is output only from the front speaker channels; the rear channels are off during phone conver-

sations.

HFP_REAR: sound is output only from the rear speaker channels; the front channels are off during phone conver-

sations.

The default setting is HFP_ALL.

NOTE:

for tractors provided of 2 speakers only, the default setting HFP_ALL is recommended.

Fig. 3-45

Fig. 3-46

Controls - Cab

3-35

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Symbols

Symbols on the front panel:

BAND FM/AM/WB frequency band.

This radio has 3 bands FM, 2 AM and 1WB.

(The WB mode is only available if “USA” is

selected)

Forward/next (FF): radio frequency / sound

track

SRC Source: radio/supports

(SD,USB)/auxiliary inlet)

rewind/previous (REW): radio frequency /

sound track

MENU Menu of software functions

Play / pause.

A short pressure to switch between play /

pause.

F+ / F- Browsing through folders

Stop.

Press and hold to stop playing the multime-

dia file

RDM Random: track play order

Repetition: “RPT OFF”,”RPT ONE”,”RPT

DIR”,”RPT ALL” (Repeat off, Repeat one,

Repeat directory, Repeat all)

Switch-off timer

This radio has an off function controlled by a timer. This option can be accessed through the path MENU->SYSTEM-

>ADVANCED->TIMER and includes the settings OFF, 30 min, 60 min and 90 min. ”OFF” is the default factory setting and

it means the radio is immediately off as soon as the ignition key is taken out. It operates in the same way as a conventional

radio. For instance, if the "30 min" option is selected, you may easily turn the radio off and on while the countdown is

active. As this countdown will not be displayed, the user cannot view it. When the expected 30 minutes are expired, the

radio will go off. To turn it on again, the ignition key should be inserted again. This function increases the listening time

and the ignition key may de removed for safety. It further prevents the battery from discharging when the radio is left on

for a long time. This function is not available on all vehicles, as the radio must be connected with a “IGN” cable and a

permanent connection cable to the battery “BATT”.

3-36

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

FAQ / Troubleshooting

This model of radio is designed to meet two important conditions: a reliable operation and advanced technical features.

Here are listed a few of the possible most frequently asked questions (FAQ) from a user. While reading this section, it

could be useful to identify other related sections to be read for a better understanding of this topic.

Q: The radio does not go off after removing the ignition key.

R: The radio has an off function controlled by a timer. Please refer to the section “Switch-off timer” in this manual.

Q: The radio does not remain on the set frequency / The radio starts searching the frequency and interrupts the audio.

R: If you are listening to a FM station in a zone with a weak reception (e.g. in the country), deactivate the automatic

frequency selection by deactivating the "AF" function. The AF button on the front panel allows for this setting to be

alternated between "ON2 and "OFF". The same setting may also be accessed through the menu function.

Q: The radio finds no stations as usual for RDS radios.

R: If you are listening to a FM station in a zone with a strong enough reception (e.g. in the city), you may activate the

automatic frequency selection by activating the "AF" function. The AF button on the front panel allows for this setting

to be alternated between "ON2 and "OFF". The same setting may also be accessed through the software menu on

the display. The default setting is "OFF".

Q: Though the radio is switched on normally, I do not know whether my settings where changed.

R: Try and reset the factory settings through the path MENU->SYSTEM->ADVANCED->RESET->CONFIRM. After re-

setting, the factory settings will replace the existing ones AND all preset values will be set at the default values. For

instance, the user could change country (also refer to Questions and Answers), search for radio stations and save

them in the 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 preselection for quick access in a second time.

Q: While searching for stations, the radio seems to be receiving no signal. It finds less stations than expected or even

no stations at all (search interrupted).

R: Make sure that the antenna is connected and the broadcasting is available, then check that the options MENU-

>SYSTEM->ADVANCED¬>WORLD are corresponding to the own country/area. For instance, select “EUROPE” if

you are in the United Kingdom or "USA" if you are in the United States.

Q: I cannot find the WB (Weatherband) mode.

R: The options MENU->SYSTEM->ADVANCED->WORLD must be set on “USA” (the default value is “EUROPE”). After

the setting, close the displayed software menu and use the button BAND on the front panel to select FM1, FM2, FM3,

AM1, AM2 or WB. Weather reports are only broadcast in the United States and Canada.

Q: The radio broadcasts traffic information on a different channel and, after a short time, returns to the original one.

R: Make sure the TA function is enabled. To disable it, follow the path MENU->TUNER->RDS_TA->TA_OFF.

Q: Bluetooth audio is not broadcast well, or not at all, by the speakers.

R: Check the settings of the HFP (Hands Free Profile). During a Bluetooth phone call, turn the volume knob to improve

audio. Further, check the BT VOL and HFP SPKR menus in the software menu to make sure they match the ones of

the settings in the cab. Also check the settings in the connected Bluetooth cell phone.

Controls - Cab

3-37

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

ADDITIONAL CAB FEATURES

Cab Rear Window [2.d]

To open the cab's rear window, turn the lever (1) clockwise.

EMERGENCY EXIT: open the rear window completely.

WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or

the side and rear windows during work. The noise in

the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-

tor to wear headsets or other individual protection

against noise.

Rear view mirror (if equipped)

Mounted inside the cab on the right side.

Sunshade

A sunshade is mounted in the front part of the cab roof.

To lower the sunshade (1), pull down as required.

To raise the sunshade, push up as required.

Roof hatch (if equipped)

To open the cab sunroof, turn the handles (1).

To open the sunshade (2), pull and attach into the retain-

ing clips (3).

WARNING: If the sunroof is open during work,

the protection against falling objects is no

longer valid. In presence of such a danger,

keep the sun roof always correctly closed.

3-38

Controls

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Adjustment of rear view mirror sup-

ports

NOTE: it is important that the rear view mirrors are cor-

rectly adjusted to have the best view both in the front and

at the rear.

NOTE: this adjustment must only be carried out with the

engine not running and machine at standstill.

Adjusting the extension

The rear view mirror supports can be extended to have a

better rear view according to implement size.

1. Loosen the knob (1) and change the extension in the

required direction.

2. Tighten the knob (1) again to fix the support extension

in the required position.

Fore/aft adjustment control

The arm of the rear-view mirrors can be adjusted by mov-

ing the articulation to and fro to avoid any hindrances.

CAUTION: Hot parts of the machine are suitably

guarded, wherever possible. This does not exclude,

however, that great care should be used when work-

ing on the machine, to avoid burns or scalding. [2.n]

CAUTION: Very hot surfaces. The hands and fingers

could be scorched. Warning: keep well clear of hot

parts. Keep at a safe distance. Keep all guards mounted

when the engine is running. [2.n]

Instruments

4-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 4

Instruments and Programming

4-2

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Buttons

The instrument panel has 4 buttons.

5 - Enter: to go to the required menu

6 - Esc - Home: to quit

7 - Left-hand - High: left arrow

8 - Right - down. right arrow

This buttons allow the operator to:

- navigate in the work menu

- enter the programming menu

- navigate in the programming menu

- change values in the programming menu

5 6 7 8

Instrument panel

The main digital display DMD Dot Matrix Display is divided

into work areas:

1 - Transmission

2 - Power take-off

3 - Browsing menu

4 - Operator menu

Warning buzzer - Buzzer

The buzzer starts operating as a warning. The buzzer has

two sound level:

1 - Low level for low priority.

2 -

high intermittent level for high priority level.

NOTE: The loudness of the buzzer should change ac-

cording to engine rated speed. Otherwise, please con-

tact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Instruments

4-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Ignition key OFF/ON

When the key is on the OFF position, the panel goes into alarm mode and the operator is warned in the following cases:

- Side lights, driving beams on.

- Park brake not engaged.

Therefore the panel has 3 different operation modes:

- Enabled: ignition key ON

- Stand by: ignition key OFF, panel off except for the warnings above specified.

- OFF: Key OFF, when the battery is not connected.

WARNING: If after turning the ignition key to ON, the instrument panel does not light up within 1 second, the

instrument panel itself may be faulty. Ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for a check.

NOTE: When the battery disconnector switch is on (unconnected battery), the instrument panel remains off.

If one of the following images is displayed, the instrument panel found errors that cannot be corrected by the operator.

In this case, the tractor should not be used. Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer instead.

NOTE:this image is displayed perma-

nently, regardless of any operator's

action.

NOTE:this image is displayed perma-

nently, regardless of any operator's

action.

NOTE: this image is displayed at the

start on the instrument cluster in pop-

up mode, with high priority.

Acronyms

IC Instrument Cluster

ECU Electronic Control Module

TC Transmission Controller

HC Hitch Controller

FNR Forward Neutral Reverse

PTO Power Take Off

DL Differential Lock

MFD Mechanical Front Drive

4WD 4 Wheel Drive

DI Digital Input

AI Analog Input

FI Frequency Input

DO Digital Output

HSD High Side

LSD Low Side

IVS Idle Validation Switch

ICH Instrument Cluster

DOC Diesel Oxidation Catalyst

DEF Diesel Emission Fluid

EAT Exhaust After Treatment

SCR Selective Catalyst Reduction

4-4

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Indicator lights

1 Left turn indicator, green

2 Marker lights on, green

3 1st trailer indicator, green

4 2nd trailer indicator, green

5 High beams on, blue

6 Braking system fault (level, pressure), red.

7 Parking brake engaged, red.

Trailer braking system fault (hydraulic/air system), red.

9 Low AdBlue™ or DEF level, yellow

10 Standstill procedure request indicator, yellow

11 Faulty anti-pollution system indicator, yellow

12 Derating enabled, yellow

13 Empty

14 Right turn indicator, green

15 Front PTO engaged, yellow

16 Rear PTO engaged, yellow

17 Not used

18 Empty

19 Empty

20 Differential lock engaged, yellow.

21 4WD engaged, yellow.

22 Major warning, red Turn the engine off and please

contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

23 General warning, yellow. Faulty tractor operation. An

error has been detected by the vehicle's diagnostic

system and an error code has been generated.

24 Empty

25 Empty

26 Transmission hydraulic oil filter clogging, yellow.

27 Warning light for low pressure in transmission hydraulic

system, red.

28 Not available

29 Low fuel level, yellow

30 Battery charging, red

31 High coolant temperature, red

32 Low engine oil pressure, red

33 Engine fault warning, yellow. Contact your Argo Trac-

tors Dealer.

34 Engine air filter clogging, red

Instruments

4-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Display operation

The system menu is divided into 2 parts:

1- Operating menu

2- Accessories Menu

With the key on the ON position the instrument cluster display shows a welcome screen for 3 seconds: If no button is

depressed during these 3 seconds, the operating system is accessed, but if the Enter button is depressed, the Acces-

sories menu is accessed.

Welcome screen

The tractor mark logo is displayed for 3 seconds on full screen.

4-6

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Key

1. Right button pressed down: menu or next submenu

2. Left button pressed down: menu or previous submenu

3. Press Enter: access to submenu

4. No activity for 10": exit from submenu and return to original menu

5. Long pressure on Esc-Home: exit from submenu and return to original menu

Minor error

Major error

Esc-Home pressed / After 5” on display

Esc-Home pressed / error is no longer present

Long pressure on

Esc-Home

Esc-Home pressed / error

is no longer present

Brief pressure on Esc-

Home

Ignition key OFF

(engine off)

Last displayed menu

Submenu

(if available)

Pop-up

The display goes off by

pressing Esc or when

the error is no longer

present

Pop-up 5 seconds

The display goes off

after 5 seconds

Ignition key OFF

Ignition key ON

Ignition key OFF

4 35

Operating menu

CAUTION: mind wanderings can cause accidents! NEVER open menus on the instrument panel while driving.

If the ignition key is ON, the display goes back to the last menu displayed before previously turning the tractor off.

Some messages are only displayed in alarm conditions and are not visible in normal operation conditions.

Instruments

4-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Changing parameters

Parameters are of two types:

1. Numbers or values to be set after selecting among preset values. Number parameters change one digit at a time.

2. Parameters to be scrolled change while depressing the right or left buttons. The value increases or decreases in a

cyclical way while scrolling the available values. Example: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1

Digital numbers change as follows:

if you enter write mode, the whole number flashes, e.g.:

Right button

Button Enter

depressed

(short)

Enter button

depressed

(long)

By depressing the left/right button, the value is increased/decreased by one unit. By holding the left/right button de-

pressed, the value is increased/decreased progressively.

When the maximum/minimum value is reached, the parameter goes back to the maximum/minimum value.

The main digital display DMD Dot Matrix Display is divided into work areas:

1 - Transmission

2 - Power take-off

3 - Browsing menu

4 - Operator menu

All arrows described in the following parameters are empty if the buttons left/right are not depressed, while they are full

black when one of these buttons is depressed.

White arrow: button not depressed.

Black arrow: button depressed.

No button depressed Left button depressed Right button depressed

4-8

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Alarm management priority display

There are 2 priority levels.

- Major fault: alarm/message with high priority

- Minor fault: alarm/message with low priority

- An alarm/message with low priority is displayed for 5 seconds, then the display goes back to the previous state.

If during these 5 seconds the operator changes menu manually by the buttons Up/Down or Esc/Home, the display goes

back to normal status.

Esc/Home: return to previous menu.

Up/Down changes actual display from the actual operating menu.

If more than one alarm/message is enabled, the display shows each one in sequence.

Example:

1) 1 Major fault plus 1 Minor fault

The display shows Major fault, if Esc is depressed Minor fault is displayed. If you depress Esc before 5", you go back to

the menu previously shown by the display, otherwise after 5" it goes back to the previous menu.

2) Several Major faults and several Minor faults

A pop-up shows the first Major fault then, if no button is touched, the program cycles through the following Major faults.

If Esc is depressed, the Minor faults are displayed. If Esc is depressed again, the display goes back to the previous menu.

For Major faults, when the last fault of the cycle is displayed, the cycle starts from the first one again.

For Minor faults, when the last fault is reached, the display shows again the menu shown before the faults were displayed.

WARNING

If you ignore indicator lights and information messages, you run the risk of a breakdown and/or causing

or being involved in accidents, with unforeseen consequences.

If alarm codes are displayed on the instrument cluster, stop the tractor in a safe position and contact

your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Main display

Clock/Work timer

clock

work hours

Instruments

4-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Rear electronic hitch

Information concerning the hitch are updated in real time on the main screen.

The under displayed indications refer to the a machine with the most complete equipment.

Position in percent of rear hitch

Value of the relative position of the implement in that moment.

0% = minimum position

100% = maximum position

Position of the rear hitch

Hitch not moving

Hitch raisingHitch lowering

Not allowed

Hitch position indication

Indication of engagement/disengagement threshold of auto PTO (if the software version

calls for it)

Engagement/disengagement threshold of auto PTO

(if the software version calls for it)

Information on PTO engagement/disengagement threshold are displayed on the instrument cluster, as indicated below.

A. This icon indicates the PTO function

B. It indicates the hitch position under which the PTO engages in AUTO

C. It indicates the hitch position over which the PTO disengages in AUTO

NOTE: if the engagement/disengagement thresholds of the Auto PTO are set at percentages greater than 90%, the PTO

could be activated/deactivated when the “antidumping” function of the hitch is active. It is therefore advised to choose

these percentages accurately, according to your work requirements. In transport mode, with antidumping active, it is

advised not to set thresholds greater than 90%.

4-10

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Setup of limits for auto PTO engagement/disengagement.

(if the software version calls for it)

For a setup of limits for auto PTO engagement/disengagement, follow the logic as indicated in the following diagram.

Key

1. Right button pressed down

2. Left button pressed down

3. Enter pressed

4. Esc pressed

5. Long pressure on Enter (2 seconds)

6. Right button pressed down: to increase a factory set value

7. Left button pressed down: to reduce a factory set value

After highlighting a parameter, press Enter to change its value. While the value is being changed, the value flashes.

When the change of a parameter is ended (flashing digit), press Enter to save the value. The digit stops flashing.

Press Esc while changing a parameter (digit flashing) to quit the change (the digit stops flashing) and return to the previ-

ously set value.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs during the input of values, the instrument cluster will display it only after the

value has been changed.

3 4

4 5 3 4 5

Instruments

4-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Air brakes pressure

This function is operating only if air brakes are present.

Refer to "Pressure in air brake system" in this section.

AdBlue™ or DEF level

The AdBlue™ or DEF level in the reservoir is displayed as in the following image, where:

• the size of the black rectangle (A) depend on the present amount of AdBlue™ or DEF

• the percentage (B) refers to the amount of AdBlue™ or DEF in the reservoir

The images besides are displayed when the relative alarm

occurs.

In case of contemporary messages of “Tec. Failure” and/

or “Bad Quality” and/or “Low Level” the highest priority

pop-up will be displayed.

If 2 or 3 indications have the same level, “Tec. Failure” is

displayed first, followed by “Bad Quality” and then “Low

Level”.

If during the use of the tractor the instrument cluster no longer receives information on AdBlue™ or DEF level or received

an error message, the above pop-up window is shown with the flashing “- - -%” symbol and the bar (A) replaced by flash-

ing dashes. At the same time the following indicators may come up:

Refer to your authorized Argo Tractors Dealer.

Tec. Failure

System malfunction

Poor Quality

Poor quality of AdB-

lue™ or DEF

Low Level

Low AdBlue™ or

DEF level

4-12

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine operating modes

See below the description of the indications of the instrument cluster and of the limitations to engine operation imposed

by the control unit.

ECU - Control unit that detects the error

SPN and FMI are the values that must be communicated to your Argo Tractors Dealer to identify

the problem.

2/4 indicates: number of displayed alarm/total number of displayed alarms.

NOTE: Refer immediately to your Argo Tractors Dealer if alarms are present or if the engine is losing power.

If the machine is used for a long time in such conditions, the engine system will be damaged.

AdBlue

or DEF liquid level

Buzzer European markets

Canada market

and United States

level

switched

off

fixed

flashing (Hz)

switched

off

fixed

flashing

on reaction of the system reaction of the system

> 15% YES YES OFF -- --

< 15% YES YES OFF -- --

< 10% YES (0.5 Hz) YES OFF -- --

< 5% YES (0.5 Hz)

YES

(yellow)

ON No reduction of engine power No reduction of engine power

< 5%

(10 min)

YES (1 Hz)

YES

(yellow)

Level 1 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 25%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute)

No reduction of engine power

< 5%

(15 min)

YES (2 Hz)

YES

(red)

Level 1 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 25%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute)

No reduction of engine power

< 5%

(20 min)

YES (2 Hz)

YES

(red)

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduc-

tion rate by 10% every minute,

engine speed reduction activates

at 360 rpm).

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduc-

tion rate by 10% every minute,

engine speed reduction activates

at 360 rpm).

Instruments

4-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AdBlue

or DEF liquid quality

Buzzer European markets

Canada market

and United States

quality

switched

off

fixed on

flashing (Hz)

switched

off

fixed on

flashing

on reaction of the system reaction of the system

too low YES

YES (yel-

low)

ON No reduction of engine power No reduction of engine power

too low YES

YES (yel-

low)

No reduction of engine power,

it activates 9h 50min after de-

tection

No reduction of engine power,

it activates 1h 50min after de-

tection

too low YES

YES (yel-

low)

Level 1 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 25%, reduc-

tion rate by 10% every minute).

It activates 10h after detection

No reduction of engine power, it

activates 2h after detection

too low YES YES (red) ON

Level 1 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 25%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute). It ac-

tivates 19h 50min after detection

No reduction of engine power,

it activates 3h 45min after de-

tection

too low YES YES (red) ON

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduc-

tion rate by 10% every minute,

engine speed reduction activates

at 360 rpm). It activates 20h after

detection

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute, engine

speed reduction activates at 360

rpm). It activates 3h 55min after

detection

4-14

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Technical fault in the AdBlue

or DEF system

Buzzer European markets

Canada market

and United States

technical

fault

switched

off

fixed on

flashing (Hz)

switched

off

fixed on

flashing

on reaction of the system reaction of the system

error

detected

YES

(yellow)

ON No reduction of engine power No reduction of engine power

error

detected

YES

(yellow)

No reduction of engine power,

it activates 35h 50min after

detection

No reduction of engine power,

it activates 1h 50min after de-

tection

error

detected

YES

(yellow)

Level 1 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 25%, reduc-

tion rate by 10% every minute).

It activates 36h after detection

No reduction of engine power, it

activates 2h after detection

error

detected

YES

(red)

Level 1 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 25%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute). It ac-

tivates 99h 50min after detection

No reduction of engine power,

it activates 3h 45min after de-

tection

error

detected

YES

(red)

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute, engine

speed reduction activates at

360 rpm). It activates 100h after

detection

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute, engine

speed reduction activates at 360

rpm). It activates 3h 55min after

detection

Technical fault in the AdBlue

or DEF system

Buzzer European markets

Canada market

and United States

technical

fault

switched

off

fixed on

flashing (Hz)

switched

off

fixed on

flashing

on reaction of the system reaction of the system

hardware

error

detected

YES YES (red) ON No reduction of engine power No reduction of engine power

hardware

error

detected

YES YES (red) ON

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute, engine

speed reduction activates at 360

rpm). It activates 10min after

detection

Level 2 reduction (reduction of

engine torque by 50%, reduction

rate by 10% every minute, engine

speed reduction activates at 360

rpm). It activates 10min after

detection

(for European markets)

NOTE: the hour counters for the passage to the reduction levels 1 and 2 are reset to zero after resolution of an error. If

general error due to quality or technical fault are present, if the error comes up again within 40 operation hours, the hour

counter will go on counting from the previous value.

(valid for Canadian and US markets)

NOTE: If general error due to quality or technical fault are present, if the error comes up again within 40 operation hours,

the system will activate the hour counter for the passage to a level 2 power reduction.

Instruments

4-15

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Override function (valid for European markets)

With this function the operator can move the machine in an emergency situation when an inducement situation is active

as described in the previous pages.

This function can be activated for max. 3 times within 30 minutes for each starting up. If the engine is put off, the remain-

ing time is memorized and can be used at the next engine start up.

During the override, the engine can operate at full power.

Override function (valid for Canadian and US markets)

This function is not allowed during a level 2 engine power reduction.

Service interval

The service timer warns the operator that service is needed.

When the timer reaches 0, the operator is warned by the menu displayed for 5" and the hour meter flashing. The same

display is repeated every time the key is ON in pop-up mode, up to the reset of counter for service.

When the menu is displayed, to avoid a recurrence of the pop-up, just set a new value in the AC9 menu (see further in

this section).

If the operator, in the future:

• no longer wants to see this pop-up, a 0 value must be set in the AC9 menu.

• wants to see this pop-up again, a value different from 0 must be set in the AC9 menu.

The service counter carries out a countdown of the hours to the next service any time the engine is started.

If the service interval in the accessory menu AC9 is set on 0, the count for the service interval is disabled. The factory

set value is 0.

4-16

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Alarm from operator present sensor on seat

When the seat sensor activates the buzzer, the seat icon appears on the display as a low priority pop-up.

Refer to "Management of operator present control" in Section 3 to understand the logic of the sensor.

If the seat sensor alarm is not active, this menu is not displayed.

Electra-hydraulic effectiveness

This function is available only with electronic controlled

transmission.

For operation, see paragraph Adjustment of electro-

hydraulic reverse shuttle effectiveness in section 3 of

this manual.

The cursor indicates the reactivity of the clutch automatic

engagement.

To change the value displayed by the instrument cluster,

turn the potentiometer as illustrated below.

NOTE: if the potentiometer is turned from without the

menu on the instrument cluster, the display will show the

menu as a pop-up in all cases.

Instruments

4-17

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Counters

By this menu it is possible to see parameters of the worked area. It is possible to monitor 4 different parameters of the

worked area.

The start page of this menu is the following:

Distance covered

Area worked

Litres of fuel used

Work hours

The number “1” shows that the first counter is selected, the number “4” shows

that 4 counter are available within the menu. If the “Worked area” counter had been

selected, the indication “1/4” would change to “2/4”.

At the highest level of this menu (see image at page beginning), push Enter to go at a submenu (see image below). These

menus only differ for the word Esc. To scroll the 4 counters, press the right or left button.

It the counter is operating, the sequence number at the bottom of the page (1/4 in the image above) flashes to indicate

this. The counter used in the main page is the last used.

In the following example, the third timer is selected.

At this level it is possible to switch from one counter to another.

If you press Enter (short pressure) while a counter is displayed, the counter starts or stops.

Press Enter a few seconds (long pressure) to reset the counter to zero.

If you press the Esc button, the control goes back to the higher level.

The displayed measurement units are compliant with the setting as described in "AC5: Euro/NAO sales market".

The information are not lost when the tractor is off.

Calibrations (if the software version calls for them)

Calibrations are used to calibrate the parameters in electronic controllers.

Calibrations are to be carried out by specialised personnel at your official Argo Tractors Dealer.

IMPORTANT: this menu is not an operator menu. Please ask your authorised Argo Tractors dealer.

4-18

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine controller menu

A and B are always displayed. The alarm icons are displayed only when an alarm is enabled.

Alarm indicators

Instant consumption: instant consumption of fuel litres in a hour

battery voltage in Volt

Worked area: instant worked area in hectars per hour

Icons of alarm indicators and meaning

Pre-heating grid heater

Indicator light of water in fuel

Standstill procedure request indicator

Standstill procedure running

During the standstill operation, the icon hereunder will be shown full screen in the middle display of the instrument cluster.

The presence of this icon shows that the standstill operation is running.

If this icon is displayed, keep up all conditions required to complete the standstill operation.

Do not move the tractor and wait for the operation to be complete.

Instruments

4-19

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Standstill operation of the exhaust

gas post-treatment system

When the indicator comes up on the instrument

cluster, the Standstill operation must be carried out.

The standstill procedure may be started if the following

conditions are complied with:

• Tractor at standstill

• Parking brake applied

• Rear PTO not active

• Front PTO not active

• The AdBlue

or DEF must not be frozen

• The engine coolant must have a minimum operating

temperature of 70 °C approximately.

If the above conditions are complied with, the standstill

operation may be started by pressing the button (1) on

the right side of the instrument turret.

NOTE: while the standstill operation is running, let the

engine idle (about 800 rpm).

NOTE: the duration of the standstill operation depends

on a few factors due to the use conditions. The duration

may even be of about one hour. During the whole length

of time the above mentioned conditions must be kept up

and access to the tractor is forbidden to any not author-

ized persons.

During the whole standstill operation, on the display in the

middle of the instrument cluster the indicator shown here

at the side will be lit to indicate the operation is running.

The indicator lamp will go out as soon as the operation

is completed.

WARNING: if no standstill operation is carried out

when requested, the functionality of the exhaust gas

post-treatment system will be impaired. If such request

is still ignored, besides having a a strong reduction in

engine power, the system can be damaged so much

that an intervention of the Argo Tractors authorised

Dealer will be required.

WARNING: during the standstill operation in-

candescent gases are expelled that can cause

harm to persons and damage things.

The operation must always be carried out:

• outdoor

• far from potentially flammable materials,

such as hay, straw, dry leaves, etc.

• clear of persons or animals

• preventing access of non authorized persons

to the tractor

NOTE: with the

light on with a steady yellow light,

and in the presence of one or both of the following SPN

7FFA1 and 7FFA2, FMI 8 alarm codes on the display, you

must contact your Argo Tractors official dealer to perform

the engine oil reset procedure.

NOTE: Every time the engine oil must be changed, we

advise a forced standstill with the old oil, and only after-

ward to change it.

4-20

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Left button de-

pressed

Right button de-

pressed

Enter

depressed

Adjustment of screen, lamps and indicators brightness

By this menu the brightness of the screen can be adjusted at night with sidelights on. The start page will be the following:

Ent at the bottom left of the start page indicates that a submenu can be reached (calibration level).

To change the brightness, press the button Enter, then the right button to increase the brightness by 1 level, or the left

button to decrease of 1 level. When the right or left button is pressed, the square of - or + turns black while the sign turns

white. Press the Enter button 2 seconds long to save the new level; the control goes to the start page. If during brightness

adjustment the button Esc is pressed, the previous brightness level remains unchanged. In the brightness adjustment

page, Ent means that the value can be saved, while Esc means exit from the brightness adjustment.

During brightness adjustment, whether sidelights are on or not, the instrument cluster adjusts its brightness to the changes

being made. Once the new setting is saved, if the sidelight are on, the new setting is immediately applied, otherwise the

setting is remembered and the instrument cluster uses the maximum brightness.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs during the input of values, the instrument cluster will display it only after the

end of the adjustment.

Instruments

4-21

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Constant engine rate (if the software version calls for it)

Press the button (1) on the right console to enter a con-

stant engine rpm rate.

NOTE: for a complete description of how to use this func-

tion, see the paragraph "Operation" further in this manual.

After pressing the button (1) (long pressure), a low priority pop-up like the one underneath is displayed to inform the

operator that the constant engine rpm rate has been saved.

When the “Constant engine rpm rate” is enabled, in the Transmission display area the

engine symbol will be displayed with an “M” inside as shown here at the side.

When the function "constant engine rpm rate" is disabled, the symbol

is replaced

by the symbol

The value in the figure is only an example.

The engine symbol and the indication “n/min” are always displayed.

The symbol means the engine rpm rate value is stored. This symbol is only

displayed in the saving phase, but not in the activation/deactivation phase of

the function.

NOTE: as soon as the engine rpm rate is saved, the function will remain active.

To disable the constant engine revolutions function, press the button (1) (brief pressure) on the right console.

When the constant engine rpm rate is disabled, no pop-up is displayed. Instead, on top right of the transmission area the

symbol

is replaced by the symbol .

For detailed information about the function “Constant engine rate”, refer to Operation chapter in the section 5 in this manual.

4-22

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Key

1. Enter pressed

2. Right button pressed down: the cursor is moved to the right (+)

3. Left button pressed down: the cursor is moved to the left (-)

4. Long pressure on Enter: cursor position stored

1 2

In each mask of the above diagram, except the first on on top left, if Esc is pressed the instrument cluster will show the

mask at top left with the cursor in the same position displayed before entering the menu.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs while the function is being set up, the instrument cluster will display it only after

the end of the adjustment.

The instrument cluster displays the mask at the side, without the indication

"Ent", in the following cases:

• if an error occurred, please contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

• an attempt was made to change the profile while the PTO was running.

Stop the PTO.

Selection of rear PTO engagement curve

(if the software version calls for it)

By this menu different response profiles for the rear PTO can be set.

Instruments

4-23

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Selection of front PTO engagement curve

(if the software version calls for it)

By this menu different response profiles for the front PTO can be set.

Key

1. Enter pressed

2. Right button pressed down: the cursor is moved to the right (+)

3. Left button pressed down: the cursor is moved to the left (-)

4. Long pressure on Enter: cursor position stored

1 2

In each mask of the above diagram, except the first on on top left, if Esc is pressed the instrument cluster will show the

mask at top left with the cursor in the same position displayed before entering the menu.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs while the function is being set up, the instrument cluster will display it only after

the end of the adjustment.

The instrument cluster displays the mask at the side, without the indication

"Ent", in the following cases:

• if an error occurred, please contact your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer.

• an attempt was made to change the profile while the PTO was running.

Stop the PTO.

4-24

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Alarms

If no alarm is displayed or the system detects a new one at least, the high priority pop-up as shown under will open to

indicate the total number of alarms.

Number of present/detected alarms

Indicates 4 alarms present/number of pages

The first page shows the amount of present alarms, while the following pages

show the specific codes that are to be communicated to the authorised Argo

Tractors dealer.

The main display shows all errors in the system (errors of the instrument cluster + other errors of the electronic controllers).

If there are no errors in the system, the menu is disabled.

Press Enter to go to the pages that show the enabled alarms.

Active alarms are displayed in the following format:

ECU - Control unit that detects the error

SPN and FMI are the values to be communicated to the authorised Argo Tractors dealer.

2/4 indicates: number of displayed alarm/total number of displayed alarms.

Press Esc to leave alarm display and return to the main page.

If the alarm lists change during these displays, the system updates the list, but the screen shows the same alarm.

Instruments

4-25

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Transmission display area

Gear and range engaged

NOTE: according to the transmission setting, the indications on the instrument cluster may be different. Here under we

give a detailed list of all the possible indications.

Symbols N/P/D/R

See following figures

Number values:

1 = L underdrive

2 = D direct

3 = Overdrive

N - Neutral

P - Park Lock engaged (if fitted)

D - Forward speeds

R - Reverse

NOTE: if the instrument cluster shows a series of dashes, contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

4-26

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Driving direction

The tractor symbol is always lit.

Only in set-ups with hydraulic reverse shuttle, the instrument cluster will display the following icons in the following cases:

the forward driving direction was required (arrow up is lit).

the reverse driving direction was required (arrow down is lit).

a malfunction was detected (both arrows are lit).

Instruments

4-27

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Power take-off menu

Symbol of rear PTO

Always lit up

Rear PTO speed rate

Front PTO speed rate

Front PTO symbol lit up

only if front PTO is provided

Overspeed of rear and front PTO (if equipped).

If an overspeed is detected, the exclamation mark is lit

and the actual speed of the PTO flashes.

Overspeed

Front PTO

Overspeed

Rear PTO

Speed rate of front PTO

(if equipped)

If the front PTO is engaged, the display will show the speed rate of the front PTO.

If an overspeed is detected, the speed rate flashes.

Speed rate of rear PTO

The speed rate of the rear PTO is displayed.

If an overspeed is detected, the speed rate flashes.

Speed rate of rear PTO engaged

Refer to the paragraph “Selected PTO speed rate” further in this chapter.

4-28

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Auto PTO (rear Power Take-Off, automatic option) (if provided)

When the operator recalls the Auto PTO function, the PTO area in the display is refreshed as follows:

Refer to the “Operation” section in this manual for further information on the auto PTO function.

Stationary tractor

When the stationary tractor status is enabled, the PTO area in the display is refreshed as follows:

The symbol is displayed as long as the “Stationary tractor” mode is enabled. When the “Stationary tractor” mode

is quitted, the

symbol is replaced by the tractor symbol .

IMPORTANT: The Stationary tractor function cannot be entered when the tractor is on the move.

NOTE: The Stationary tractor function is disengaged automatically as soon as the tractor reaches a design speed limit that

guarantees the operator's safety.

When the "stationary tractor" work mode is activated, the instrument cluster display shows the following icon as a low

priority pop-up.

Instruments

4-29

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Front axle suspension (if equipped)

All information about the front axle suspension is displayed on the instrument cluster, as described here.

Automatic - SOFT

• Suspension activated and kept in middle position;

• Two operation pressure phases;

• Interlocking logics at end of travel by means of the lock

valves;

• Operating speed range: 0 kph to max. speed

• Indicator light on in the button (1)

Automatic - MID

• Suspension activated and kept in middle position;

• Two operation pressure phases;

• Lock valves partially closed to increase rigidity;

• Interlocking logics at end of travel by means of the lock

valves;

• Operation range: 0 kph to max. speed

• Indicator light on in the button (1)

Automatic - HARD

• Suspension activated and kept in middle position;

• Two operation pressure phases;

• Lock valves almost completely closed to increase rigidity;

• Interlocking logics at end of travel by means of the lock

valves;

• Speed range: 0 kph to max. speed

• Indicator light on in the button (1)

LOCKED

• Suspension locked and kept in middle position;

• Two operation pressure phases;

• Lock valves completely closed;

• Speed range: 0 kph to 15 kph goes automatically in auto-

matic mode.

• Indicator flashing in the button (1)

Premendo il pulsante (1) sulla torretta centrale portastru-

mento è possibile selezionare tre livelli di rigidità della

sospensione e attivare/disattivare la modalità di sospen-

sione bloccata. E' inoltre possibile accedere alla modalità

manuale (Manual mode) con menù dedicato.

NOTA: per la descrizione completa sull’utilizzo di que-

sta funzione, vedere più avanti in questo manuale nella

sezione “Norme d’uso”.

4-30

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Manual mode

• The position can be adjusted by means of a dedicated menu.

• Check for the operating pressure so that is it neither too high

nor too low;

• Lock valves completely closed;

• Operating speed range: 0 kph to 2 kph switches automatically

to the last used mode.

• Indicator on the button (1) is off.

Front axle suspension adjustment in Manual mode (if equipped)

The following mask is displayed if a problem occurs. It is then necessary to refer to your authorized Argo Tractors Dealer.

By this menu you can set the suspension height of the front axle.

CAUTION: with the tractor at standstill, the raising and lowering

movements are dangerous for anyone standing by

the front axle.

CAUTION: do not carry out any adjustments of the front axle

height if there are persons near the tractor’s forecar-

riage.

From the above mask, press Enter to change the suspension height:

• press down the right arrow key to select the up arrow and press Enter to increase the height.

• press down the left arrow key to select the down arrow and press Enter to reduce the height.

Esc pressed down

Esc pressed

down

Enter pressed

down

Enter pressed down

Instruments

4-31

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Accessories menu

Key

1. Right button pressed down: next menu

2. Left button pressed down: previous menu

3. Right button pressed down: to increase a factory set value

4. Left button pressed down: to reduce a factory set value

Ignition key OFF: no storing

Ignition key ON

No operation for 10": exit from

Engine on

Start up without any storing

When the engine is switched on

Long pressure on Esc

Longer pressure on Enter

Setting saved

Changing parameters

Longer pressure on Enter

General use of the tractor

Ignition key OFF

(engine off)

Ignition key OFF

Ignition key ON

Enter pressed 3”

Enter pressed

Configuration menu

No operation for 10"

no storing

Esc pressed

no storing

4-32

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Changing parameters

Parameters are of 2 types:

• Numbers or values to set after selecting among preset values.

• Number parameters change one digit at a time.

Parameters to be scrolled change while depressing the right or left buttons. The value increases or decreases in a cyclical

way while scrolling the available values. Example: 1->2->3->4->1.

If you enter the write mode, the whole number flashes (each flash 0.5 seconds if not otherwise specified). The value in-

creases or decreases one unit at a time by pressing the buttons left/right. When the maximum/minimum value is reached,

the parameter goes back to the maximum/minimum value.

All arrows described in the following parameters are empty if the buttons left/right are not depressed, while they are full

black when one of these buttons is depressed.

White arrow: button not depressed.

Black arrow: button depressed.

AC 0: Display of component parameters

The display shows the information contained in the instrument panel.

0: 0 Accessories Menu

Software/Loader: name and version of software.

Par: versions of parameters. The displayed name indicates tractor model and parameters.

HW: HW version

SN: production number.

No button depressed Left button depressed Right button depressed

Instruments

4-33

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AC 1: Implement width (calculation of worked area)

Implement width: this value allows a calculation of the worked area.

Dimension adjustable from 0 to 99.99 meters or from 0 to 109.35 yards

0: means not defined: worked area not activated

The measurement unit is automatically related to the sales market. Meters EURO; yard NAO

Previous configuration

Next configuration

Configuration menu for

implement width

Enter pressed briefly.

The digits after the

point are flashing.

Enter pressed briefly.

The digits before the

point are flashing.

Longer pressure on

Enter

Setting saved

1 1

2 2

6 6

7 7

4 45 5

Key

1. Right button pressed down

2. Left button pressed down

3. Enter pressed for a short time

4. No activity for more than 10 seconds, no memorisation

5. Esc button depressed, no memorisation

6. Right button pressed down: to increase a factory set value

7. Left button pressed down: to reduce a factory set value

8. Enter button pressed for a few moments

4-34

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AC 4: Power take-off type

This is NOT an operator menu.

DO NOT enter this menu.

AC 5: Sales market Euro/NAO

The menu selects the sales marked of the tractor. EURO: Europe; NAO North America

Selection EURO or NAO will change the following measurement units:

EURO NAO Conversion factor

Speed kph mph km/h to Mph / 1.609

Area worked ha acre ha to acre x 2.47

Distance km mile km to mile / 1.609

Area/hour worked ha/h Acre/h ha/h to Acre/h x 2.47

Fuel l USA gallons From l to gallons x 0.26417

Instruments

4-35

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AC 7: Clock

Display is in 24h

Key

1. Left button pressed down

2. Right button pressed down

3. Enter pressed for a short time

4. No activity for more than 10 seconds, no memorisation

5. Esc button depressed, no memorisation

6. Right button pressed down: to increase a factory set value

7. Left button pressed down: to reduce a factory set value

8. Enter button pressed for a few moments

Previous configuration

Next configuration

Configuration menu of

Clock

Enter pressed briefly.

Minute digits are

flashing

Enter pressed briefly.

Hour digits are flashing

Longer pressure on

Enter

Setting saved

1 1

2 2

6 6

7 7

4 45 5

4-36

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AC 8: Work hours offset

This is NOT an operator menu.

DO NOT enter this menu.

AC 9: Service interval

By this menu a service interval in hours can be set. The instrument cluster starts a countdown to 0. Then the operator

will be advised that the set interval is reached.

The operator may set a new value, or enter a 0 meaning that no service interval has to be set. It is always possible to set

a new service interval anytime.

The factory set value for this menu is 0.

AC 12: Calibrations (if the software version calls for them)

This menu is only present depending on the software version that is installed in the instrument cluster.

Calibrations are to be carried out by specialised personnel at your official Argo Tractors Dealer.

NOTE: this menu is not an operator menu. Please ask your authorised Argo Tractors dealer.

Instruments

4-37

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Functionality

WARNING:

NEVER ignore signals from indicator lights and messages.

Stop the tractor in a safe position.

Indicator lights/Indicators/LCD screen activation

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Ignition key ON

Parking brake not engaged - Indicator light OFF

Parking brake engaged and stationary tractor - Indicator light ON

Parking brake engaged and tractor on the go - Indicator light on and flashing (these two conditions will stay active as long

as one of the indicated conditions remains present)

Ignition key OFF

If the parking brake is disengaged

The indicator light flashes for 10 seconds (or until engagement of the parking brake)

Buzzer ON for 10 seconds (or until engagement of the parking brake)

Transition from key ON to key OFF:

Parking brake not engaged

Indicator light ON 5"

Buzzer ON 5"

Insufficient pressure in the trailer brake circuit (hydraulic/air circuit)

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Ignition key ON

Pressure OK - System OK - Indicator light OFF

Low pressure in the circuit - Indicator light ON

Ignition key OFF

Function not active.

Pressure in the trailer air brake circuit

This function is active if a trailer air brake is present.

In case of low pressure or if an alarm condition is detected in the air braking system, the instrument cluster display will

show the following images as a high priority pop-up.

"Low" is flashing to show a low pressure in the system

The graphic bar range is 0 to 8 bars. The graphic bar is at travel end if the pressure is over 8 bars.

The activation of an alarm involves the indicator light and gives a warning sound only if the engine is run-

ning. (0.25" sound, 0.25" off etc. until the alarm condition is present).

If the system detects an electric error for longer than 2", an error message is displayed without operation of indicator

light and buzzer.

4-38

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Battery charging

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Ignition key: indicator light on

Ignition key ON - Engine started: Indicator light OFF. If the

indicator light lights up, this means that the battery is not

being charged (fault).

Driving beams

Indicator lamp

Blue colour

Ignition key ON

Driving beams off - Light OFF

Driving beams on - Light ON

Ignition key OFF

If the beams are lit

Indicator light ON 5"

Buzzer ON 5"

Transition from key ON to key OFF:

Driving beams ON

Indicator light ON 5"

Buzzer ON 5"

Parking lights

Indicator lamp

Colour green

Ignition key ON

Side lights off - Light OFF

Side lights on - Light ON

Ignition key OFF

If the side light are lit

Indicator light ON 5"

Buzzer ON 5"

Transition from key ON to key OFF:

Side lights on

Indicator light ON 5"

Buzzer ON 5"

Turn Left Indicator

Indicator lamp

Colour green

Ignition key ON

Turn indicator off - Light OFF

Turn indicator on - Light ON

Ignition key OFF

Turn indicator off - Light OFF

Turn indicator on - Light ON

Turn right Indicator

Indicator lamp

Colour green

Ignition key ON

Turn indicator off - Light OFF

Turn indicator on - Light ON

Ignition key OFF

Turn indicator off - Light OFF

Turn indicator on - Light ON

Turn indicator of the first trailer

Indicator lamp

Colour green

Ignition key ON

Turn indicators off - Light OFF

Turn indicators on - Light ON

Ignition key OFF

Turn indicators off - Light OFF

Turn indicators on - Light ON

Turn indicator of the second trailer

Indicator lamp

Colour green

Ignition key ON

Turn indicators off - Light OFF

Turn indicators on - Light ON

Ignition key OFF

Turn indicators off - Light OFF

Turn indicators on - Light ON

Diff lock engaged

Indicator lamp

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

Lock engaged - Light ON

Lock disengaged - Light OFF

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

4-wheel drive engaged

Indicator lamp

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

4WD engaged - Light ON

4WD disengaged - Light OFF

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Instruments

4-39

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Hydraulic filter clogged

Indicator lamp

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON - Engine ON

Clogged filter - Light ON

Ignition key ON - Engine OFF

Clogged filter - Light ON

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Low pressure in the hydraulic circuit

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Ignition key ON - Engine ON

Low pressure and engine temperature over 60° (*) - Light

Ignition key ON - Engine OFF

Low pressure - Light ON

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

* If the engine temperature was not correctly detected,

it will be ignored (light on independently).

Rear PTO engaged

Indicator lamp

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

Rear PTO engaged - Light ON

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Front PTO engaged

(if equipped).

Indicator lamp

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

Front PTO engaged - Light ON

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

The RPM of the front PTO are calculated directly by the

engine RPM: refer to paragraph “Power take-off menu”

on page 4-27 for display of the front PTO speed rate.

Problem in the tractor brake system

(oil level/pressure)

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Ignition key ON

Problem of oil level/pressure - Light ON

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Water in the fuel circuit

Indication on LCD display

No indicator light, alarm displayed on LCD in engine ECU

menu.

Ignition key ON

Water present - Alarm displayed on LCD

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Low engine oil pressure

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Malfunction - Indicator light steadily on

Clogged engine air filter

Indicator lamp

Red colour

Ignition key ON

Clogged filter - Light ON, service required

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Glow plugs

No indicator light. Indication on LCD

The indication lights up on LCD

Ignition key ON

Glow plugs activated - Indication on LCD

Glow plugs not activated - Indication on LCD

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

4-40

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine Error

Indicator light

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

See "Alarms generated by the instrument cluster" in this

section 4.

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Stop

Indicator light

Red colour

Ignition key ON

See "Alarms generated by the instrument cluster" in this

section 4.

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Master warning

Indicator light

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

See "Alarms generated by the instrument cluster" in this

section 4.

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Fault in the anti-polluting system

Indicator light

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

The indicator light comes on if a fault in the anti-polluting

system occurs or if the AdBlue™ or DEF is of poor quality.

The indicator light will come on in one of the two follow-

ing conditions:

• fixed to indicate a major problem

• flashing to indicate a problem that could become seri-

ous if ignored

NOTE: in case of fixed light, contact your authorised Argo

Tractors Dealer.

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Low AdBlue™ or DEF level

Indicator light

Colour yellow

Ignition key ON

The indicator light will come on in case of a fault in the

AdBlue

or DEF level control system, or when the level

in the reservoir is low.

The indicator light will come on in one of the two follow-

ing conditions:

• fixed: indicates a low AdBlue™ or DEF level in the

reservoir

• flashing: the AdBlue™ or DEF reservoir needs filling

up. The light will become fixed if the reservoir is not

filled up. Also refer to section “AdBlue™ or DEF level”

in this section 4.

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Instruments

4-41

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Selected PTO speed rate

Refer to display area of PTO

PTO 1000 RPM engaged

1000E PTO engaged

PTO 540 RPM engaged

540E PTO engaged

Creeper Engagement

No indicator light.

In the Transmission display area, the instrument cluster

will display the symbol

instead of .

Ignition key ON

Creeper engaged

Creeper not engaged

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

4-42

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fuel indicator light and gauge

Indicator light

Colour yellow

1 - Empty

Lamp ON - Indicator light comes on when the gauge

enters the yellow sector.

2-3-4 Normal level

5 - Full

When the fuel reaches the reserve level, the indicator light

comes on and stays lit.

NOTE: If an error is detected in the sensor, the gauge

pointer goes to position 1 with the indicator light off. Refer

to your Argo Tractor Dealer and communicate which alarm

is displayed on the instrument cluster.

Engine RPM rate

If the engine starts racing (> 2600 RPM) the pointer re-

mains at full scale.

NOTE: If the pointer is blocked at full scale, please refer

to your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Engine coolant temperature

Indicator light

Red colour

The indicator light comes on:

• with fixed light to warn that a critical temperature is

being reached. Stop the engine as soon as possible.

• with blinking light to warn that a critical temperature

has been reached. STOP THE TRACTOR IMMEDIATELY.

WARNING: Before beginning any inspections make

sure that the engine has cooled down. Beware of hot

parts in the engine and in the coolant radiator.

Before attempting any service, please refer to the proce-

dures in Section 7 of this manual.

- Blue area A to B: low temperature.

- White area B to F: normal operating temperature.

- Red area F-G: overheating. Refer immediately to your

Argo Tractors Dealer.

NOTE: in case of flashing light, contact your authorised

Argo Tractors Dealer.

Instruments

4-43

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine derating indicator light

Indicator light

Colour yellow

The indicator light comes on to indicate an engine power

reduction. In general, the light will come on in case of a

problem in message transmission on the

caN

line or along

with problems connected with exhaust gas treatment

together with the indicator lights:

Fault in the anti-polluting system

Low AdBlue™ or DEF level

NOTE: in case of fixed light, contact your authorised Argo

Tractors Dealer.

NOTE: Refer immediately to your Argo Tractors Dealer if

alarms are present or if the engine is losing power.

If the machine is used for a long time in such conditions,

the engine system will be damaged.

4-44

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Alarms of instrument cluster

Errors can be displayed in two ways:

1. Directly, the display shows actual errors.

2. Through instruments available to personnel of the Argo

Tractors Dealer.

Each alarm is identified by the electronic module that gen-

erated it, by the SPN code plus FMI code. The electronic

module that generated the alarm and the codes SPN and

FMI displayed by the instrument cluster should be com-

municated to the service personnel of your Argo Tractors

Dealer for a quick solution to the problem.

General alarms (yellow)

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

tions:

- Off

- Steady on

- Blinking (0.5” on / 0.5” off)

Engine alarms (yellow)

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

tions:

- Off

- Steady on

- Blinking (0.5” on / 0.5” off)

- Fast flashing (0.25” on / 0.25” off)

General alarms (red)

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

tions:

- Off

- Steady on

- Blinking (0.5” on / 0.5” off)

Error displaying

Each error is displayed for minimum 5".

To view the errors, see the paragraph “Alarms” in this

section 4.

CAUTION

If signals of indicator lights and messages are ignored,

the tractor is exposed to serious damages.

WARNING: always warn your authorized Argo Tractors

Dealer of any alarms. Also communicate the SPN and

FMI codes displayed on the instrument cluster.

Work hours management

clock

actual hours

worked by the

tractor

The display shows the actual hours worked by the tractor.

The value on the hour counter cannot be changed or

deleted.

The value displayed ranges from 0.0 to 999999.9. When

the value 999999.9 is reached, the hour counter stops.

Instruments

4-45

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Management of operator present control

WARNING: Use of the tractor is allowed only if the operator is correctly seated in the driver's seat. An auto-

matic alarm buzzer advises the operator of each improper operation. This buzzer warns that the operator

is non seated in the driver's seat, therefore the tractor cannot be operated safely.

WARNING: Do not tamper with this component in any way.

Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer immediately if the system is not operating correctly.

The instrument cluster includes the operator present alarm logic, that warns the operator if he/she should leave his/her

seat without engaging the parking brake and shifting the gearshift lever to neutral.

The instrument cluster will activate the buzzer according to the following logic:

Case 1: Ignition key OFF

If the parking brake is disengaged, the indicator light "parking brake" flashes and at the same time the buzzer is activate

for 10 seconds until the parking brake is engaged.

Case 2: Engine ON

If the sensor detects the absence of the operator and the gearshift is not in neutral or the parking brake is not engaged,

the buzzer is activated. The indicator light "parking brake" flashes only if the parking brake is not engaged. Alarms are

active until the causing conditions are not satisfied (gearshift in neutral, parking brake engaged or seated operator).

Case 3: Ignition key ON - Engine OFF

If the sensor detects that the operator is not present and the parking brake is not engaged, the buzzer activates and the

indicator light "parking brake" flashes for 5 seconds.

When the operator present switch on the seat activates the buzzer, the following icon is displayed in pop-up mode and

low priority:

4-46

Instruments

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Operation

5-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 5

Operation

5-2

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

GENERAL OPERATION

Before starting the engine

WARNING: An OPERATOR PRESENCE SAFETY

SWITCH is fitted on this tractor. ONLY oper-

ate the tractor when sitting on the seat. DO

NOT try to bypass the OPERATOR PRESENCE

SAFETY SWITCH, for example, by putting

heavy objects on the seat. This can result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure

all operating controls are in neutral and the

park brake is engaged. This will eliminate ac-

cidental movement of the machine or start up

of power driven equipment.

WARNING: Never start the engine in a closed

place. Always make sure that there is adequate

ventilation.

Do the following checks before starting the tractor for

the first time.

1. Check all fluid levels; i.e. engine crankcase, transmis-

sion, coolant (in the recovery bottle) and fuel tank etc.

When checking the fuel level, make sure the tank is

filled with clean fuel. Make sure all persons that oper-

ate or do maintenance on the tractor understand that

clean fuel is important.

Clean around the fuel tank cap before you remove the

cap.

2. Check all lubrication fittings.

3. Check all around the tractor for leaks.

4. Check that all drive belts are adjusted correctly.

5. Remove any water or sediment from the fuel primary

filter.

6. Check the air pressure of the tyres.

7. Make sure that the safety protection is installed in the

PTO, that must be in optimal conditions.

WARNING: Carefully read the starting instruc-

tions before starting the tractor.

WARNING: Always take into account the use

of the machine and the work place. Take

every precaution, specially if there is a high

risk of fire.

WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor from the

ground. Only start the tractor when you are

sitting in the driving seat.

WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor if the

bonnet is open or the guards are removed.

WARNING: The operator must always seat in

his/her place when driving the tractor both in

the field and on roads. DO NOT stand up from

your seat when the tractor is moving.

Recommendations for running in

− For a correct running in, it is necessary to observe all

precautions called for in the Maintenance section.

− Continuous use of light loads when the engine is still

new may cause lubrication oil to enter the discharge

system.

− You should begin using heavy loads as soon as the

engine is put into service and the coolant reaches a

minimum temperature of 60°C.

− The engine will benefit if heavy loads are applied im-

mediately after the first start.

− DO NOT run the engine for long periods at maximum

load.

− Do NOT let the engine run for a long period at high

RPM without any draft applied. If the engine is used

without any drafts, be careful to keep the right operat-

ing temperature.

Operation

5-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Starting procedure [2.c]

CAUTION: The engine may be started only in

the conditions given here under. Otherwise,

please contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

1. Make sure the Master Disconnect Switch is in the ON

position (turned clockwise).

2. Check that the reverse shuttle and gearshift levers are

in neutral.

Turn the rear PTO control switch off.

For tractors with front PTO, disengage the control (switch).

3. Check that the levers of the auxiliary control valves are

in neutral and that the hitch control position matches

the implement position, that is completely lowered.

4. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal until the engine

ignites.

5. Turn the ignition key on the ON position, wait a few

seconds, then turn the key on the start position. Thus

the electronic control systems are activated and are

able to communicate with each other. The system will

perform a Lamp Check. All the lamps in the cab will

light for a few seconds. After a few seconds, only the

lamps involved in the starting phase will stay on.

NOTE: when starting the engine in particularly cold

weather, refer to the procedure further described in this

section, in “Cold weather starting (cold engine)”.

6. Shift the FNR lever to release the Park Lock (if provided).

TURBO ENGINE: let the engine run for a few seconds

with the starter motor to allow the turbo compressor to

be lubricated.

OPERATION

CAUTION: Carefully read the starting instruc-

tions before starting the tractor.

CAUTION: Always take into account the use

of the machine and the work place. Take

every precaution, specially if there is a high

risk of fire.

CAUTION: DO NOT start the tractor from the

ground. Only start the tractor when you are

sitting in the driving seat.

CAUTION: DO NOT start the tractor if the bon-

net is open or the guards are removed.

CAUTION: The operator must always seat in

his/her place when driving the tractor both in

the field and on roads. DO NOT stand up from

your seat when the tractor is moving.

5-4

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Starting the tractor [2.c]

WARNING: Before moving off, make sure you

are perfectly familiar with the brakes, trans-

mission, PTO, diff lock and engine shut off.

After starting the engine:

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal, select the gear required

and then select the required speed range.

WARNING: Make sure that the reverse shuttle

lever is set for the direction required.

2. Disengage the Park Lock (if equipped) and the hand

brake.

WARNING: Take care of bystanders, especially

when backing up.

3. Accelerate the engine slightly and gradually release

the gearshift clutch pedal.

4. Move your foot completely off the clutch pedal and

slowly accelerate until you have reached the speed

you need.

WARNING: Do NOT keep your foot on the gearshift

clutch pedal when driving and remember to check and

adjust the clutch to prolong its life and avoid sudden

damage to it.

WARNING: If your tractor is equipped with a mechani-

cal reverse shuttle, always bring the tractor to a com-

plete standstill before changing direction.

WARNING: To keep the operator, persons and

things safe, the operator MUST be correctly

seated before starting the tractor in forward

or reverse run.

WARNING: before leaving the tractor while the

engine is running:

- put the gearbox in neutral by means of the

reverse shuttle, gearbox and range lever

- shift to neutral the transmission control to

both front and rear PTO

- lower to the ground any implements that

is connected to the front or rear part [3.c]

- check that the auxiliary control valves levers

are in neutral position

- engage the parking brake

- engage the Park Lock (if mounted).

NEVER leave the tractor unattended as long

as the engine is still running.

Stopping the tractor [2.c]

•

Reduce the engine speed.

•

Depress the gearshift clutch pedal to disengage drive.

•

Once the tractor has come to a stop, move the gear

lever and speed range lever to neutral before releasing

the gearshift clutch pedal.

•

Use both pedal brakes to stop the tractor and then

apply the parking brake.

•

Engage the Park Lock (if mounted).

Turning off the engine [2.c]

•

Turn the hand throttle lever to the “Idling” position.

Engage the first gear, then apply the parking brake.

Lower to the ground any implements that is connected

to the front or rear part.

•

Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to the 0 posi-

tion to disconnect all electrical circuits. Remove the

key. Put the key away in a safe place, not accessible

to children and not authorised persons.

TURBO ENGINE: Take care when stopping the engine

after a period of operation at full load. It is advisable to

allow it to idle for 3 or 4 minutes before stopping it. This

allows the overheated compressor to cool down to an

acceptable temperature.

WARNING: any time the tractor is not used, the ignition

key must be removed and put away in a safe place,

not accessible to children and not authorised persons.

Running in

For a correct running in, it is necessary to observe all

precautions called for in the Maintenance section.

Operation

5-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION

Before you start the engine and operate your tractor during

cold ambient temperatures, check the following items:

- BATTERIES: Must have a full charge.

- FUEL: Must be clean and contain no water.

- ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct viscosity for the am-

bient temperature range. DO NOT mix oils different for

type, characteristics and viscosity from the prescribed

ones.

- TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC FLUID - Must be filled up

with correct oil.

NOTE: For indications about the most suitable oil type

relative to ambient conditions, refer to your Argo Tractors

Dealer.

- COOLING SYSTEM - Must have a minimum of 33%

and a maximum of 50% ethylene glycol solution for

protection. This ratio will vary with different market

requirements. DO NOT mix protective fluids different

for colour and characteristics to preserve their quality.

- TYRES - If there is liquid ballast in the tyres, the tyres

must have protection against freezing temperatures

below 0°C. Ask your dealer for help.

- STOPPING THE ENGINE - Be sure that the engine tem-

perature has decreases before turning the engine off.

- CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To prevent condensa-

tion in the fuel tank and water entering the fuel system,

fill the fuel tank after each operating day.

- FUEL FILTER - During cold weather, make sure you

remove water from the fuel filter each day or damage

will occur to the injection system. Loosen the drain plug

each day before starting the engine. Tighten the drain

plug after the water has drained.

IMPORTANT: When operating at cold ambient tem-

peratures in the open field, never run the engine at low

idle speed for long periods of time. Never run the engine

for long periods of time when the coolant temperature is

below normal.

WARNING: To assist cold weather starting

DO NOT spray ether or gasoline into the air

induction manifold. To do so could cause an

explosion and injury.

During cold ambient temperatures, the engine and

transmission will not heat to or keep the rated operating

temperature at slow engine speeds. Low engine speeds

in cold temperatures can cause damage to the engine

and transmission.

Use the following procedures to warm the engine oil

and transmission oil and to keep the correct operating

temperatures.

1. WARMING THE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION.

A. To heat the transmission oil, run the engine at 1500

rpm for approximately five minutes.

2. KEEP ENGINE AT CORRECT OPERATING TEMPERA-

TURE.

A. When the engine is operating in cold ambient tem-

peratures without a load, keep the engine warm as

described below.

B. Run the engine at approximately 1500 rpm.

C. Put a cover in front of the grille to control the amount

of air going through the radiator.

3. STOPPING THE ENGINE.

A. Run the engine at slow speed for a short period of

time. This will permit the engine temperature to de-

crease gradually before stopping the engine.

5-6

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine block coolant heater (if

equipped)

This heater is installed in the engine block and keeps the

engine coolant worm to make starting the engine easier

in cold weather.

NOTE: If required, use a three-wire extension of proper

capacity.

North American Tractors (120 Volts)

Other markets (220/240 Volts)

Engine oil sump heater (option at

your Dealer's)

Depending on the market, your Dealer could offer a heater

for the engine oil sump. This heater keeps oil warm and

makes start at low temperatures easier. See your Argo

Tractors Dealer for more information.

Fuel heater (option at your Dealer's)

Depending on the market, your Dealer could offer a heater

for the fuel. This heater keeps fuel warm and makes start

at low temperatures easier

See your Argo Tractors Dealer for more information.

Cold weather starting (cold engine)

WARNING: when outdoor temperatures drop to around

or below 0°C (32°F), check the cooling circuit and add

the recommended antifreeze if required.

WARNING: do not inject fluids (ether) to make the

engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is

equipped with a cold weather starting system.

Proceed in the following way:

- Perform operations 2, 3, 4 as instructed above in "Start-

ing procedure".

- Open the hand throttle by half and turn the ignition key

clockwise to the middle position "ACCESSORIES".

- In this position the indicator light

on the LCD dis-

play of the instrument cluster will come on. This means

that the flow plug heater is active. Hold the key in this

position until the light indicator goes off.

- When the light goes off, turn the ignition key fully

clockwise to the "START" position to ignite the engine.

Release the key as soon as the engine fires and set the

accelerator lever to the idling speed. Make sure that all

the indicator lights involved in the starting procedure

are off and that the instrument cluster displays normal

values.

NOTE:

if the engine is not ignited within about 15 seconds after

the light has gone off, turn the key once more anticlock-

wise to the OFF position, wait a few seconds, then repeat

the ignition procedure. Please take care of the following:

- Do not keep the key turned to the start position for more

than 10 seconds at a time.

- Wait at least 1 minute between one attempt at starting

and another.

- If the engine cannot be started after 2-3 tries, let the bat-

tery rest for 5 minutes and repeat the procedure.

If the engine does not start regularly and easily, do not

continue as for you may run down the battery. Try and

bleed any air that may have accumulated in the fuel sys-

tem and, if the problem persists, check that:

- The fuel filters are not blocked.

- The efficiency of the battery and of the charger.

- The fuses in the ignition circuit are in a good condition.

Always contact your authorised Argo Tractors dealer in

case of any doubts and system faults.

Operation

5-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 1

Park the tractor and engage the parking brake. Shift the

forward/reverse shuttle lever to the central position of

NEUTRAL.

STEP 2

Disengage the PTO if in operation.

STEP 3

Move the throttle lever to the low idle position and let

the engine run for three to five minutes to decrease the

temperature of the engine before turning it off.

IMPORTANT: This step is very important if the engine has

been operating under heavy loads for a while. In this way,

the engine temperature will decrease gradually.

STEP 4

Engage the parking brake of the tractor and any towed

equipment (eg trailer).

STEP 5

Turn the key switch to the OFF position and remove the

key.

IMPORTANT: NEVER turn the ignition key on the OFF

position while the tractor is moving. Serious damage to

the transmission could result.

STEP 6

Turn the master battery disconnector switch anticlockwise

to deactivate it.

WARNING: Whenever the tractor is left unattended,

the ignition key must be removed.

PARKING THE TRACTOR [2.c]

Folding wheel wedges

(if equipped)

Use the wheel wedge in front of or behind a rear wheel,

(depending on the driving direction of the tractor), when

parking the tractor on a slope.

IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents do not park the tractor

with equipment raised.

5-8

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.5-1

Master disconnect switch [2.aa]

(1-Fig. 5-1)

The master disconnect switch disconnects the battery

from the tractor electric system.

The master disconnect switch (1) can only be activated

with the ignition key in the OFF position.

The master disconnect switch is placed in the control

turret, on the dashboard at the left of the driver's seat.

CAUTION: Before any maintenance opera-

tions, always disconnect the battery by means

of the master disconnect switch and remove

the terminals from the battery. [2.l]

If the tractor is not used for a long time, it is

advisable to disconnect the battery.

WARNING: When the engine is running, the battery

cannot be disconnected in any way.

This switch has two positions:

● Position A (knob turned clockwise): battery connected,

all systems are powered. The icon

is lit up.

● Position B (knob turned anti-clockwise): battery discon-

nected. Only the following items are powered: instru-

ment cluster (clock inner memories), courtesy light in

cab, radio inner memories, transmission diagnostic

sockets, electronic master disconnect switch circuit.

The icon is off.

Disconnect procedure

● Put key switch in the OFF position.

● Put the switch (1) in the (B) position to disconnect the

battery. The LCD shows the following icon:

Position B: battery disconnected

NOTE: the battery is really disconnected only when the

symbol disappears from LCD.

Restart procedure

1. Put the switch (1) in the (A) position to connect the

battery. The LCD shows the following icon when the key

is on ON:

Position A: battery connected

Error display

Any errors concerning the master disconnect switch

circuit may be shown on the LCD display by the icon

hereunder after turning the ignition key to OFF.

When this icon is displayed, the master disconnect switch

could not be in the required position due to a malfunction.

Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Operation

5-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

TRANSMISSION - configurations

The gearbox is available with a number of different options, allowing the user to choose the combination most able to

meet his specific needs.

Number of speeds Speed

HML (High-Medium-Low) and

reverse shuttle

Park Lock available as option

without creeper 36AV + 12RM 40ECO kph- 50* kph

with creeper 48AV + 16RM 40ECO kph - 50*kph

Shuttle command

Park Lock available as option

without creeper

without creeper 12AV + 12RM 40ECO kph - 50*kph

with creeper 16AV + 16RM 40ECO kph - 50* kph

* if available according to tractor configuration

WARNING: The driver is always responsible of the selected gear in any situation, specially when operating on

steep slopes or towing trailers.

5-10

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

USE OF THE GEARBOX

Functions with electro-hydraulic re-

verse shuttle and 3 Powershift ranges

on load

Reverse shuttle under load: allows the driving direction

to be reversed by simply moving FNR lever on the left

hand near the steering wheel. The electronic control unit

guarantees smooth and gradual reversing. For safety

reasons, the direction can only be reversed at speeds

of less than 10 Kph.

The Declutch system disengages the main hydraulic

clutch by means of the button on the actual gearshift

lever. This button allows the driver to shift the mechani-

cal gears without depressing the clutch pedal.

The clutch pedal is only used for very small movements

of the tractor, e.g. for hitching or unhitching an imple-

ment, and for greater safety when sudden stops are

made or obstacles are encountered.

Use of the electro-hydraulic gearbox in the 3 Powershift

operating ranges: HML (High-Medium-Low).

The operator shifts from one range to another on load

without using the clutch pedal and while the tractor is

on the move, by simply depressing the button on the

gearshift lever: press (+) to increase speed, press (-)

to slow down.

1. Gearshift lever.

2. Declutch disengaging button (orange)

3. Electro-hydraulic gearbox Powershift buttons (green)

4. Range selector lever: Creeper (on request), Low,

Normal, High.

Operation

5-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Adjustment of electro-hydraulic re-

verse shuttle effectiveness

The electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle effectiveness can be

adjusted by means of potentiometer (1). Turn anticlock-

wise to reduce it, and clockwise to increase it.

NOTE: If the potentiometer is moved but the relative

menu is not displayed on the instrument, the menu will

be displayed as a pop-up. See also “Electro-hydraulic ef-

fectiveness” in Section 4 of this manual.

5-12

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Speed tables

NOTE: The speed below are detected at 2200 RPM rated speed.

NOTE: According to the laws in force in the Country where the tractor will be used, the maximum speed the tractor will

reach is limited according to engine RPM.

WARNING: To drive the tractor on public roads, it is mandatory to abide by the laws in force

in the country where the tractor is being used, including the dictated speed limit and the

correct use of lights, hazard light and slow moving vehicle signs.

When driving on public roads, it is also mandatory to use the tractor with the brake pedals

coupled with the relative latch.

Gears speed (

kph)

OptiOn ranGe Gear

Ri = 800 mm Ri = 775 mm Ri = 750 mm

UnderdriVe

Creeper

1 0.33 0.32 0.31

2 0.51 0.50 0.48

3 0.73 0.70 0.68

4 1.13 1.10 1.06

slOw

1 1.55 1.50 1.46

2 2.44 2.37 2.29

3 3.46 3.35 3.25

4 5.41 5.24 5.07

standard

1 3.71 3.59 3.48

2 5.83 5.65 5.47

3 8.27 8.01 7.76

4 12.92 12.52 12.11

Fast

1 9.15 8.87 8.58

2 14.39 13.94 13.49

3 20.41 19.77 19.13

4 31.87 30.87 29.88

Gears speed (

kph)

OptiOn ranGe Gear

Ri = 800 mm Ri = 775 mm Ri = 750 mm

FOrward

Creeper

1 0.39 0.38 0.37

2 0.62 0.60 0.58

3 0.88 0.85 0.82

4 1.37 1.32 1.28

slOw

1 1.87 1.82 1.76

2 2.95 2.85 2.76

3 4.18 4.05 3.92

4 6.53 6.32 6.12

standard

1 4.48 4.34 4.20

2 7.04 6.82 6.60

3 9.98 9.67 9.36

4 15.59 15.10 14.61

Fast

1 11.04 10.70 10.35

2 17.36 16.82 16.28

3 24.62 23.85 23.08

4 38.45 37.25 36.05

* speeds valid for transmissions with HML setup

Operation

5-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Gears speed (

kph)

OptiOn ranGe Gear

Ri = 800 mm Ri = 775 mm Ri = 750 mm

OVerdriVe

Creeper

1 0.48 0.47 0.45

2 0.76 0.73 0.71

3 1.07 1.04 1.00

4 1.67 1.62 1.57

slOw

1 2.29 2.22 2.15

2 3.61 3.49 3.38

3 5.11 4.95 4.79

4 7.99 7.74 7.49

standard

1 5.48 5.31 5.14

2 8.61 8.35 8.08

3 12.22 11.84 11.45

4 19.08 18.48 17.89

Fast

1 13.52 13.10 12.67

2 21.25 20.59 19.92

3 30.14 29.19 28.25

4 47.06 45.59 44.12

Gears speed (

kph)

OptiOn ranGe Gear

Ri = 800 mm Ri = 775 mm Ri = 750 mm

reVerse

Creeper

1 0.40 0.38 0.37

2 0.62 0.60 0.58

3 0.88 0.86 0.83

4 1.38 1.34 1.29

slOw

1 1.89 1.83 1.77

2 2.98 2.88 2.79

3 4.22 4.09 3.96

4 6.59 6.39 6.18

standard

1 4.52 4.38 4.24

2 7.11 6.89 6.66

3 10.08 9.77 9.45

4 15.75 15.25 14.76

Fast

1 11.16 10.81 10.46

2 17.54 16.99 16.44

3 24.87 24.09 23.32

4 38.84 37.63 36.41

* speeds valid for transmissions with HML setup

5-14

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Gearshift clutch

The clutch pedal is used to temporarily stop sending mo-

tion to the gearbox.

Use the clutch pedal when moving the tractor over short

distances. Use the clutch pedal to start the tractor moving

from stationary. Gradually and completely releasing the

clutch pedal for a controlled smooth start.

• Position 1 up = clutch engaged

• Position 2 down = clutch disengaged.

Make your gear changes gradually. When the engine is

under load, do not slip the clutch to accelerate, but change

to a lower gear.

CAUTION: Never keep your foot resting on the

gearshift clutch pedal when driving.

Never coast down slopes with the gear lever

in neutral.

WARNING: DO NOT ride the clutch pedal when the

transmission is under load. Release the clutch pedal

completely within 5 seconds for improved clutch

service life. While the tractor is moving the transmis-

sion must always be in drive. Never allow the tractor

to coast downhill with the transmission in neutral or

with the clutch pedal depressed. To do so could result

in the operator not having full control of the tractor

and may result in personal injury.

Fig. 5-2 - Clutch pedal

Operation

5-15

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Reverse shuttle control lever

The reverse shuttle under load allows the driving direction

to be reversed by simply moving the FNR lever on the

left hand near the steering wheel. The electronic control

unit guarantees smooth and gradual reversing. For safety

reasons, the direction can only be reversed at speeds of

less than 10 kph.

The Declutch system disengages the main hydraulic

clutch by means of the button on the gearshift lever. This

button allows the driver to shift the mechanical gears

without depressing the clutch pedal.

The clutch pedal is only used for very small movements of

the tractor, e.g. to hitch or unhitch an implement, and for

greater safety, when sudden stops are made or obstacles

are encountered.

F - Lever forward: Forward direction

N - Neutral: Always move the lever to this position to

start the engine.

R - Lever back: Reverse direction.

P - Parking: Park Lock engaged *

* only in setups with Park Lock.

NOTE: The effectiveness of the reversing can be adjusted

by means of the specific knob on the left of the operator.

5-16

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Gearshift lever

(1 - Fig.5-3)

The lever has 4 possible positions, corresponding to 4

totally synchronised speeds.

Fig.5-4

When you switch from one gear to the next in the same

range, all you need to do is to operate the lever after you

have disengaged the main clutch without having to stop

the tractor.

Range selector lever

(2 - Fig.5-3)

The lever has four possible positions corresponding to

four ranges: Creeper (on request), Low, Normal, High.

Each range is identified by a symbol on the lever handgrip

(Fig.5-5).

Fig.5-5

Creeper range (on request)

Slow range

Standard range

Fast range

To switch from one range to the next, first disengage the

main clutch, then stop the tractor and move the lever to

the position corresponding to the required range.

Fig.5-3 - Speed control lever.

Operation

5-17

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.5-6a

Power Shuttle gearbox

Operation

The operator shifts from one range to another on load

without using the clutch pedal and while the tractor is on

the move, by simply depressing the Declutch button on

the gearshift lever:

WARNING: When outside temperatures are very cold,

it is advisable to let the engine run ad idling speed

for a few minutes, to warm up the transmission oil

until it reaches a temperature of about 20 °C, ensur-

ing proper operation of the Power Shuttle. During the

first few minutes when driving only change sense of

driving if strictly required, until the correct operation

temperature is reached.

STEP 1

Start the tractor (see the correct start procedure in the

previous pages).

STEP 2

Select the required range (Creeper - if equipped, Slow,

Standard and Fast) according to work type.

STEP 3

Engage the required speed.

STEP 4

Disengage the Park Lock (if equipped) and the hand brake.

STEP 5

With the operator seated in the driver's seat, select a

forward or reverse speed by moving the lever (1) of the

FNR shuttle. The tractor will start moving.

Fig.5-6

5-18

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Starting the tractor with the clutch

pedal

(Fig.5-7)

Use the clutch pedal if you want carry out extremely

precise manoeuvres.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal (1).

2. Move the reverse shuttle lever FNR (2) forward or back-

ward.

3. Release the pedal gradually to control the starting and

drive of the tractor.

The starting is usually in the direct drive. It is also possible

to start with Hi-Lo engaged by pressing the relative button

on the control knob.

Clutch pedal

Press the clutch pedal to end of travel (or the declutch

button) to select the gear. The range does not change.

NOTE: The use of the clutch pedal is recommended in

the following cases only:

– safety, a sudden obstacle, an emergency stop etc.

– very precise movements, e.g. hitching of implements.

Changing gear with the declutch but-

ton

(Fig.5-8)

By means of the Declutch system , you can shift gears

simply depressing the orange button (1) on the gearshift

lever knob.

Depress the button (1) to disengage the hydraulic clutch

and keep it depressed while the required gear is engaged.

Release the button.

Changing gear with the clutch pedal

(Fig.5-9)

Depress the clutch pedal (1) and engage the required gear

by the gearshift lever.

The engaged range will not be changed.

To change the range, depress the clutch pedal (1) and

wait for the tractor to stop. Engage the required range

and release the clutch pedal.

Fig.5-7

Fig.5-8

Fig.5-9

Operation

5-19

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.5-9a

Display of HML on the instrument cluster

When the HML function is used, the matching number will be displayed beside the engaged reverse shuttle function.

Symbols N/P/D/R

See following figures

Number values:

1 = L underdrive

2 = D direct

3 = Overdrive

N - Neutral

P - Park Lock engaged (if fitted)

D - Forward speeds

R - Reverse

NOTE: if the instrument cluster shows a series of dashes, contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Engagement of Powershift ranges

under load (setup with HML trans-

mission)

The gearbox provides 3 HML ranges (High-Medium-Low)

that can be engaged under load in forward gears.

For each engaged gear, 3 speeds are available: HML

(High-Medium-Low)

Use the Powershift switches (1) and (2) on the gearstick to

select: changes from one range to the next are automatic

and under load.

To shift the range up, press the green top switch (1), sign .

To shift the range down, press the green bottom switch

(2), sign .

The instrument cluster on the central display shows which

gear is selected. For more information on the instrument

cluster, refer to section 4 in this manual.

Reaction to control settings

The monitoring system automatically analyses the condi-

tions in which the tractor is used and chooses reaction

times most suitable to any condition.

NOTE: to ensure that the ranges are shifted in the correct

sequence, without slowing down too much, press the

buttons (1) and (2) considering the response times of the

transmission.

IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive deceleration of the

tractor ALWAYS downshift one range at a time in sequence

3, 2, 1.

5-20

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

USE OF REVERSE SHUTTLE UNDER

LOAD(Fig.5-10)

The tractor's driving direction is automatically reversed by

pushing the orange FNR lever (1) at the left of the steering

wheel forwards or backwards.

The reverse shuttle is automatically controlled through

the following phases.

· DECELERATION

· STOPPING

· CHANGE OF DIRECTION

· ACCELERATION

· The speed at which these phases take place are control-

led by software.

WARNING: Reversing can be obtained at any

speed. However, to protect mechanical parts

from damage and for operator's safety, this

operation should be made ONLY at speeds

UNDER 10 Kph. A buzzer sounds to warn from

reversing at speeds over 10 Kph. To correctly

engage the reverse shuttle, reduce your speed

to under 10 Kph.

USE OF REVERSE SHUTTLE WITH

CLUTCH PEDAL (Fig.5-10)

The clutch pedal is used to obtain small and precise move-

ments for certain work requirements.

• Fully depress the clutch pedal (2).

• Move the FNR lever (1) forward or backward.

• Wait until the driving direction symbol is displayed on

the instrument cluster:

the forward driving direction was

required (arrow up is lit).

the reverse driving direction was

required (arrow down is lit).

• Use your foot on the pedal to engage the clutch gradu-

ally and let the tractor move forward or backward as

required.

Fig.5-10

Operation

5-21

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Stopping and parking the tractor [2.c]

(Fig.5-11)

When leaving the tractor while the engine is running,

ALWAYS MAKE SURE that the FNR shuttle lever (1) is in

the central position of NEUTRAL.

1. Bring the tractor to a complete stop. Put the FNR shut-

tle lever in the NEUTRAL position at centre and apply

the Park Brake.

2. Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).

NOTE: Before leaving the driver's seat, make sure that:

1. the transmission is shifted to NEUTRAL

2. the implement is completely lowered to the ground

3. the ignition key has been removed

Park Lock (if equipped).

(Fig.5-12)

The Park Lock unit will mechanically lock the transmission.

Therefore the Park Lock should be engaged every time

you want to stop the tractor with the engine stopped,

particularly when the tractor is on a slope.

The engagement of the Park Lock unit is obtained by

shifting the FNR lever (1).

To disengage the Park Lock

1 - Engage the parking brake (2).

2 - Engage the Park Lock: from the middle position of the

FNR lever (1), shift it in a sequence down and forward,

as shown in the decal in the figure at the side.

NOTE: the Park Lock will be correctly engaged as soon as

the letter “P” on the instrument cluster is steadily lit up. The

letter “P” will be shown on the display for about 3 seconds.

The letter “P” will be flashing while the Park Lock is being

engaged. The letter “P” will flash until the engagement

is successfully carried out. If the engagement of the Park

Lock unit should fail, bring the FNR lever in central position

again on “N” and repeat this step.

WARNING: before leaving the tractor stationary, always

check that the Park Lock is really engaged.

To disengage the Park Lock

1 - Lift the FNR lever (1) slightly and shift it again to its

central position on Neutral N.

2 - Disengage the parking brake (2)

Disengage the Park Lock before starting the tractor.

To move the tractor, the driving direction must be selected

again by moving the shuttle lever.

WARNING: To prevent the Park Lock system from be-

ing damaged, always engage the parking brake first,

then the Park Lock. Always disengage the Park-Lock

first, then the parking brake.

Fig.5-11

Fig.5-12

5-22

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Manually releasing the Park Lock

(only in an emergency)

Only in an emergency and with the engine off, e.g. the

tractor must be towed, the Park Lock may be released

manually by means of the screw (1) on the right side, at

the bottom of the gearbox housing.

WARNING: when the screw (1) is released

manually, the tractor could move unexpect-

edly!! Before this operation make sure the rear

wheels are placed on safety chocks. Press and

hold the brake pedals and engage the parking

brake. This operation must be carried out in

uttermost safety. Do not operate the release

screw from underneath the tractor. Before

manually releasing the Park Lock, make sure

there are no persons either in front of or be-

hind the tractor.

Operation

5-23

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Power take-off

The PTO is engaged by means of the switch (1 Fig.5-13 and

Fig.5-14) installaed on the right side of the driver's seat..

An indicator light on the instrument panel comes on when

the PTO is engaged.

Use: engagement/disengagement

Operate the ON/OFF button to engage/disengage the PTO

(1 Fig.5-13 and Fig.5-14) with the engine at idling rate.

Depressed button switch: disengaged PTO

Released button switch: engaged PTO

To engage the Park-Lock, release the switch (1) by pulling

up the locking collar (2) (Fig.5-14).

Always shift the switch in the OFF disengaged position

(Fig.5-13) after using the front PTO and/or before starting

the engine.

Engage the PTO at a low engine rate to protect the clutch

and driveline.

Select the operating mode and the required speed before

engaging the PTO.

IMPORTANT: For high-inertia implements (e.g. stone

crusher, mill etc.) the universal joint for cardan shaft

is to be used.

WARNING: When using the PTO with the trac-

tor at a standstill, always make sure that the

gearshift lever is in neutral position and that

the parking brake is engaged.

WARNING: High-inertia implements do not

become stationary immediately when PTO is

disengaged. Allow sufficient time for imple-

ment to “run down” to a halt before cleaning

or adjusting.

IMPORTANT: When using implements that cause shock

loads, always use a safety coupler between the implement

and the PTO drive shaft. Before using the implement, check

the correct operation both of the safety coupler and of the

implement.

IMPORTANT: When using implements with quickly

moving parts (such as mowers, reapers, snowploughs)

ALWAYS fit an overrun device on the implement drive

shaft, as a protection against possible PTO faults.

Fig. 5-13

Fully depress the ON/OFF pedal (1). The PTO indicator

on the instrument panel goes off .

Fig. 5-14

Engagement

Pull up the locking collar (2) of the ON/OFF button, then

pull the button (1) to the ON position. Now the button will

remain on the ON position, while the PTO indicator light

on the instrument panel lights up

5-24

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Power take-off engagement [3.d]

(Fig. 5-15)

1. Select the required speed with the lever (1);

2. Select the PTO type (normal-eco) with the lever (2)

(only valid for 4-speed setup);

3. Operate the PTO engagement button (1 - Fig.5-14).

4. Engage/disengage the PTO with the engaging control

(1 - Fig.5-14) during work.

PTO type selector lever (3)

Interpretation of symbols on the decal beside the control

lever.

A - Independent PTO (3) engaged.

PTO driven directly from the engine.

IMPORTANT: Always keep the lever in position A

during work. Shift the lever to position B only if the

synchronized PTO has to be used. Return the lever to

Pos. A after using the synchronised PTO.

B - Synchronised PTO proportional to ground speed

engaged. (On request)

PTO driven by the gearbox

NOTE: the PTO operation selector lever (3) has no neutral

position. The mechanical neutral position is obtained by

bringing the speed range selector lever (1) in the middle

position "O".

IMPORTANT: The PTO mode selector lever, independent

or synchronised (optional), controls a mechanical coupler

that ensures the maximum safety in both operation modes.

The passage from a mode to another, however, is only

possible when the teeth are aligned. The procedure is

described under the headings "Direct power take-off" and

"Synchronised power take-off" hereunder.

Independent PTO engagement

It is driven directly by the engine, and its operation is fully

independent of the tractor's ground speed.

PTO version

2 speeds 4 speeds

PTO type Engine rate PTO type Engine rate

540 1944 540 1944

540E 1377 540E 1580

1000 1917 1000 1952

1000E 1586

The direct PTO must be engaged with the engine at idling

speed and without hesitation. Do not heed any noises due

to tooth meshing.

Always keep the lever (3) in position A for independent

PTO engaged.

The synchro PTO must only be engaged when actually

required (see the section Synchronised Poser Take-Off).

Engine - Power take-off RPM meter

NOTE: For information about operation of the PTO, refer

to the description of the instrument cluster in the chapter

4 of this manual.

Hydraulic PTO control levers

[3.d]

Fig. 5-15

1 - PTO speed range selector lever

2 - PTO type selector lever (setup with 4-speed PTO)

- Normal

- Eco

3 - PTO operation selector lever

A - Independent power take-off

B - Synchronised power take-off

Operation

5-25

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.5-16

Synchronised Power take-off

(If equipped) (Fig. 5-16)

Use of the rear PTO synchronised with the gearbox

merely serves to operate self-propelled trailers and, more

generally, all farm implements that need to be synchro-

nised with the tractor's ground speed and whose power

input must not exceed 40-45% of the engine's maximum

power. Engage the synchronised PTO with the machine

at a standstill: disengage the main clutch by depressing

the disengaging pedal and engage the lever (1) in the

position "B".

Synchronised PTO engagement

The synchronised PTO must be engaged with the engine

at low idle, without forcing and with the tractor at stand-

still: drive the tractor a little forward for an easier engage-

ment. In some cases it may be required to engage the PTO

clutch for a few seconds to allow for teeth aligning and

make engagement easier. When the synchronised PTO

is not used, the lever is to be shifted to the independent

position (lever 1, position A ).

Synchronised PTO rpm

Whatever speed gear is engaged, the PTO splined shaft

spins, for each turn of the rear wheels:

IMPORTANT: If you are forced to reverse when using

the synchronised PTO, remember that the driveline

will be spinning in the opposite direction. Thus, with

certain implements, it is necessary to disengage the

PTO when reversing in order to avoid serious damage

(lever 1, position O).

with 2-speed PTO

9,800 rpm with Power take-off at 540 rpm

13,835 rpm with Power take-off at 540E rpm

18,407 rpm with Power take-off at 1000 rpm

with 4-speed PTO

9,800 rpm with Power take-off at 540 rpm

12,057 rpm with Power take-off at 540E rpm

18,078 rpm with Power take-off at 1000 rpm

22,242 rpm with Power take-off at 1000E rpm

5-26

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

External PTO controls

(Fig. 5-17)

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Danger of entanglement. Keep well

away from spinning shafts. Take care NOT to

remain caught up by the PTO driveline. Keep

all the guards mounted at any time on the

transmission shafts of the tractor or imple-

ments.

WARNING: High-inertia implements do not

become stationary immediately when PTO is

disengaged. Allow sufficient time for imple-

ment to “run down” to a halt before cleaning

or adjusting.

The external control are located both on the right and

left fenders.

The external controls may be used to start the PTO only

with stationary tractor.

The button (2) STOP stops the PTO regardless of the fact

that the PTO had been started by the cab control or by

the button (1) START.

The START button (1) starts the PTO in the following

modes:

- if the stationary function was enabled by pressing the

button (3) in the cab, the PTO shaft will start in “spin”

mode for 5”, then it will start permanently.

It is not required that the PTO is activated by means

of the mushroom button in the cab.

“Spin” function

- the “spin” function lets the PTO shaft rotate at a

reduced speed for maximum 5” in order to make

meshing with the rear implements easier. Each time

the button (1) is pressed, a slow turning of PTO shaft

is obtained.

NOTE: The PTO can be stopped either with the external

button (2) STOP or in the cab by moving the relative control

to the OFF position (see "Rear PTO engagement").

DANGER: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side out-

side the tractor and out of the overall width

of fenders or tyres. It is expressly forbidden

to operate the controls from the rear of the

tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.

DANGER: Danger for bystanders! Before us-

ing the outer switches of the power take-off

(PTO), make sure that there are no persons

or objects in the reach of the implement or

of the three-point linkage.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

DANGER: Never reach with arms, legs or any

part of your body in the area near the three-

point linkage or the implement when operat-

ing the outer switch. Never let another person

operate the other control group. Walk around

the tractor or the implement to go from a

control group the other. NEVER pass between

implement and tractor.

NEVER service the implement while the PTO

IS RUNNING, but shift the PTO into neutral,

turn off the engine and remove the key.

Fig.5-17

Operation

5-27

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.5-17a

Rear Auto PTO (if equipped)

By the Auto PTO feature the PTO can be automatically

started or turned off according to hitch position. The

positions of the hitch that activate (ON) or deactivate

(OFF) the PTO are already set at the factory. The operator

may change these positions according to the following

operations.

Auto PTO activation

NOTE: if an attempt is made to activate the PTO without

starting the engine first, the lamps in the PTO control but-

ton will flash.

NOTE: before enabling the Auto PTO function, it is re-

quired to save the ON and OFF positions that were chosen

accord to your work requirements. (see the following

description)

To activate the Auto PTO feature, proceed in the follow-

ing way:

1. turn on the engine

2. press the button (1)

3. activate the PTO by pressing the button (2) (PTO

mushroom button).

NOTE: the activation of the Auto PTO function is also

signalled by the AUTO indication on the display of the

instrument cluster.

CAUTION: when the auto PTO is activated

with the tractor at standstill, the PTO will be

engaged if the hitch is lowered up to the PTO

activation threshold as was set on the instru-

ment cluster! If the system detects no tractor's

movement

in 30 seconds, the PTO will be disengaged

and all lamps in the PTO controls will flash.

The auto PTO button must be turned off and

on again.

This limitation will not apply after the sys-

tem detects a movement of the tractor and

therefore the auto PTO was engaged. Until the

main PTO switch (1) is on, the PTO remains

engaged even if the tractor is stopped and the

hitch lowered beyond the activation threshold

of PTO engagement.

At this point the Auto PTO is activated and the PTO shaft

can:

a. Stop turning because the hitch is over the OFF position.

b. Go on turning because the hitch is under the ON posi-

tion.

Auto PTO deactivation

To deactivate the Auto PTO feature, proceed

in the following way:

1. move the button (2) (PTO mushroom button) to the

OFF position

2. press the button (2)

NOTE: the deactivation of the Auto PTO function is

signalled by the AUTO indication disappearing from the

display of the instrument cluster.

NOTE: When Auto PTO is being deactivated, the PTO will

go on running if it was already running (hitch beyond the

ON position).

NOTE: If the Auto PTO is being deactivated while the

PTO is not running (hitch beyond the OFF position), to start

manually the PTO it is necessary first to move the control

(2) to off, then pull and lock it in the ON position.

NOTE: For safety purposes, when at least one of the two

external controls of the rear hitch is pressed, the “Auto PTO”

function, if active, is automatically deactivated.

NOTE: If the Stationary function is activated, the Auto

PTO function will be automatically disabled by the system

Memorisation of the ON and OFF positions

To store the two hitch positions that either turn on or off

the PTO, see the procedure described in the section 4 of

this manual. The ON and OFF positions can only be stored

by means of the instrument cluster.

NOTE: The PTO OFF set-point should be set at the point

where the implement has just cleared the ground, when

raised by the hitch.

NOTE: The PTO ON set-point should be set at a position

which ensures that the PTO is ON and fully engaged before

the implement enters the ground.

NOTE: if the engagement/disengagement thresholds of

the Auto PTO are set at percentages greater than 90%, the

PTO could be activated/deactivated when the “antidump-

ing” function of the hitch is active. It is therefore advised

to choose these percentages accurately, according to your

work requirements. In transport mode, with antidumping

active, it is advised not to set thresholds greater than 90%.

5-28

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Selecting PTO speed

(Fig.5-18)

PTO speed can be selected by means of lever (1) in the

cab on the left of the driver's seat.

0- Power take-off in neutral

A- 540 rpm power take-off

B- 1000 rpm power take-off

WARNING: When the power take-off is not used, shift

the speed selector lever to neutral (lever 1, position O)

WARNING: Changes from one speed to the next

must be made after disengaging the PTO clutch: switch

(3) for hydraulic power take-off “OFF”.

CAUTION: Only use the 540 RPM (or 540ECO

rpm) PTO to control implements designed to

be operated at this speed rate. Use 1000 rpm

for implements designed to be operated at

1000 rpm. Never exceed a speed rate of the

PTO shaft of 630 rpm for implements designed

to be operated at 540 rpm

Economy Power take-off

(setup with 4-speed PTO)

The 540 or 1000 RPM rate can be obtained (for imple-

ments that do not require maximum engine power, e.g.:

fertiliser spreaders, mist blowers, etc.) by selecting

the 540ECO or 1000ECO RPM speed and lowering the

engine rate. The PTO economy mode has a number of

advantages, including a reduction in fuel consumption,

noise and vibrations.

PTO speed (normal - eco) can be selected by means of

lever (2) in the cab on the left of the driver's seat.

Shift the lever (2) to select the PTO mode:

• Down for Normal mode

• Up for Economy mode

IMPORTANT: Always disengage the PTO (if running)

before changing speed.

CAUTION: 540 ECO power take-off is obtained

at 1377 RPM. Never exceed a 1890 RPM engine

rated speed (corresponding to 630 RPM of the

PTO shaft) or the PTO shaft and the connected

implement could be seriously damaged or

persons seriously injured.

Fig.5-18

Operation

5-29

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Interchangeable PTO shaft.

Fig.5-19 - Replacing an interchangeable PTO shaft

1 - PTO shaft.

2 - Spring ring.

Different PTO output shafts are available:

• 1 3/8" (34.9 mm) diameter shaft with 21 splines for 1000

RPM PTO.

• 1 3/8" (34.9 mm) diameter shaft with 6 splines for 540

RPM PTO.

NOTE: before replacing the PTO output shaft, the speed

selection lever (1 Fig. 5-18) must be shifted to the neutral

position. Never force

the engagement of a new PTO shaft. The substitution must

be smooth and gradual.

To change the output shaft (1), first remove the snap ring

(2) using suitable pliers.

Remove the shaft. Thoroughly grease the new shaft and

install it. Make sure that it has been completely seated.

Fit the spring ring back in place and make sure that it is po-

sitioned correctly: replace it if it is damaged or deformed.

After the shaft has been assembled, select the correct

speed with the relative lever in the cab.

WARNING: Never use the 540 RPM shaft if the power

required by the implement is greater than 56 kW (75

HP). The damage caused to the shaft and to the con-

nected implement could be such as to injury bystand-

ers. Implements that require more than 56 kW (75 HP)

must only be attached to 1000 RPM PTO drivelines.

For North American markets

1000RPM PTO with 540RPM shaft, 6 splines.

1000 RPM PTO only allowed with 1000 RPM shaft, 21

splines.

PTO overspeed

If the maximum allowed speed rate of the PTO is ex-

ceeded, on the display an exclamation mark comes on

(Fig.5-19) and the present PTO speed indication flashes.

Reduce the engine rated speed to reduce the PTO speed.

NOTE: For further information, refer to the chapter "Instru-

ments" in Section 4 of this manual.

Overspeed

Rear PTO

Flash

Fig.5-19

PTO overspeed for NAO market

In the machines in NAO version, when the maximum

allowed engine RPM is exceeded, the instrument cluster

will show an exclamation point as soon as the values

below are reached:

540 and 540ECO, 630 rpm

1000 and 1000ECO, 1170 rpm

IMPORTANT: When using the PTO, to avoid damage to

the driveline, implement or injury to bystanders make sure

the implement input shaft rpm never exceeds the recom-

mended rpm for the implement. When using the 540 or

540E rpm PTO driveline, do not attach implements that

require more than 56 kW (75 hp) to operate. Implements

that require more than 56 kW (75 hp) should only be at-

tached to the 1000 or 1000E rpm PTO driveline.

5-30

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Precautions when using the PTO

PTO shafts and implements operated by means of

the PTO can be extremely dangerous. It is therefore

advisable to comply with the following important

instructions:

WARNING: if the guards were removed from

the PTO shaft, it is mandatory to install a

suitable cover and guard to protect bystand-

ers and connected implements.

Do not use the PTO without installing suitable

guards to protect the safety of operators.

DANGER: before connecting, adjusting or

working on implements operated by the

PTO, disengage the PTO, stop the engine

and remove the key from the dashboard.

Put it away in a safe place, not accessible to

children and not authorised persons. Engage

the parking brake. Do not work under raised

implements.

DANGER: Check to make sure that all imple-

ments operated by the PTO are fitted with the

correct protections, are in a good condition

and comply with the provisions established

by law.

DANGER: Before driving an implement

through the PTO, ALWAYS make sure that all

bystanders are well away from the tractor.

WARNING: Fix the drawbar in the central

position when using implements that are

driven by the PTO of the tractor.

WARNING: When using the PTO drive with

a stationary tractor, ALWAYS make sure that

the gears are in neutral and that the parking

brake is applied.

WARNING: Before starting up any PTO-driven

implement hitched to the three-point linkage,

lift the implement to its full height using posi-

tion control and check that at least 1/4th of the

total length of the telescopic section of the drive

shaft is engaged. Adjust the height limiter on the

electronic hitch control panel (if fitted) to limit

the maximum height of the stroke.

Note to the use in paddy fields

Use in paddy fields: When using the tractor in water-logged

soil or in paddy fields where the water level could rise

above the height of the PTO shaft, ask you Argo Tractors

Dealer for instructions on all necessary waterproofing and

sealing measures. If such measures are not taken, the

guarantee could be rendered invalid.

Fig.5-21 - PTO shaft guards

WARNING: 540 ECO power take-off is obtained

at 1377 RPM. Never exceed a 1890 RPM engine

rated speed (corresponding to 630 RPM of the

PTO shaft) or the PTO shaft and the connected

implement could be seriously damaged.

WARNING: Attach the implement to the drawbar

of the tractor before connecting the implement trans-

mission

to the power take-off. When connecting the implement

driveline to the tractor, check the driveline for correct

length, allowed slant and free telescopic movement.

The correct length is important to prevent the drive-

line from hitting bottom or from separating in any

tractor or implement operating position. An excessive

slant could damage also the power take-off guards.

Operation

5-31

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

The front power take-off has a 6 spline output shaft

which rotates at 1000 rpm (fixed gear). The engagement

is electro-hydraulic and is operated by the button (1). The

PTO shaft turns in one direction only, i.e. clockwise.

IMPORTANT: When using implements that cause shock

loads, always use a safety coupler between the implement

and the PTO drive shaft.

Before using the implement, check the correct operation

both of the safety coupler and of the implement.

IMPORTANT: When using implements with quickly

moving parts (such as mowers, reapers, snowploughs)

ALWAYS fit an overrun device on the implement drive

shaft, as a protection against possible PTO faults.

IMPORTANT: Ensure that the implement PTO shaft is

not too long or the PTO is not damaged when the front

mounted implement must be lifted fully up.

WARNING: Before connecting or using imple-

ments and trailers, ALWAYS read thoroughly

and follow the instructions of the operator's

manual provided by the manufacturer.

Front power take-off engagement

WARNING: if the guards were removed from

the PTO shaft, it is mandatory to install a suit-

able cover and guard to protect bystanders and

connected implements.

Do not use the PTO without installing suitable

guards to protect the safety of operators.

NOTE: Sit down in your seat: the PTO CANNOT be started

if you are not seated.

To engage the PTO, release the switch (1) by pushing the

orange switch lock (2) down and at the same time press

the switch down (ON).

The lamps in the control (1) and the front PTO icon on

the instrument cluster will light up (see chapter "Power

take-off menu" in section 4 of this manual for further

information on the indications).

The PTO shaft starts turning.

FRONT POWER TAKEOFF (if equipped)

IMPORTANT:PTO will not engage if engine is started

with the switch in the engage position. Move switch to

disengage and then engage.

IMPORTANT: Never try to release dead-locked imple-

ments by repeated clutch engagement and disengage-

ment. The front power take-off clutch will slip and become

damaged.

Proceed as follows to disengage the PTO:

STEP 1

Reduce the engine speed.

STEP 2

Push the bottom of the switch (1) down to the off position.

The indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will go out

when the front power take-off is disengaged.

STEP 3

When the engine is switched off the front power take-off

is automatically disengaged. The indicator lamp in the

switch will go out to indicate the front PTO is disengaged.

STEP 4

Always install the PTO shaft guard when the PTO is not

being used.

IMPORTANT:High-inertia implements do not become

stationary immediately when PTO is disengaged. Wait for

the implement to slow down and stop completely.

IMPORTANT: If the operator leaves his/her seat for longer

than 5 seconds, the controller will deactivate the PTO as

safety measure. In this case, to start the PTO again, first

push down the control (1) to the OFF position, then to the

ON position again.

NOTE: If the control (1) is in the ON position at engine

ignition, the lamp in the control (1) will start flashing to

5-32

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

indicate that the control (1) must be pushed down to the

OFF position.

In this condition, the engine will start normally, but the PTO

shaft will not operate.

Push down the control (1) to the OFF position: the indica-

tor lamp will go out.

To disengage the front PTO, push down the control (1)

to the OFF position.

Operation

5-33

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Hitch System

The front hitch is operated via the tractors remote hydrau-

lic valve circuit and is double acting (the linkage is hitched

and power lowered).

The hitch is designed for Category II implements.

The top link has a ball end.

Lift capacity:

– tractor in ride attitude ......................................2300 Kg

NOTE: the above mentioned lifting capacity refers to a

max. tractor ground speed of 40 kph and 2000 kg at the

rear hitch (610 mm, OECD position).

IMPORTANT: do not exceed the maximum permitted

front axle operating weight when using the front hitch, see

the Technical specifications section for more information.

Comply with tyre load capacities and any possible legal

limitations.

The front hitch links are controlled by the joystick (1) on

the right side of the cab.

The joystick (1) is matched with two auxiliary control

valves. If shifted forward, it controls the first valve, and

laterally the second one.

FRONT HITCH (if equipped)

Multi Valve

The valve is mounted in the front of the tractor, in lateral

position.

The multi valve has two operation modes.

NOTE: to move the levers, raise it slightly and select the

required position.

Valve Positions:

mode - Single acting

5-34

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

mode - Double acting

mode - Disengaged (Transport) - For system safety

during transport or travel on road.

IMPORTANT: the front hitch is operated using one of the

tractors remote valves. In order to use the rear couplers of

this valve the front hitch MUST be disengaged as shown.

Lower links

The lower links have three positions. When changing the

position of the lower links, support the links when remov-

ing the retaining pins.

Both lift links must be set in the same position.

Rigid Position

For operation with no vertical movement, install the retain-

ing pins in the rear hole.

Float position

For operation with vertical float, independently of each

other, install the retaining pins in the front hole.

Operation

5-35

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Link

When not being used, store the Top Link as shown above.

When operating on the public highway without equipment

attached, always store the top link correctly.

Front hydraulic quick couplers for

auxiliary control valves (if equipped)

NOTE: when driving on road, if the tractor has a front hitch,

raise the hitch links to the highest position (fully backwards)

and hold them in this position.

For specific information on specific prescriptions for your

country, ask your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Ballast the front hitch (if provided)

On request, a cement front ballast kit is available, to be

mounted on the front hitch.

For specific information on the front ballast kit, ask your

Argo Tractors Dealer.

CAUTION: use suitable lifting equipment when

handling the ballast.

CAUTION: when servicing work is required,

lower the front hitch to the ground and un-

hitch the implement. NEVER carry out servic-

ing work standing under the front hitch.

5-36

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Brakes

The front and rear brakes are the mechanically control-

led type with oil-cooled discs. Brake action is hydraulic,

controlled by pumps operated by the pedals.

CAUTION: all service operations on the trac-

tor’s braking system MUST BE carried out by

the specialized personnel of your authorized

Argo Tractors Dealer.

Main brakes

(Fig.5-22)

The main brakes are operated by means of two pedals

(1) one for each rear wheel. Braking with only one pedal

assists steering in tight manoeuvres. By locking the rear

wheel on the inside of a curve, you can virtually turn the

tractor around on its own axis. For simultaneous braking

during normal use and for on-road use, simply lock the

two pedals together with the special brake coupling (2).

This latter rule becomes very stringent if the tractor is also

provided with front brakes, as a device on the hydraulic

control circuit lets the front brakes be activated only if

both pedals are operated at the same time.

CAUTION: always keep the brake pedals

coupled for on-road driving to ensure simul-

taneous braking on all four wheels. Never

use the brakes independently when driving

on public roads.

CAUTION: If you ever notice the brakes

becoming less effective, identify the cause

immediately and repair. Always contact your

Argo Tractors Dealer. When working on slopes,

avoid using the brakes as much as possible

and select a lower gear in order to use engine

braking.

NOTE: If the brakes are operated with latched pedals, or

by means of the parking brake lever, the electronic man-

agement system will engage the four-wheel drive while

braking. At the end of the braking, the four-wheel drive

will disengage automatically.

Front brakes

Front brakes are operated only when both brake pedals

are used together. When driving on roads, both brake

pedals must be coupled by a latch.

Front brakes are not used when only one pedal of the

independent brakes is using during field work or turning

in tight places.

NOTE: always keep the brake pedals coupled for on-road

driving to ensure simultaneous braking on all four wheels.

Never use the brakes independently when driving on

public roads.

When working on slopes, avoid using the front brakes as

much as possible and select a lower gear in order to use

engine braking.

Fig.5-22 -(1) Brake pedals.

(2) Brake coupling.

Operation

5-37

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Parking brake

(Fig.5-23)

The parking brake can be engaged or disengaged by

means of the lever (1).

Parking brake engagement

- Fully depress the brake pedals.

- Pull the lever completely to operate the parking brake (1).

- Release the brake pedals and make sure that the tractor

is stopped.

- If this is not the case, pull the parking brake lever with

higher force, if necessary depressing the pedal brakes at

the same time.

When the parking brake is engaged, the warning lamp on

the instrument cluster will illuminate when the key switch

is turned to ON.

NOTE:The indicator light

in the instrument panel

lights up when the parking brake is engaged, independ-

ently of the force used for the engagement.

Before starting the tractor, release the parking brake.

Parking brake disengagement

– Fully depress the brake pedals.

– Pull the lever lightly (1), push down the button (2), let the

lever down and release the button.

IMPORTANT: Driving the tractor with the parking brake

partially engaged will cause damage to internal transmis-

sion components. Make sure brake is fully off.

NOTE: If the brakes are operated with latched pedals, or

by means of the parking brake lever, the electronic man-

agement system will engage the four-wheel drive while

braking. At the end of the braking, the four-wheel drive

will disengage automatically.

Fig.5-23

5-38

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Hydraulic trailer brakes (type for Italy

“Cuna”) -

(if equipped) [3.j]

Fig.5-24

NOTE: according to the laws in force in the country, the

configuration of trailer braking setup could be different.

Always abide by the laws in force in the country where the

tractor should be operated. Please refer to your authorised

Argo Tractors Dealer for more information.

NOTE: For driving on public roads, always conform to the

laws in force in your country.

The tractor braking system can be equipped with a hydrau-

lic valve (1) with tap which, if connected to the hydraulic

circuit of the trailer brakes, allows the trailer itself to be

braked along with the tractor.

Couple and uncouple the lines of the trailer hydraulic

brake from and to the hydraulic tap (2) on the rear of the

tractor. These operations must be carried out with the

utmost care. Your safety and that of others is concerned.

To operate the hydraulic trailer brakes, connect the hose

of the trailer brakes to the coupling behind the tractor and

couple the brake pedals with the latch.

When driving on public roads, the trailer brakes will thus

operate together to the tractor’s brake.

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

To connect the hydraulic system of the trailer:

− Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler and

push it into the coupler (2).

− Release the sleeve.

To disconnect the hydraulic system of the trailer:

− Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler, then

pull it toward yourself.

CAUTION: When the engine is on, it is abso-

lutely essential to engage the parking brake

to connect the tube that links the tube of the

trailer braking system to the quick coupling

(2).

There is a indicator light (3) on the instrument cluster

appositely for the operating conditions of the oil tap for

the trailer brake.

Indicator light off: the oil tap is not connected to the

trailer; oil pressure in the system is normal with con-

nected trailer.

Indicator light on: the engine is stopped and the igni-

tion key turned to the first position; the parking brake is

engaged and the engine is running.

CAUTION: If the indicator should come on in

different conditions, it would mean there is a

fault and it is therefore required that the sys-

tem is checked by your Argo Tractors Dealer.

NOTE: when the trailer brake coupler is not used, always

protect it with its dust guard.

Fig.5-24 - Oil tap for hydraulic trailer brakes.

1 - Valve unit

2 - Oil tap union

3 - Indicator light on the dashboard

Operation

5-39

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Hydraulically controlled trailer brake

(approved for CEE markets)

[3.j]

(if equipped)

Fig.5-25

NOTE: according to the laws in force in the country, the

configuration of trailer braking setup could be different.

Always abide by the laws in force in the country where the

tractor should be operated. Please refer to your authorised

Argo Tractors Dealer for more information.

NOTE: For driving on public roads, always conform to the

laws in force in your country.

The tractor braking system can be equipped with a hydrau-

lic valve (1) with tap which, if connected to the hydraulic

circuit of the trailer brakes, allows the trailer itself to be

braked along with the tractor.

Couple and uncouple the lines of the trailer hydraulic

brake from and to the hydraulic tap (2) on the rear of the

tractor. These operations must be carried out with the

utmost care. Your safety and that of others is concerned.

To operate the hydraulic trailer brakes, connect the hose

of the trailer brakes to the coupling behind the tractor and

couple the brake pedals with the latch.

When driving on public roads, the trailer brakes will thus

operate together to the tractor’s brake.

The trailer brake lines can be coupled and uncoupled while

the engine is running.

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

To connect the hydraulic system of the trailer:

− Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler and

push it into the coupler (2).

− Release the sleeve.

To disconnect the hydraulic system of the trailer:

− Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler, then

pull it toward yourself.

NOTE: when the trailer brake coupler is not used, always

protect it with its dust guard.

Fig.5-25 - Oil tap for hydraulic trailer brakes.

1 - Valve block with hydraulic tap

2 - Hydraulic tap

5-40

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Hydraulic trailer brake (according to

REGULATION (EU) n. 167/2013)

NOTE: according to the laws in force in the country of

destination, the trailer braking setup could be different.

Always abide by the laws in force in the country where the

tractor should be operated. Please refer to your authorised

Argo Tractors Dealer for more information.

NOTE: For driving on public roads, always conform to the

laws in force in your country.

In the rear part of the tractor, a “trailer brake” valve (1)

according to Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013 can be fitted.

To operate the hydraulic trailer brakes, connect the hoses

of the trailer brakes to both couplings (2) and (3) in the

valve behind the tractor.

Couple the brake pedals in the cab with the latch.

The trailer brakes will thus operate together with the

tractor's brakes.

NOTE: to connect the tubes that link the trailer braking

system to the quick couplings (2) and (3) with the engine

running, it is necessary to engage the parking brake.

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

WARNING: Always use the specific DPIs for the opera-

tion to be carried out.

If the trailer only complies with EEC specifications, the

linking tube of the trailer braking system can be connected

to the quick coupling (2).

There is a specific indicator light (4) on the instrument

cluster appositely for the operating conditions of the oil

tap for the trailer brake.

Indicator light off: the oil tap is not connected to the

trailer; oil pressure in the system is normal with con-

nected trailer.

Indicator light on: the engine is stopped and the igni-

tion key turned to the first position; the parking brake is

engaged and the engine is running.

CAUTION: If the indicator light should come

on in other conditions than those mentioned

above, this means that there is a fault and

that the breaking system must immediately

be checked for obvious safety reasons by your

Argo Tractors Dealer.

NOTE: when the trailer brake coupler is not used, always

protect it with its dust guard.

Operation

5-41

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Trailer air brakes [3.j]

(Fig. 5-25B)

1. Yellow coupling - brake service line (dual line system)

2. Red coupling - brake emergency line (dual line system)

3. Black coupling - feed and return (single line system)

- (optional)

WARNING: Connect the yellow service cou-

pling first.

WARNING: Take great care while splitting

the trailer from the couplings. The couplings

could be expelled with great force. Always use

specific personal safety devices.

WARNING: Make sure the system is at working

pressure before operating the brakes with a

trailer(s) fitted. Failure to do this can result

in injury or death.

WARNING: DO NOT park an unattended trac-

tor/trailer(s) combination using air pressure

to apply the brakes (Dual Line Pneumatic

Braking System). The mechanical park brake

on both the tractor and trailer(s) MUST be

applied.

NOTE: the coupling (1 - Fig. 5-25C) in the right side of the

reservoir can be used to inflate a tyre: if so then a regulator

and air pressure gauge MUST be fitted.

NOTE: The couplers on the tractor and trailer must be kept

perfectly clean to prevent dirt and dust from entering the

brake system.

Also refer to "Shock absorber function in the transport

position" as described in this section of the operator's

manual.

The air reservoirs store air under pressure to operate the

trailer brakes.

Maximum Permitted Pressure 8 bar

Working pressure

Dual Line System 8 bar

Single Line System ...........................5.0 bar (72.5 lb in2)

The indicator light

that comes on in the instru-

ment cluster and a warning sound (with the engine run-

ning) signal a problem in the air brake system of the trailer.

Refer immediately to your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer.

2 reservoirs (one each side)

Reservoir capacity (each) ..............................7.5 litres

Drain reservoirs ...........................................Periodical

The reservoirs are provided with a manual drain (2) of

condense water.

Fig. 5-25B

Fig. 5-25C

5-42

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

The reservoir must be bled at each programmed mainte-

nance interval of the tractor. To this purpose use the tab

(2) on the bottom of the reservoir.

Before any service operation on the air braking system,

air in the system MUST be discharged by means of the

discharge valves in the air reservoirs.

If the tyres are replaced, always take care that a suitable

space is left to the tubes and reservoirs of the air braking

system to avoid any malfunctions.

Fig. 5-25D

Operation

5-43

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Control position for parking brake

The button (1) to control the stationary position of the

tractor+trailer assembly is located in the console, on the

left side, near the storage space.

By the button (1) the operator can temporarily disable

the braking system only of the trailer, to make sure that

the braking system of the tractor is able to keep the

tractor+trailer assembly stationary.

To press the button (1), operate the safety lock (2) in this

button.

NOTE: this test must be carried out under the following

conditions:

- engine on

- main brakes not activated

- parking brake activated

WARNING: before carrying out this test and operat-

ing the button (1), make sure the are no persons and

hindrances in the surrounding area. The main priority

is always your own safety and that of other persons!

If the tractor+trailer assembly should move during this

test, the braking system of the tractor only is not able to

effectively brake the whole assembly. This could be due

to soil conditions (e.g. ice, gravel, etc.) or to a malfunction

of the braking system.

Before leaving the tractor, always make sure it is parked in

conditions of utmost safety, in such a way that it cannot

harm or damage any persons or objects nearby.

For any doubts, always refer to your authorized Argo

Tractors Dealer.

5-44

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Stationary

NOTE: To activate the Stationary function, the tractor must

be stationary and the operator correctly seated.

The Stationary feature lets the operator leave his/her seat

without disabling the following features:

− Front PTO (if equipped) and rear

− Front hitch (if equipped)

− Rear remote valves (Avc valves)

When the Stationary feature is activated, the operator

present sensor, contacting the seat, is disabled.

When the Stationary feature is activated, the outer buttons

on the rear fenders are enabled.

For the Stationary function:

1. Operator correctly seated in his/her seat

2. Stop the driving direction of the tractor

3. Hold the button (1) on the right side depressed for

about 2 seconds

The engagement of the Stationary function is signalled

to the operator by:

– a buzzer

– the display for about 5 seconds of the following pop-up:

When the Stationary feature is enabled, the PTO area in

the display is refreshed as follows:

When the Stationary feature is active, the cab can be left

without the features being switched off.

To disable this control, just seat yourself in the driver's seat

and press the button (1). The switch light will go out. The

icon

on the display is replaced by the tractor's icon.

NOTE: The Stationary feature is automatically disabled if

the tractor is driven at a higher speed than the speed set

in the factory for safety.

NOTE: The Stationary function is deactivated by turning

off the engine.

Operation

5-45

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Use of the differential lock

The tractor is equipped with a differential lock that latches

both rear wheels together.

The differential lock prevents wheels from slipping when

they are spinning at different speeds.

When the traction of one rear wheel decreases, or any

time more traction is needed, the differential lock should

be engaged.

Diff lock also helps keeping the tractor horizontal position

during the first field run, and also controlling implement

position.

The differential lock can be engaged manually or can be

set to engage automatically (if equipped).

CAUTION: Do not drive on roads, or at high

speed anywhere, with the differential lock

engaged. Difficult steering will occur, and can

result in an accident.

In field operation, use the differential lock for

traction improvement, but release for turning

at row ends.

NOTE: for better operation, the differential should be

locked before wheels are slipping too much. Do not

engage the lock while one of the wheels is actually slip-

ping. Always depress the clutch pedal before locking the

differential.

The differential must remain locked as long as the drive

wheels regain a uniform grip. Disengagement is achieved

by simply pressing one or both brake pedals.

CAUTION: disengage the diff lock when you

need to turn the tractor. Disengage the lock

when driving on a road.

Diff lock engagement/disengagement in

manual mode

To engage the diff lock by hand, proceed as follows:

1. Turn on the engine.

2. The brake pedals must be released

Press the switch (1) (short pressure) to the position (A).

The switch springs back to the central position (0).

The lamp (2) in the instrument cluster and the one in the

button itself will come on when the differential is engaged.

To disengage the differential lock, one of the fol-

lowing operations must be carried out:

• Press the switch (1) (short pressure) to the position (A).

The switch springs back to the central position (0).

• Key in OFF position (engine off).

• Fully depress one or both the brake pedals.

In all these cases, the lamp on the instrument cluster

will go off.

Fig. 5-26

5-46

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Diff lock engagement/disengagement in

automatic mode (if equipped)

To engage the differential automatically, proceed

as follows:

1. Turn on the engine.

2. Move the switch (1) to the position (B), thus enabling

the AUTO function. The switch will remain in the posi-

tion (B). The diff lock is not yet engaged.

The lamp (2) in the instrument cluster will light up as soon

as the differential is actually engaged by the electronic

management system. After this function is enabled, the

differential is automatically engaged by the system if the

following operation conditions of the tractor, relating to a

few values preset at the factory to ensure optimal opera-

tion in each moment, are met in the same time:

• Position of the hitch

• Tractor speed

• Released brake pedals (system not braked)

If even one of these conditions is not met, the differential

will not be engaged, but the AUTOMATIC mode will remain

engaged. The differential will be engaged as soon as all

the required conditions are met.

Differential lock engagement is signalled by the lamp (2)

on the instrument cluster.

To disengage the AUTO mode of the diff lock,

move the switch (1) to the central position of Neutral (0).

If the diff lock was already engaged, therefore the lamp

(2) in the instrument cluster was on, it will go out when

the switch is shifted to the Neutral position.

CAUTION: Steering is difficult when the dif-

ferential lock is engaged. This could cause an

accident.

During field operation, the diff lock may be

used to improve traction, but it will be re-

quired to disengage it any time you need to

steer to go back or to manoeuvre. Do not drive

on roads, or at high speed anywhere, with the

differential lock engaged.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

Fig. 5-26a

Operation

5-47

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 5-27A

Operating the four-wheel drive

The four-wheel drive (4WD) can be engaged while the

tractor is moving or stopped. The 4WD provides additional

traction and pulling power when engaged.

The switch (1) on the right-hand side, is used to engage/

disengage the four-wheel drive.

The 4WD engagement is indicated on the instrument

cluster by the lighting of a yellow indicator:

Both manoeuvres can be carried out when the tractor is on

the move, when driving on the straight and never on load.

NOTE: Front drive should only be engaged when strictly

necessary. If maximum is not required, specially on hard-

bottomed roads, it is advisable to disengage the front drive

to avoid unnecessary tyre wear.

4WD engagement/disengagement in

manual mode

To engage the 4WD by hand, proceed as follows:

1. Turn on the engine.

2. Move the switch (1) to the position (A)

The lamp (2) in the instrument cluster and the one in the

switch itself will come on when 4WD is engaged.

To disengage the 4WD, move the switch (1) to the

central position of Neutral (0).

The indicators in the instrument panel and in the switch

will go off.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT leave the 4WD engaged when

travelling faster than 16 Kph (10 mph) (except when in the

field), as this can cause damage to the 4WD and other

transmission components as well as premature tyre wear.

NOTE: the switch (1) is differentiated according whether

the AUTO mode for 4WD engagement is present.

The switch that is mounted in the setups with Auto 4WD

includes a specific decal with “Auto” on it.

5-48

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

4WD engagement/disengagement in au-

tomatic 4WD mode (if equipped)

To engage the 4WD automatically, proceed as fol-

lows:

1. Turn on the engine.

2. Move the switch (1) to the position (B), thus enabling

the AUTO function.

After this function is enabled, the 4WD is automatically

engaged by the system if the following operation condi-

tions of the tractor, relating to a few values preset at the

factory to ensure optimal operation in each moment, are

met in the same time:

• Position of the hitch

• Tractor speed

• Steering angle

If even one of these conditions is not met, the 4WD will

not be engaged, but the AUTOMATIC mode will remain

engaged. The 4WD will be engaged as soon as all the

required conditions are met.

4WD engagement is signalled by the lamp (2) on the

instrument cluster.

To disengage the AUTO mode in 4WD, move the

switch (1) to the central position of Neutral (0).

If the 4WD was already engaged, therefore the lamp (2)

in the instrument cluster was on, it will go out when the

switch is shifted to the Neutral position.

Automatic 4WD engagement at braking

The 4WD is engaged by the electronic management

system each time that:

• both brake pedals are operated together

• and/or the park brake is engaged

CAUTION: Danger! Danger of losing control.

The machines provided with the 4WD func-

tion, either engaged or not, must not exceed

50 Kph (31 mph) if allowed.

An excessive speed when towing a trailer or

driving downhill with a depressed clutch or

the transmission in neutral can cause loss

of control, personal injuries to the driver or

bystanders or mechanical problems.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

NOTE: front tyres must not be inflated to a higher pres-

sure than recommended. In theory, the pressure in the

rear tyres should be al least 0.4 bar (6 lbf/in 2) higher than

in the front tyres, provided the values recommended by

the tyre maker are not exceeded.

CAUTION: Risk of overturning! The 4WD func-

tion greatly increases the tractor draft. Pay

great care when driving on slopes.

The 4WD machines maintain the draft on

steeper slopes that the 2WD machines, thus

increasing the danger of overturning.

Failure to comply with these directions could

cause injuries or death.

NOTE: to avoid an excessive wear of tyres, it is advisable

to disengage 4WD whenever driving on roads or hard sur-

faces in general. Always mount front and rear tyres in the

prescribed combinations to ensure an acceptable wear.

Operation

5-49

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine set point (if equipped)

By the Engine Set Point function it is possible to set and

keep a constant engine RPM rate, regardless of load

variations.

When this function is active, also the RPM rate of the

independent rear PTO remains constant.

NOTE: This function lets not maintain a constant ground

speed (e.g. as with cruise control), but keeps a constant

engine RPM rate depending on the work load, while the

ground speed will depend on the range/gear ratio then

engaged.

The activation of the Engine Set Point function is con-

firmed by the display of the icon in the instrument

cluster:

To memorise the required RPM:

• Use the throttle pedal and/or the hand throttle to reach

the required RPM rate of the engine.

• Press the button (1) and hold for at least 3 seconds

(long pressure) to memorise the actual RPM rate. The

successful memorisation is confirmed by:

− the display of a pop-up that reports the memorised

engine RPM rate, the icon

that signals the

memorisation, and the icon

in the place or the

gear in the “Transmission” area of the display (see

chapter "Constant engine RPM rate" in section 4 of

this manual for further details on the screen masks

and indications).

NOTE: as soon as the engine rpm rate is saved as de-

scribed above, the function is already active.

Activation/deactivation of Engine Set Point

After memorising the engine RPM rate, the Engine Set

Point function can be activated or deactivated by a brief

pressure on the button (1).

If the engine is not stopped, the sequence of deactiva-

tion/activation of the Engine Set Point function does not

deletes the RPM rate previously memorised.

If the function is active - lamp lit in the button (1) - to

memorise a new engine RPM rate proceed as follows:

− Deactivate the function.

− Bring the engine RPM rate to the new required level.

− Press the button (1) and hold for at least 3 seconds

(long pressure) to memorise the new RPM rate.

NOTE: When the tractor engine is stopped (Key Off),

the value memorised in the Engine Set Point function is

deleted. The next time the tractor engine is started, the

required RPM rate must be memorised over again.

NOTE: When the Engine Set Point function is active, the

engine RPM rate can be increased using the throttle pedal

or the manual throttle.

If the function is kept active, the RPM rate cannot decrease

lower than the set value using the throttle pedal or the

manual throttle; to decrease, the Engine Set Point must

be deactivated with a brief pressure on the button (1).

Engine set point button (1):

• Longer pressure: memorisation of the set RPM rate

• short pressure: function activated/deactivated

5-50

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Use of the front suspension

A suspended front axle ensures a greater driving comfort

as it improves shock absorbers operation both on road

and on field terrain, and increases vehicle stability due to

better contact with road surface.

NOTE: Always turn the front axle suspension mode OFF

when operating the tractor on slopes.

With the button (1-Fig.5-27B) it is possible to select three

stiffness levels of the suspension and activate/deactivate

the locked suspension mode. The indicator light in the but-

ton (1-Fig.5 -27B) coming on indicates the selected mode:

• Soft - light on

• Mid - light on

• Hard - light on

• Locked - flashing light

A short pressure on the button will change through the

modes Soft-Mid-Hard.

A long pressure on the button will activate/deactivate the

locked suspension mode.

All information about the front axle suspension is dis-

played on the instrument cluster. (see the section 4 “In-

struments and Programming” in this manual).

It is also possible to access the instrument cluster menu

in the Manual mode.

Fig. 5-27B

Operation

5-51

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

HOW TO TRANSPORT THE TRACTOR

Towing the tractor [2.j]

WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a

trailed vehicle that is not equipped with

brakes NEVER EXCEEDS the weight of the trac-

tor that is towing the vehicle or any national

weight limitations which may apply. Stopping

distance increases with increasing speed as

the weight of the towed load increases, espe-

cially on slopes.

NOTE: Affix the slow moving vehicle card (SMV-Slow

Moving Vehicle) if required by your country.

NOTE: Use the revolving beacon and, the hazard lights,

if required by law in your Country.

NOTE: Strictly comply with the laws in force in the country

where the tractor is used.

NOTE: For the tow hooks fixed on the machine, see the

Towing Attachments chapter in this manual.

WARNING: Use only the appropriate tow hooks to

tow the tractor.

Due the complexity of the transmission and pressure

lubrication requirements, special rules apply when the

tractor engine is running or not running. Use the following

procedures as applicable.

A. Engine NOT running

If you need to tow or push the tractor for a brief distance,

remember that the power steering system will allow you

to drive and steer it for a short way with the engine off,

but with a greater draft.

WARNING: Slow down and stop the tractor with the

brake pedals latched together Tow or push the tractor

at moderate speed.

B. Engine running (at a idle speed of 1200 rpm)

The tractor may be towed for max. 10 Km at a max. speed

of 10 Kph.

If the tractor must be towed (Fig.5-28):

1. Reverse shuttle lever (1) in central neutral position

2. Gear shift lever (2) in neutral position

3. Range shift lever (3) in neutral position

4. Disengage the Park Lock (if equipped).

5. Release the parking brake (4).

6. Make sure that the electro-hydraulic PTO engagement

switch (5) is disengaged.

7. Make sure that the PTO engagement lever is disen-

gaged (6).

8. Make sure four wheel-drive (4WD) and the Differential

Lock are NOT engaged.

9. Use a rigid tow bar and safety chains to pull the trac-

tor. Attach the tow bar and safety chains to the front

support.

Check brake operation before starting to tow.

NOTE: for further information about how to tow the tractor

in complete safety, always ask your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Fig.5-28

5-52

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Limp home operation

Towing the tractor is not recommended, but if it should be

absolutely necessary, the procedure is different depending

on the fact that the engine is on or off, and that the low

pressure hydraulic circuit is operating or not operating.

Use the following procedures as applicable, at the fol-

lowing conditions:

CAUTION: To tow the tractor, connect firmly one of

the tow hooks and the towing vehicle by means of a

stiff drawbar. Different towing means are allowed, as

long as they are approved for this purpose and have

a size suitable for the weight of the vehicle plus even-

tual mounted implement. Never use ropes or other

elastic elements.

– In the middle of the linking means a red flag is to be

hanged so that it is visible to other drivers on the road.

– The towing vehicle must keep the revolving beacon op-

erating. The towed tractor must keep the flashing hazard

lights operating (turn indicators flashing contemporarily).

– Make sure that the brakes of the machine are operating.

– It is recommended that the machine is escorted by two

cars, one in front of it and one at the rear, at a distance

of 75÷150 m from the machine. These cars must carry

danger signals according to the rules and laws of the

country.

WARNING: Use only the appropriate tow hooks to tow

the tractor.

Towing the tractor with the engine off or low pres-

sure hydraulic circuit not operating.

WARNING: If the machine is towed with the

engine off (or with the low pressure hydraulic

circuit not operating), the brakes and steering

will not be power assisted if this depends on

the low pressure hydraulic circuit. The park-

ing brake must be disengaged.

– The machine can be towed for max. 10 Km at a max.

speed of 8 Kph.

WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a

trailed vehicle that is not equipped with

brakes NEVER EXCEEDS the weight of the trac-

tor that is towing the vehicle or any national

weight limitations which may apply. Stopping

distance increases with increasing speed as the

weight of the towed load increases, especially

on slopes.

Towing the tractor with the engine on or low pres-

sure hydraulic circuit operating

– Check that all controls are in neutral.

– Check that the parking brake is disengaged.

– Do not exceed a speed of 20 Kph when towing the tractor

and check that the rear differential lock is disengaged.

– Run the engine at 1200 RPM at least, if possible.

In the unlikely event of a major failure rendering the tractor

immobile, your dealer has provisions to provide a means

of moving the tractor. If the tractor is damaged and cannot

be moved, refer to you Argo Tractors Dealer.

Limp home mode is only a temporary device which will

allow you to get the tractor home or back to the Argo Trac-

tors Dealer and is NOT to be used as a means of continuing

tractor operation.

Operation

5-53

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Transport by truck or rail [2.y]

WARNING: The tractor can slip and fall from a trailer or ramp and cause serious injury or death. Make

sure the trailer or ramp is not slippery.

Remove all oil, grease, mud, ice etc. When moving the tractor take extra care, be vigilant, make sure the

tractor is in the centre of the trailer and does not overhang.

STEP 4

If equipped with front tie down brackets (as shown by the

figure) tie the front of the tractor down putting the safety

chains through the loop of each bracket rather than using

the front axle.

IMPORTANT:DO NOT use the tie down brackets (if

equipped) to lift or pull the tractor. The tie down brackets

are only to be used to secure the tractor to the trailer.

STEP 5

Install blocks/wedges to prevent the wheels rolling.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

When you transport the tractor by truck or rail, specific

rules or laws will be applicable depending in which country

you are in. Make sure you are familiar with these rules or

laws before transporting the tractor. All safety measures

and rules for this operation must be complied with.

STEP 1

Make sure the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,

as per correct procedure quoted on previous page.

STEP 2

Engage the parking BRAKE and the Park Lock (if equipped).

STEP 3

Secure the tractor to the trailer. Tie the tractor down

around the front and rear axles with safety chains having

a rating greater than the gross load of the tractor (refer

to tractor identification plate).

Before the transport, always make sure the tractor is fas-

tened to the trailer in a correct and efficient way.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT tie chains around the front ballast

weight support bracket to hold the tractor down.

NOTE: The trailer must be provided with the warning

signs and lights required by the local laws in force.

5-54

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

The tractor is equipped with a front tow hook, only for

emergency towing on road.

The tow hook can be inserted into the front ballast or the

front support.

The tractor may be towed on the field or on other terrain

only in an emergency, after suitably anchoring the tractor

for complete safety.

NOTE: the tractor may only be towed by the front hook

on road and for short tracts.

WARNING: do not tow the tractor on road as a trans-

port means.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

WARNING: do not tow the tractor at a speed exceeding

8 Kph (5 mph). Steering is slower and effort on the

steering wheel higher when the engine is not running.

WARNING: Do not use cables or ropes to tow the

tractor. Danger for bystanders! In case of breakage

or slippage, the cable or rope might backlash and hit

the operator with such a force as to cause injuries.

Tow equipment - Front pull hook [2.j]

Fig.5-31 - Front tow hook.

Operation

5-55

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Left/right offset position

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Remove the split pins (3) depending on the required side

(right or left) to which the bar should be moved and move

the bar accordingly. Install the retaining pin.

When using the offset positions raise the lower links to

full height. With the lower links in this position the hitch

will not interfere with the side movement of the swing-

ing drawbar.

The drawbar must not be offset in the fully forward posi-

tion.

The drawbar must be locked in the centre position when

doing any of the following operations:

A. Towing implements at transport speed (15 Kph (10

mph) or more) in the field.

B. Towing an implement or trailer on the highway at all

speeds.

C. Operating a drawbar pulled, PTO driven implement.

D. Moving the tractor in reverse with an implement at-

tached.

Fore/aft position

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Remove the fixing bolt (1) of the pin and draw out the

pin (2).

Slide the drawbar backward or forward to the required

drawbar position as indicated on the implement or in the

implement operator's manual.

When the correct position of the drawbar has been set,

fit the pin (2) and the retainer bolt (1) back again.

DRAWBAR

WARNING: Rear upset can result if pulling from wrong location on tractor. The three point hitch must

only be used with the implements designed for its use, not as a drawbar.

WARNING: Try to balance the load primarily on the implement wheels as in loading a machine with harvest

crops. Avoid overloading the drawbar. Add front end weights for improved stability. Engage the clutch

smoothly, avoid jerking and use the brakes cautiously to avoid jack- knifing.

In certain markets pulling trailers on public roads is not permitted unless a special approval note has

been supplied with the machine documents. Always make sure you have the relevant approval before

pulling trailers on public roads.

The drawbar can be set in various positions, see following pages for greater details on preparation and operation.

WARNING: Use exclusively the provided hooks to tow the machine.

WARNING: Refer to licensing documents issued by the Ministry of Transport to know data relating to max. verti-

cal and horizontal loads on tow hooks and max. trailer weights.

5-56

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Connecting an implement

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

STEP 1

Mechanical hitch

Set hitch controls in position control mode.

1. Position control lever

2. Draft control lever

Lift links control lever unit .

• Move the selector lever (2) fully back on the unit to the

position control mode.

• Move the control lever (1) to the max. height position

to raise the hitch to the max. height.

WARNING: For tractors equipped with Pick

Up Hitch (PUH). For the correct operation of

the PUH hitch/unhitch system on machines

provided with a mechanical hitch, the hitch/

unhitch operations must be carried out with

the hitch in position control.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

PICK UP HITCH

(if fitted, on request on certain markets)

NOTE: The following images are purely indicative and not comprehensive of all possible cases.

Electronic hitch

Turn the upper limit control knob (4) to the maximum

height setting (clockwise rotation).

- Raise the three-point linkage by turning the switch (1)

to Pos. C.

- Set the selector (6) to position control mode (Pos. 1) by

turning it in an anti-clockwise direction.

- Set the down-speed selector (2) to position (0) (lock) to

prevent any accidental lowering movement should the

controls be accidentally operated.

WARNING: if the control switch (1) is moved

to the links down position (A) and the work

height control knob (8) is moved, the arms can

be lowered. Set the lowering speed control (2)

to Pos. 0 (padlock) to prevent any accidental

movement.

Pick-Up Hitch - Automatic hitching

Purely indicative image, not comprehensive of all pos-

sible cases.

Operation

5-57

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 2

Raise the hitch to maximum height.

STEP 3

Release the locking latches.

Use the lever (1) in the rear of the cab on the right side

to release the stops.

CAUTION: Tow hook with automatic Pick Up

Hitch (PUH) - PUH hitching and unhitching

must necessarily be performed with the hitch

in position control to ensure the correct op-

eration of the coupling/uncoupling system.

STEP 4

Lower the automatic hitch.

STEP 5

The hook must be aligned under the implement towing

eye.

STEP 6

Raise the auto hitch until the hook is engaged in the im-

plement towing eye.

STEP 7

Raise the auto hitch to maximum height.

IMPORTANT: The gap between the tip of the hook and

the keeper plate must be less than about 8 mm. A larger

gap indicates the hook is not fully retracted.

STEP 8

Lower the hitch unto the locking device.

Engage the parking brake and check that the hook is

correctly locked. Before riding on roads, make sure that

the trailer and electric braking equipment is correctly con-

nected and operating.

5-58

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

IMPORTANT: the hitch must always be supported on

the locking latches.

If the locking latches do not lock, adjust the lift rods. If after

adjustment the locking latches still do not lock, see your

Argo Tractors Dealer.

IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents, make sure the hook

is fully retracted and the frame is correctly latched.

NOTE: after automatically hitching an implement, before

moving make sure again that the hooks are correctly tight-

ened, to avoid a sudden unhitching of the trailer during

travel on road.

Hook/clevis change over

(if fitted, on request on certain markets)

STEP 1

Lower the auto hitch half way.

IMPORTANT: after lowering the auto hitch, stop the

engine, and engage the parking brake before leaving

the tractor.

STEP 2

Extend the hook or fork bar to reach the centring pins (1).

Remove the hook/clevis locating pins (1).

Operation

5-59

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 3

Remove the hook or clevis. Install the hook or clevis in

the storage bracket located at the front of the tractor on

the left hand side.

Install the hook or clevis. Install the lock pins.

Retract the assembly and raise auto hitch until locked,

then lower onto latches.

NOTE: Make sure local regulations are followed when

towing implements or trailers. Specific speed limits are

prescribed when using drawbars or tie down brackets

on public roads. Moreover, the road circulation codes of

some countries prescribe that suitable brakes are installed

on vehicles that are towed on public roads.

Before circulation on public roads, be sure your tractor

complies with ALL the legal requirements.

5-60

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE TRAILER HITCHES (if equipped)

Adjustable trailer hitches can be adjusted up or down to match the implement hitch height and for PTO operation. These

hitches are equipped with either an automatic or a manual clevis.

Hitches with automatic clevis

This hitch connects automatically when the implement towing eye contacts the release mechanism inside the hitch coupling.

Hitches with automatic clevis

The operator must manually inset the hitch pin to secure the implement to the tractor.

NOTE: Make sure local regulations are followed when towing implements/trailers. Only use trailers with a towing eye

that matches the flat-head pin diameter that does not have excessive clearance. For further information, see Implement/

trailer drawbar dimensions chapter in this section of the manual.

IMPORTANT:Maximum vertical load capacity depends upon the capacity of the rear tyres fitted.

IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect all moving parts of the hitch from corrosion (including the inner slide rails),

by cleaning and greasing at regular intervals. All moving parts should be checked for free movement and correct operation.

Operation

5-61

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Automatic Clevis

(if equipped).

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

This hitch connects automatically when the implement

towing eye contacts the release mechanism (3) inside

the hitch coupling. Before connecting an implement make

sure the operating lever (2) is in the vertical position, as

shown.

NOTE: Before adjusting the drawbar height, be sure that

the partition (4) that protects the PTO is raised.

To raise the partition, unscrew both knobs (5).

To adjust the height, support the weight of the hitch cou-

pling assembly with one hand and with the other hand

pull the quick release lever (1) in anticlockwise direction.

Move the hitch coupling assembly to the required position.

Push the quick release lever (1) in clockwise direction to

lock the coupling assembly in position.

WARNING: DO NOT touch the inside of the

hitch coupling assembly when the release

mechanism is under tension, (operating le-

ver in the vertical position). Serious injury

can result.

IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins have fully en-

gaged in the holes in the side support (locking pins level

with the outer surface).

Before connecting an implement make sure the operating

lever (2) is in the vertical position.

The connecting pin engages automatically as the imple-

ment towing eye contacts the release mechanism inside

the hitch coupling or it can be engaged manually by strik-

ing the operating lever (2) downwards (away from the

tractor). Before moving the tractor make sure:

1. The operating lever (2) is in the horizontal position.

2. The connecting pin (3) is fully in the hole of the pin

guidance bushing (fully engaged). Do not tow or move

the tractor if the pin is not fully engaged.

NOTE: When the automatic hitch is not being used,

make sure the hitch connecting pin (3) is down and the

operating lever (2) is horizontal.

5-62

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Manual fork (if equipped).

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

NOTE: Before adjusting the drawbar height, be sure that

the partition (1) that protects the PTO is raised.

To raise the partition, unscrew both knobs (2).

Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.

To adjust the height, lift the release knob (3) and while

supporting the weight of the coupling assembly with the

other hand, raise or lower the assembly to the required

position.

Lower the release knob (3) to lock again the hitch coupler

assembly into position.

IMPORTANT: Check that the retaining pins have fully

engaged in the holes in the side support (retaining pins

level with the outer surface).

To connect an implement/trailer, remove the split pin (4 - if

present) and the hitch pin (5).

Enter the implement/trailer towing eye into the clevis,

install the hitch pin to secure the implement/trailer. Fit

the split pin back, if present.

Operation

5-63

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Piton- Fixe (if equipped)

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

To connect an implement/trailer, remove the split pin (1)

and lift the retaining hook (2).

Install the implement towing eye over the towing pin (3)

and lower the retaining hook (2).

Fit the split pin (1) back.

IMPORTANT: Maximum vertical load capacity depends

upon the capacity of the rear tyres fitted.

5-64

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Drawbar positions

NOTE: The images shown here are purely indicative, not comprehensive of all possible cases.

Towbar, type B1

Towbar, type GTB30 013 - GTB30032

Drawbar positions a b

Distance from the rear axle to the hitch pin centre Barra di traino (tipo B1)

845 mm 902 mm

1250 Kg 750 Kg

Maximum vertical load

Barra di traino (tipo GTB 30 013)

775 mm 897 mm

1600 Kg 1600 Kg

Towbar (type GTB 30 032)

775 mm 897 mm

1825 Kg 1825 Kg

Operation

5-65

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Max towable weights [3.m]

Drawbar

(kg)

Stiff drawbar

(kg)

Central axle

(kg)

Trailers without brakes 3500 3500 3500

Trailers with inertia brakes 8000 8000 8000

Trailers with hydraulic brakes 32000 32000 32000

Trailers with air braking 32000 32000 32800

Type (according

to appendix 1 to

Appendix XXXIV

to the Delegate

Regulation (EU)

2015/208 of the

Commission):

Make

: Type name

given by the

manufacturer:

EU authorization

mark or number:

Max.

allowed

vertical

load on

hitch point

(kg)

Towable

mass*

(t)

Hook position

Hook ref. in next tables

Height from

ground

Rear axle

overhang**

max

(mm)

min

(mm)

max

(mm)

min

(mm)

Piton fix CBM

GTP008

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00310*00

2500 25 586 536 586 L

GTP008D

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00587*00

Non-Swivel CBM X314 SL

e3*2015/208*2018/829

NS*00013*03

1500 6 1017 494 654 K

Non-Swivel CBM Y314 SL

e3*2015/208*2018/829

NS*00017*04

2000 14 1012 489 684 J

Non-Swivel CBM Z314 SL

e3*2015/208*2018/829

NS*00012*03

2500 20 1007 484 699 H

Drawbar CBM X003 BT/XX

e3*2015/208*2018/829

NS*00006*01

-- 6 543 493 897 G

Ball ø80 CBM

GTS80001

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00268*00

3000

25 891 458 636

GTS80001D

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00554*00

4000 F1

Manual CBM

GTF30 015

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00267*01

2000 25 995 472 662 E

GTF30 015D

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00544*00

Automatic CBM

GTF30 014

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00212*01

2000 25 995 472 666 D

GTF30 014D

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00542*00

Drawbar CBM

GTB30 013

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

NS*00315*01

1600 17

473 423

897

(a)

775

(b)

GTB30 032

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00547*00

1825 13 C1

Tow Hook

DROMONE

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00270*06

3000 25 495 445 598 B

Drawbar

DROMONE

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00269*05

750 (a)

1250 (b)

17 482 432

902

(a)

845

(b)

Non-Swivel CBM

X244 - 389SL

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00411*00

1500 12 1014 491 654 M

X244 - 389SLD

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00538*00

Non-Swivel CBM

Y244 - 389SL

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00409*00

2000 32 1012 489 684 N

Y244 - 389SLD

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00543*00

Non-Swivel CBM

Z244 - 389SL

e11*2015/208*2016/1788

ND*00325*00

3000 32 1007 484 699 O

Z244 - 389SLD

e1*2015/208*2018/829

ND*00545*00

* the values showN iN this table may vary accordiNg to the type oF the hitched trailer aNd to speciFic applicable provisioNs iN Force

iN the couNtry where the tractor is used.

** the values showN here are merely iNdicative.

5-66

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Maximum vertical load depending on tyres and hook type [3.k]

Set-up with wide axle (rigid and SuSpended) (Speed 40 kph)

Axle

N.*

Tyre size, includ-

ing the load

capacity index

and the speed

class symbol

Rolling

Radius

(mm)

Load class

for each

tyre [kg]

Maxi-

mum

allowed

weight

per axle

[kg]

Maxi-

mum

al-

lowed

weight

of the

vehicle

[kg]

Max. allowed vertical load on hitch

point [kg]

Tread

width

[mm]

K,M

E, D

J, N

L,H

A B C

B,F,

Minimum

Maximum

a-b a-b a-b

320/85-R24 112A8 550 1500 3000

7100

1640 2154

340/85 R38 113A8 750 2060 4120

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

340/85 R34 125A8 575 1650 3300

8100

1627 2167

420/85 R34 139A8 750 2430 4860

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/70-R24 125A8 575 1650 3300

8300

1627 2167

480/70-R34 143A8 750 2725 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/70-R24 125A8 575 1650 3300

8100

1627 2167

420/85-R34 139A8 750 2430 4860

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

440/65 R24 128A8 575 1800 3600

8500

1573 2199

540/65 R34 140A8 750 2500 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1316 2026

480/65 R24 133A8 600 2060 3800

8500

1573 2199

600/65 R34 151A8 775 3450 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1625 2026

480/65 R24 133A8 600 2060 3800

8500

1573 2199

540/65 R38 147A8 800 3075 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1316 2028

420/70-R24 130A8 600 1900 3800

8500

1627 2167

480/70 R38 145A8 800 2900 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/85-R24 131A8 600 1950 3800

8500

1627 2167

420/85 R38 141A8 800 2575 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

* 1 front axle, 2 rear axle

Set-up with SuSpended axle (Speed 50 kph)

Axle

N.*

Tyre size, includ-

ing the load

capacity index

and the speed

class symbol

Rolling

Radius

(mm)

Load class

for each

tyre [kg]

Maxi-

mum

allowed

weight

per axle

[kg]

Maxi-

mum

al-

lowed

weight

of the

vehicle

[kg]

Max. allowed vertical load on hitch

point [kg]

Tread

width

[mm]

E,D,

A C1

B,F,

Minimum

Maximum

a-b a-b

440/65 R24 128B 575 1800 3600

8500

1573 2199

540/65 R34 140B 750 2500 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1825 4000 3000

1316 2026

480/65 R24 133B 600 2060 3800

8500

1573 2199

600/65 R34 151B 775 3450 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1825 4000 3000

1626 2026

480/65 R24 133B 600 2060 3800

8500

1573 2199

540/65 R38 147B 800 3075 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1825 4000 3000

1316 2028

420/70-R24 130B 600 1900 3800

8500

1627 2167

480/70 R38 145B 800 2900 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/85-R24 128B 600 1950 3800

8500

1627 2167

420/85 R38 141B

800 2575 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

* 1 front axle, 2 rear axle

Operation

5-67

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Maximum allowed operating weights

CAUTION: comply with the max. load capacity of the automatic hitch and of the drawbar. Do not work

with loads greater than the maximum allowed ones. This could damage the automatic hitch and the rod.

It also reduces stability of the front part.

Maximum loads on axles also depend upon the capacity of the rear tyres fitted.

Ask your Dealer for further information.

Maximum vertical load depending on tyres and hook type [3.k]

Set-up with narrow axle (rigid, Speed 40 kph)

Axle

N.*

Tyre size, includ-

ing the load

capacity index

and the speed

class symbol

Rolling

Radius

(mm)

Load class

for each

tyre [kg]

Maxi-

mum

allowed

weight

per axle

[kg]

Maxi-

mum

al-

lowed

weight

of the

vehicle

[kg]

Max. allowed vertical load on hitch

point [kg]

Tread

width

[mm]

K,M

E, D

J, N

L,H

A C C1

B,F,

Minimum

Maximum

a-b a-b a-b

320/85-R24 122A8 550 1500 3000

7100

1440 1954

340/85 R38 133A8 750 2060 4120

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

340/85-R24 125A8 575 1650 3300

8000

1427 1967

420/85 R34 139A8 750 2430 4860

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/70-R24 125A8 575 1650 3300

8000

1427 1967

480/70-R34 143A8 750 2725 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/70-R24 125A8 575 1650 3300

8000

1427 1967

420/85-R34 139A8 750 2430 4860

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

440/65 R24 128A8 575 1800 3600

8000

1373 1999

540/65 R34 140A8 750 2500 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1316 2026

480/65 R24 133A8 600 2060 3800

8000

1373 1999

600/65 R34 151A8 775 3450 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1620 2026

480/65 R24 133A8 600 2060 3800

8000

1373 1999

540/65 R38 147A8 800 3075 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1316 2028

420/70-R24 130A8 600 1900 3800

8000

1427 1967

480/70 R38 145A8 800 2900 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

380/85-R24 131A8 600 1950 3800

8000

1427 1967

420/85 R38 141A8 800 2575 5000

1500 2000 2500 1250 1600 1825 4000 3000

1320 2020

* 1 front axle, 2 rear axle

5-68

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Maximum vertical load on the tow hook depending on tyres and hook type [3.k]

NOTE: the maximum vertical load on the tow hook must not be greater than the one stamped on the tow hook itself or than

the capacity of the rear tyres. The maximum applied weight must be the lowest one between the two available weights.

Calculation of the maximum allowed vertical load

on the tow hook according to the load index (LI)

The load index is usually stamped on the side of the tyre.

If no such index is given please refer to the load capacity

as indicated by the manufacturer of the tyre.

The load index is given along with the speed index (SI)

of the tyre.

Normally, the load capacity (in kgs) can be calculated by

means of the LI index using the table at the bottom of

the page.

As a general rule, a speed index SI = A8 allows for a

maximum speed of 40 kp/h (25 mph), while with a SI = B

allows for a maximum speed of 50 kp/h (31 mph).

With a different speed index from the above ones, abide

by the indication of the manufacturer of the tyre.

To calculate the maximum load that can be applied to the

tow hook, the following formula shall be used:

S =

max

- LGH) * a

a + b

where:

max

= the lesser value between the load capacity of

the tyre at the rear axle multiplied by 2 and the

maximum allowed load on the rear axle in kgs

LGH = mass in kg displaced to the ground via the rear

wheels (to be ascertained by weighing)

a = wheelbase: horizontal distance between the front

and rear axles

b = rear overhang: horizontal distance between the

centre of the real axle and the centre of the tow

hook

LI (Load Index)

Max. load

allowed (kg)

90 600

91 615

92 630

93 650

94 670

95 690

96 710

97 730

98 750

99 775

100 800

101 825

102 850

103 875

104 900

105 925

106 950

107 975

108 1000

109 1030

110 1060

111 1090

112 1120

113 1150

114 1180

115 1215

116 1250

117 1285

LI (Load Index)

Max. load

allowed (kg)

118 1320

119 1360

120 1400

121 1450

122 1500

123 1550

124 1600

125 1650

126 1700

127 1750

128 1800

129 1850

130 1900

131 1950

132 2000

133 2060

134 2120

135 2180

136 2240

137 2300

138 2360

139 2430

140 2500

141 2575

142 2650

143 2725

144 2800

145 2900

LI (Load Index)

Max. load

allowed (kg)

146 3000

147 3075

148 3150

149 3250

150 3350

151 3450

152 3550

153 3650

154 3750

155 3875

156 4000

157 4125

158 4250

159 4375

160 4500

161 4625

162 4750

163 4875

164 5000

165 5150

166 5300

167 5450

168 5600

169 5800

170 6000

171 6150

172 6300

173 6500

Example of a calculation

Let us suppose that:

• empty mass of the rear axle LGH = 1900 kg

• wheelbase a = 2200 mm

• overhang b = 700 mm

• mark on tyre = 135A8

• allowed load at rear axle = 3800 kg

Hmax = 3800 kg

–2180 kg * 2 = 4360 kg

–allowed load on rear axle = 3800 kg

S =

(3800 kg - 1900 kg) * 2200 mm

= 1441 kg

2200 mm + 700 mm

CAUTION: the load applied onto the tow

hook must not be greater than the maximum

capacity as specified by the manufacturer of

the tow hook.

In any case, the load displaced to the ground via the front

axle must to be equal to at least 20% of the total mass

of the tractor.

Operation

5-69

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Rear hitch (mechanical control)

(Fig. 5-32)

The two control levers enable the following operating

conditions.

– Position control

– Draft control

– Mixed position and draft control

– Floating position

Each of these modes must be chosen according to the

type of work in hand, the type of implement and the

consistency of the soil.

Position control (lever 1)

Move the draft control lever (2) fully down. Set the position

of the implement, either in or out of the soil, by moving

the lever (1) up to raise it or down to lower it. The degree

to which the implement is moved is proportional to the

degree to which the position control lever (1) is shifted.

Draft control (lever 2)

Move the position control lever (1) against the lower stop,

dig the implement down to the required depth in the soil

by gradually moving the lever (2) towards the lower stop.

The depth reached by the implement is proportional to

the traction required by the consistency of the soil. The

tractive force required from the tractor is automatically

kept constant in these conditions by the hitch. Lock the

lower stop in front of the lever (2) to bring it to the same

position each time round. Raise the implement at the

end of each furrow by using the position control lever (1)

only. At the end of the stroke of the draft control lever (2),

float mode is engaged and the hitch no longer controls

the traction force.

Mixed position and draft control mode

When draft control is used in varied soil conditions in

which the implement may be buried too deep into the

soil, use of combined position and draft control is rec-

ommended. Set the implement into the soil and find the

correct work depth as indicated in the section on draft

control. When the required depth has been reached,

gradually move the control lever (1) upwards until the

arms of the hitch begin to rise slightly. The hitch operates

in the draft control mode but meanwhile prevents the

implement from digging excessively into softer soil and

producing an uneven job. To raise and dig the implement

at the end and at the beginning of each furrow, use only

the position control lever (1).

Floating position (used with implements that

rest on the ground).

Bring the position control lever (1) down against the lower

stop. Bring the draft control lever (2) down to obtain the

float mode.

Fig.5-32 Control levers.

1. Position control

2. Draft control command

5-70

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Ergonomic Lift System - Buttons for

automatic raising and lowering of the

lifting links (if equipped)

Ergonomic Lift System

1. Automatic raising control

2. Automatic lowering control

To lower the implement, press the button (2) all the way

down. The lifting links will lower until they reach the limit

previously set by means of the control levers.

To raise the implement, pull the control back (1) as indi-

cated by the arrow in the figure to release the button (2)

from the stop. The lifting links will raise to the maximum

height.

CAUTION: when operating with mounted

implements that are connected to the PTO

and require the use of the automatic raise/

lower control, pay the utmost attention dur-

ing lifting so that any damage to the driveline

is avoided.

Operation

5-71

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Sensitivity adjustment

To achieve the maximum draft control, it is necessary to

obtain the maximum reaction sensitivity from the hitch.

The sensitivity is adjusted by rotating the knob (1) in the

cab, down at the right of the driver's seat.

This control must be adjusted for maximum sensitivity with-

out the implement being subjected to continuous jolting.

Sensitivity control knob

• Turn clockwise = to increase the sensitivity.

• Turn anti-clockwise = to reduce the sensitivity.

NOTE: to increase the sensitivity of the draft control, place

the top link in the lowest hole of the swinging support. Set

it in the top-most hole to obtain less sensitivity.

Down speed control

The drop speed of the hitch links is adjusted by rotating

the knob (2) in the cab, down at the right of the driver's

seat.

Drop speed control knob

• Turn clockwise to reduce lowering rate.

• Turn anti-clockwise to increase descent rate.

The knobs (1) and (2) are connected by cables to their ad-

justment levers on the hitch's control valve, under che cab.

levee (1), sensitivity control

lever (2), drop speed control

Fig.5-33b

Fig.5-33a

5-72

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

top link

To adjust the length of the top link (2), proceed in the

following way.

1. Move the adjustment handle (1) to the vertical position.

2. Turn the handle clockwise to shorten the link (2) or

counter-clockwise to lengthen the link.

Operation

5-95

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Auxiliary cylinders

The hydraulic hitch can be provided as standard with two

auxiliary cylinders directly supplied by the hitch valve.

The lifting capacity with auxiliary cylinders with a 65 mm

diameter is 6,000 kg (max. pressure 200 bar).

NOTE: Purely indicative image, not comprehensive of all

possible cases.

To install auxiliary cylinders and relative hydraulic connec-

tions, please refer to your Argo Tractors Dealer.

CAUTION: After stopping the tractor, always

lower implements connected to the three-

point linkage.

DANGER: Never work under an implement

that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,

but always secure it with a suitable support.

Engage the first gear, engage the parking

brake, turn the engine off and remove the

ignition key.

CAUTION: Always keep clear of the implement

operating area [3.b].

Do not stand between the tractor and the

three-point linkage when the hitch controls

are operated.

Always check that all persons are well clear of

the operating area and the surrounding areas.

5-96

Operation

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 6

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-2

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

For maximum tractor performance, always adjust the tyre

pressure within the minimum/maximum range, to conform

with the actual load on the tyres. Under normal conditions

use the minimum pressure rating for general drawbar

work. Use the higher pressure rating, up to the maximum,

for heavy three point hitch mounted equipment.

MAXIMUM INFLA-

TION PRESSURE

MINIMUM LOAD

EXAMPLE "B"

Example ‘A’ shows the cross section of a tyre inflated

for maximum load but with a minimum load on the tyre.

The tyre tread is not making full contact with the ground

which will give poor performance.

INFLATION

PRESSURE

ADJUSTED

TO TRACTOR

WEIGHT

EXAMPLE "A"

Example ‘B’ shows the cross section of a tyre with the

inflated pressure correctly adjusted to the load on the

tyre. The tyre tread is making full contact with the ground

which will give maximum performance.

Tyre pressure can also be adjusted as required to satisfy

the following requirements.

TYRE INFLATION SPECIFICATIONS

A. Severe service. Tyre pressure can be increased 38

kPa, 0.27 bar, (4 psi) more than the maximum pressure

shown in the charts, for tyres used in severe service. Se-

vere service includes the furrow tyre in regular ploughing

operations, and in hillside operations.

B. Tyres with liquid ballast. Inflate the tyres 14 kPa,

0.14 bar, (2 psi) more than the normal operating pressure

required for your operation. This will compensate for aera-

tion that occurs when the tyres are in motion.

WARNING: A tyre can explode during infla-

tion and cause serious injury or death. Never

increase air pressure beyond 241 kPa, 2.4 bar

to seat the bead on the rim. Replace a tyre if

it has a defect. Replace a wheel rim which has

cracks, wear or severe rust. Make sure that all

the air is removed from a tyre before removing

the tyre from the rim. Never use force on an

inflated or partially inflated tyre, make sure

the tyre is correctly seated before inflating.

Make sure the tyre is correctly positioned

before inflating. [2.t]

See Tyre and Wheel Service on page 169 for instructions

on safe tyre inflation procedure, recommended tyre main-

tenance and tyre/rim repair. See further in this section.

IMPORTANT: During transportation, by rail or road,

tractor tyres are inflated to higher than normal operating

pressures. Before using your tractor check the air pressure

in the tyres to make sure that the air pressures are correct.

6-4

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

TYRE PRESSURES, LOAD CAPACITIES AND SERVICE

Tyres can be marked in two ways, as shown in the examples below:

CROSSPLY STRUCTURE: Example

12.4-24 8PR

12.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches

- = Crossply structure

24 = Internal diameter

8PR = 8 ply rating

For correct tyre pressures/load capacities for CROSSPLY tyres see your dealer or tyre manufacturer.

RADIAL - Example

18.4R38

18.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches

R = Radial structure

38 = Internal diameter

142 = Load index number, 142 =2.650 kg (see

chart 1)

A8 = Speed code for 40 Kph, (see chart 2)

710/75R34

710 = Nominal tyre width in mm

75 = Nominal aspect ratio (ratio of sidewall height/sec-

tion width)

R = Radial structure

34 = Rim diameter at the bead seat in inches

168 = Load index number, 168 = 5,600 kg (see chart 1)

A8 = Speed code for 40 Kph, (see chart 2)

165 = Load index number, 165 = 5.150 kg (see chart 1)

B = Speed code for 50 kph, (see chart 2)

The performance of a radial tyre is determined by the load index and speed code which have replaced the ply rating

found on crossply tyres.

The maximum load which can be carried by a tyre is dependant upon the Load Index quoted on the tyre wall. Charts 1

and 2, on the following page, give a guide to the maximum load a tyre can carry and a percentage (%) variation depend-

ing upon the speed code or travel speed.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

IMPORTANT: The charts below are only a guide. Loads may vary slightly with makes of tyres. For correct loads see your

dealer or tyre manufacturer.

Chart 1 - Load index codes and loads per tyre

CONTENTS kg CONTENTS kg CONTENTS kg CONTENTS kg CONTENTS kg CONTENTS kg

90 600 105 925 120 1400 135 2180 150 3350 165 5150

91 615 106 950 121 1450 136 2240 151 3450 166 5300

92 630 107 975 122 1500 137 2300 152 3550 167 5450

93 650 108 1000 123 1550 138 2360 153 3650 168 5600

94 670 109 1030 124 1600 139 2430 154 3750 169 5800

95 690 110 1060 125 1650 140 2500 155 3875 170 6000

96 710 111 1090 126 1700 141 2575 156 4000 171 6150

97 730 112 1120 127 1750 142 2650 157 4125 172 6300

98 750 113 1150 128 1800 143 2725 158 4250 173 6500

99 775 114 1180 129 1850 144 2800 159 4375 174 6700

100 800 115 1215 130 1900 145 2900 160 4500 175 6900

101 825 116 1250 131 1950 146 3000 161 4625 176 7100

102 850 117 1285 132 2000 147 3075 162 4750 177 7300

103 875 118 1320 133 2060 148 3150 163 4875 178 7500

104 900 119 1360 134 2120 149 3250 164 5000 179 7750

Chart 2 - Speed codes

SPEED CODE kph

mph

% VARIATION FACTOR (*) OF VARIOUS SPEEDS

A2 10 6 + 67%

A3 15 9 + 50%

A4 20 12 + 39%

A5 25 15 + 28%

A6 30 19 + 11%

A7 35 22 + 4%

A8 40 25 0

B 50 31 - 9%

D 65 40

6-6

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyre inflation procedure

DO NOT inflate a tyre that has had a complete loss of air.

If the tyre has lost all air pressure, have a qualified tyre

mechanic service the tyre.

WARNING: A tyre must always be inflated

within a restraining device (tyre inflation

cage). [2.t]

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the op-

eration concerned.

Proceed as follows to inflate a tyre:

- Use a safety hose of suitable length, equipped with

air nozzle, double-valve gauge and graduated scale to

measure pressure.

Keep at a safe distance from the tyre and warn all by-

stander on the tyre side to keep away before inflating

the tyre.

- Inflate the tyre to the recommended air pressure. DO

NOT INFLATE THE TYRE MORE THAN THE RECOM-

MENDED PRESSURE.

Air pressure check

NOTE: Tractors are supplied by the manufacturer with tyres

inflated at higher pressures than recommended. The pres-

sure should be adjusted afterwards by the user according

to values given in the tables of tyre manufacturers and to

the anticipated use for the tractor.

Check the tyre inflation pressure every 50 hours of opera-

tion or once per week.

NOTE: For best tyre life check tyre pressures as regular

intervals. Too low a pressure causes early wear of the

tyre rubber wall. Too high a pressure causes higher tread

wear or damage.

Check the condition of the tyres and wheels for wear or

damage. Keep the tyres inflated to the recommended

pressures.

NOTE: Cross ply tyres can have the pressure reduced to

increase traction in field work.

NOTE: Never use radial ply tyres below 1.2 bar (17 psi).

It is not necessary to reduce the pressure in radial tyres to

get better traction in the field.

IMPORTANT: Before leaving the factory the tyre pres-

sures are increased. Check and adjust the pressures before

operating the tractor.

For tyres equipped with liquid ballast, check the air pres-

sure as follows:

STEP 1

Use an air-water gauge. The valve must be at the bottom

of the tyre to get an accurate reading.

STEP 2

Use a standard air gauge as follows:

A. The valve must be at the top of the tyre.

B. Measure the wheel diameter.

Add 0.04 bar (1/2 psi) for each 305 mm (12 inches) of rim

diameter to the standard gauge reading.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyre and wheel service

WARNING: Do not remove, install or make

repairs to tyres or rims. Take the tyre and

rim to a tyre specialist where persons with

special training and special safety tools are

available. If the tyre is not correctly positioned

on the rim, or if over inflated, the tyre bead

can loosen on one side and cause air to leak

at high force and can thrust the tyre in any

direction. Explosive separation of the tyre can

cause serious injury. [2.t]

WARNING: DO NOT weld to wheel or rim

when a tyre is installed. Welding will cause an

explosive air/gas mixture that will be ignited

with high temperatures. This can happen to

tyres inflated or deflated. Removing air or

breaking bead is not adequate. The tyre MUST

be completely removed from the rim prior to

welding. [2.t]

WARNING: Explosive separation of the tyre

and/or rim parts can cause injury or death.

When tyre service is necessary, have a quali-

fied tyre mechanic service the tyre. [2.t]

Always have a qualified tyre mechanic service the tyres

and wheels on this machine.

If the tyre has lost all air pressure, take the tyre and wheel

to a tyre specialist for service. The use of correct equip-

ment and correct service/repair procedures will prevent

accidents.

Tyre installation

To get the correct traction and cleaning action of the lugs,

the tyres must be installed on the wheels so the tread

pattern is turning as shown. DO NOT try to remove, repair

or install a tractor tyre on a wheel.

6-8

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Wheel removing procedure [2.k][2.t]

WARNING: If a wheel has to be removed (e.g.

to remove a punched tyre), this operation

must be carried out by a suitably equipped

workshop. If the suitable equipment or such

a workshop are not available, take the tractor

to a specialised workshop, where the tractor

will be lifted with an equipment suited to its

weight and dimensions.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

NOTE: before carrying out any operation that requires

lifting the tractor, refer to the safety prescriptions in the

section 2 of this manual, in particular to the specific para-

graph “Lifting points”.

Procedure

- Turn off the engine, engage the parking brake and the

first gear. Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).

- To remove a front wheel apply a jack lift of suitable ca-

pacity at the front axle next to the wheel to be removed

(Fig.6-1).

- To remove a rear wheel, use wooden wedges on the front

axle to block completely any tractor swing. Use a jack lift

of suitable capacity in the centre of the rear axle (Fig.6-2).

- Loosen the nuts (bolts) fastening the wheel of about one

turn by the provided wrench.

- Before lifting the tractor, check there are no persons

next to it and do not touch the tractor again until it is

not again lowered to the ground.

- Lift the tractor a few centimetres.

- Unscrew all nuts (bolts) that fasten the wheel and remove

the wheel

- Inflate the tyre if required. See the inflating procedure

in this chapter.

- Mount the wheel taking to exactly match the locating

pins. Screw the nuts (bolts) down again.

- Lower the tractor to the ground. Remove the jack and

fully tighten the nuts (bolts) alternating a nut (bolt) with

the opposite one.

- Take your tractor to the service workshop to tighten the

wheel nuts (bolts) to the prescribed torque.

NOTE: The following images are purely indicative and not

comprehensive of all possible cases.

Fig.6-1

Fig.6-2

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 1

Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park

brake and stop the engine.

STEP 2

Raise the front of the tractor so that both front wheels are

off the ground and the steering is free to turn through the

full range LEFT AND RIGHT.

STEP 3

Mark the inside front of the rims at the tyre/rim interface

and at the same height as the centre of the hub.

STEP 4

Measure the distance between the rim edges at the front

(dimension A in the diagram).

STEP 5

Rotate each wheel 180 degrees so that the marks are

at the rear, at the same height as the centre of the hub.

STEP 6

Measure the distance between the marks at the rear

(dimension B in the diagram).

STEP 7

Subtract the front dimension (A) from the rear dimension

(B), this is the toe -in measurement.

SETTING THE FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN

A = FRONT B = REAR

Adjustment

4WD ..................................................................... ±3 mm

– Adjust the length of each tie rod, by the same amount,

as required.

– Make sure the tyres do not contact the steering cylinder

when on full lock.

6-10

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

The steering stops are used to give the required steering

clearance between the front tyres and tractor frame.

The stops are located on the rear of each swivel housing.

The angles you can set the stops to depends upon:

- The size of the front tyres installed.

- The wheel tread width setting.

- If front fenders are installed.

- If the tractor is equipped with a front hitch.

IMPORTANT: NEVER operate the tractor without

the steering stops installed.

IMPORTANT: When installing a front loader check the

manufacturers recommendations for axle steering and

oscillation stops.

FRONT AXLE - STEERING STOPS

Adjusting the steering stops

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

STEP 1

Park the tractor on hard, level ground and apply the park

brake. Stop the engine and remove the key from the key

switch.

STEP 2

Loosen the lock nuts (1). Adjust the steering stop bolts (2)

in or out to achieve the correct steering angle.

WARNING: Before carrying out any servicing

on tractors equipped with Independent Front

Suspension make sure the key switch is in the

OFF position, the suspension ON/OFF switch

is in the OFF position and the axle is fully low-

ered to the bottom mechanical stop. Failure to

do this may result in serious injury.

IMPORTANT: After adjustment:

1. Raise the front of the tractor so the axle can be moved

into maximum oscillation.

2. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel to full lock

in both directions.

3. Check to make sure the tyres or fenders (if equipped)

DO NOT touch the tractor frame.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the op-

eration concerned.

WARNING: When servicing or making adjust-

ments to the tractor with one set of wheels

supported on a stand, NEVER attempt to ro-

tate the wheel either by hand or by starting

the engine. This could propel the tractor of

the stands. Either support all wheels off the

ground or disconnect the front axle drive

shaft. [2.t]

IMPORTANT: The steering stops on the axle must be

installed in the correct position for the tread width and

tyre size being used.

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions

for lifting in the Safety Notes section. [2.k][2.t]

WARNING: Maximum attention must be used

when dismounting the front or rear wheels:

because of their weight, a suitable hoist must

be used to remove and handle the wheels. [2.t]

IMPORTANT:After removing and fitting the wheels back

again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by

means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:

- First check after 10 work hours.

- Second check after 50 work hours.

- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

See the following pages for the driving torques of the front

and rear wheel bolts.

ADJUSTMENT OF TRACK WIDTHS

This tractor is manufactured with rear lamps which meet

all lighting regulations for travelling on the public road.

According to the law in force, when travelling on public

roads the distance between the outmost edge of the

tractor and the lens of the rear stop lights must be not

greater than 400 mm (dimension A).

If the track width is set on values greater than the factory

setting, it could be required that the rear lights are repo-

sitioned or that additional lights are installed to comply

with the law in force.

- Overall widths above 3000 mm (118 in) WILL REQUIRE

local authorization for use on the highway. An overall

width of 2550 mm to 2550÷3000 mm (8 to 10 feet)

MAY REQUIRE local authorization for use on the

highway, check before operation.

6-12

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

1A 1B

2A 2B

3A 3B

4A 4B

Table 6-1 - Front and rear track widths adjustment

Disk pointing inwards Disk pointing outwards

Key to the front and rear track width tables:

P: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B = Available assembly positions

Front interflange: 1887 mm.; Rear interflange: 1659.50 mm (setup with wide axle)

Front interflange: 1687 mm.; Rear interflange: 1640 mm (setup with narrow axle)

C.A: Front track; L.F.T.A.: Overall front width; L.I.A.: Internal front width

C.P: Rear track; L.F.T.P: Overall rear width; L.I.P.: Internal rear width

Rear track widths

Reference track widths indicated by boldface care.

All available tracks are shown here.

Front track widths

Reference track widths indicated by boldface care.

Front tracks should be selected according to alignment with rear wheels. Also check that there are no interferences

between wheels and tractor body when steering. Adjust the max. steering angle in case of interference.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyres (unit 719) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1986 2317 1656 1620 1977 1262

320/85 R24 (12.4 R24) 340/85 R38 (13.6 R38) 2A 1873 2204 1542 1420 1777 1062

Rims 3A 1753 2084 1422 1520 1877 1162

Front Rear 4A 1640 1970 1309 - - -

W10 x 24 DWW12 x 38 1B 1808 2138 1477 1720 2077 1362

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1921 2252 1590 1920 2277 1562

Front Rear 3B 2041 2372 1710 1820 2177 1462

331 358 4B 2154 2485 1824 2020 2377 1662

Tyres (unit 951) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1999 2357 1642 1620 2063 1176

340/85 R24 (13.6 R24) 420/85 R34 (16.9 R34) 2A 1886 2243 1529 - - -

Rims 3A 1740 2097 1383 1520 1963 1076

Front Rear 4A 1627 1984 1269 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 34 1B 1795 2152 1437 1720 2163 1276

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1908 2265 1551 1920 2363 1476

Front Rear 3B 2054 2411 1697 1820 2263 1376

357 443 4B 2167 2525 1810 2020 2463 1576

Tyres (unit 954) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1999 2394 1605 1620 2068 1171

380/85 R24 (14.9 R24) 420/85 R38 (16.9 R38) 2A 1886 2281 1491 - - -

Rims 3A 1740 2135 1345 1520 1968 1071

Front Rear 4A 1627 2021 1232 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 38 1B 1795 2189 1400 1720 2168 1271

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1908 2303 1513 1920 2368 1471

Front Rear 3B 2054 2449 1659 1820 2268 1371

395 448 4B 2167 2562 1773 2020 2468 1571

Tyres (unit 955) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1999 2386 1613 1620 2106 1133

380/70 R24 480/70 R34 2A 1886 2273 1499 - - -

Rims 3A 1740 2127 1353 1520 2006 1033

Front Rear 4A 1627 2013 1240 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 34 1B 1795 2181 1408 1720 2206 1233

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1908 2295 1521 1920 2406 1433

Front Rear 3B 2054 2441 1667 1820 2306 1333

387 487 4B 2167 2554 1781 2020 2506 1533

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and

find out which track widths are available.

SETUP WITH WIDE AXLE

6-14

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and

find out which track widths are available.

SETUP WITH WIDE AXLE

Tyres (unit 959) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1999 2428 1571 1620 2104 1135

420/70 R24 480/70 R38 2A 1886 2314 1458 - - -

Rims 3A 1740 2168 1312 1520 2004 1035

Front Rear 4A 1627 2055 1198 - - -

W13 x 24 DWW15L x 38 1B 1795 2223 1366 1720 2204 1235

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1908 2336 1480 1920 2404 1435

Front Rear 3B 2054 2482 1626 1820 2304 1335

428 484 4B 2167 2596 1739 2020 2504 1535

Tyres (unit 993) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1999 2386 1613 1620 2063 1176

380/70 R24 420/85 R34 (16.9 R34) 2A 1886 2273 1499 - - -

Rims 3A 1740 2127 1353 1520 1963 1076

Front Rear 4A 1627 2013 1240 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 34 1B 1795 2181 1408 1720 2163 1276

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1908 2295 1521 1920 2363 1476

Front Rear 3B 2054 2441 1667 1820 2263 1376

387 443 4B 2167 2554 1781 2020 2463 1576

Tyres (unit B30) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1899 2380 1418 1628 2153 1102

480/65 R24 540/65 R38 2A 1797 2278 1316 - - -

Rims 3A 1795 2276 1314 - - -

Front Rear 4A 1573 2054 1092 - - -

W14L x 24 DWW18L x 38 1B 1893 2374 1412 1716 2241 1190

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1995 2476 1514 1824 2349 1298

Front Rear 3B 2097 2578 1616 1920 2445 1394

481 525 4B 2199 2680 1718 2028 2553 1502

Tyres (unit B31) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1899 2342 1456 1626 2153 1098

440/65 R24 540/65 R34 2A 1797 2240 1354 - - -

Rims 3A 1795 2238 1352 - - -

Front Rear 4A 1573 2016 1130 - - -

W14L x 24 W18L x 34 1B 1893 2336 1450 1716 2243 1188

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1995 2438 1552 1822 2349 1294

Front Rear 3B 2097 2540 1654 1920 2447 1392

443 528 4B 2199 2642 1756 2026 2553 1498

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-15

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and

find out which track widths are available.

SETUP WITH NARROW AXLE

Tyres (unit 719) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1786 2117 1456 1600 1958 1242

320/85 R24 (12.4 R24) 340/85 R38 (13.6 R38) 2A 1673 2004 1342 1400 1758 1042

Rims 3A 1553 1884 1222 1500 1858 1142

Front Rear 4A 1440 1770 1109 - - -

W10 x 24 DWW12 x 38 1B 1608 1938 1277 1700 2058 1342

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1721 2052 1390 1900 2258 1542

Front Rear 3B 1841 2172 1510 1800 2158 1442

331 358 4B 1954 2285 1624 2000 2358 1642

Tyres (unit 951) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1799 2157 1442 1600 2043 1157

340/85 R24 (13.6 R24) 420/85 R34 (16.9 R34) 2A 1686 2043 1329 - - -

Rims 3A 1540 1897 1183 1500 1943 1057

Front Rear 4A 1427 1784 1069 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 34 1B 1595 1952 1237 1700 2143 1257

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1708 2065 1351 1900 2343 1457

Front Rear 3B 1854 2211 1497 1800 2243 1357

357 443 4B 1967 2325 1610 2000 2443 1557

Tyres (unit 954) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1799 2194 1405 1600 2048 1152

380/85 R24 (14.9 R24) 420/85 R38 (16.9 R38) 2A 1686 2081 1291 - - -

Rims 3A 1540 1935 1145 1500 1948 1052

Front Rear 4A 1427 1821 1032 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 38 1B 1595 1989 1200 1700 2148 1252

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1708 2103 1313 1900 2348 1452

Front Rear 3B 1854 2249 1459 1800 2248 1352

395 448 4B 1967 2362 1573 2000 2448 1552

Tyres (unit 955) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1799 2186 1413 1600 2087 1113

380/70 R24 480/70 R34 2A 1686 2073 1299 - - -

Rims 3A 1540 1927 1153 1500 1987 1013

Front Rear 4A 1427 1813 1040 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 34 1B 1595 1981 1208 1700 2187 1213

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1708 2095 1321 1900 2387 1413

Front Rear 3B 1854 2241 1467 1800 2287 1313

387 487 4B 1967 2354 1581 2000 2487 1513

6-16

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and

find out which track widths are available.

SETUP WITH NARROW AXLE

Tyres (unit 959) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1799 2228 1371 1600 2084 1116

420/70 R24 480/70 R38 2A 1686 2114 1258 - - -

Rims 3A 1540 1968 1112 1500 1984 1016

Front Rear 4A 1427 1855 998 - - -

W13 x 24 DWW15L x 38 1B 1595 2023 1166 1700 2184 1216

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1708 2136 1280 1900 2384 1416

Front Rear 3B 1854 2282 1426 1800 2284 1316

428 484 4B 1967 2396 1539 2000 2484 1516

Tyres (unit 993) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1799 2186 1413 1600 2043 1157

380/70 R24 420/85 R34 (16.9 R34) 2A 1686 2073 1299 - - -

Rims 3A 1540 1927 1153 1500 1943 1057

Front Rear 4A 1427 1813 1040 - - -

W12 x 24 DWW15L x 34 1B 1595 1981 1208 1700 2143 1257

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1708 2095 1321 1900 2343 1457

Front Rear 3B 1854 2241 1467 1800 2243 1357

387 443 4B 1967 2354 1581 2000 2443 1557

Tyres (unit B30) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1699 2180 1218 1608 2133 1083

480/65 R24 540/65 R38 2A 1597 2078 1116 - - -

Rims 3A 1595 2076 1114 - - -

Front Rear 4A 1373 1854 892 - - -

W14L x 24 DWW18L x 38 1B 1693 2174 1212 1696 2221 1171

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1795 2276 1314 1804 2329 1279

Front Rear 3B 1897 2378 1416 1900 2425 1375

481 525 4B 1999 2480 1518 2008 2533 1483

Tyres (unit B31) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1699 2142 1256 1606 2134 1078

440/65 R24 540/65 R34 2A 1597 2040 1154 - - -

Rims 3A 1595 2038 1152 - - -

Front Rear 4A 1373 1816 930 - - -

W14L x 24 W18L x 34 1B 1693 2136 1250 1696 2224 1168

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1795 2238 1352 1802 2330 1274

Front Rear 3B 1897 2340 1454 1900 2428 1372

443 528 4B 1999 2442 1556 2006 2534 1478

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-17

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

SET-UP WITH SUSPENDED AXLE

Tyres (unit B30) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A - - - 1628 2152 1103

480/65 R24 540/65 R38 2A - - - - - -

Rims 3A - - - - - -

Front Rear 4A - - - - - -

W15L [W14L - W16L] W16L [W18L] 1B 1893 2372 1414 1716 2240 1191

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1995 2474 1516 1824 2348 1299

Front Rear 3B 2097 2576 1618 1920 2444 1395

479 524 4B 2199 2678 1720 2028 2552 1503

Tyres (unit B32) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A - - - 1626 2224 1028

480/65 R24 600/65 R34 2A - - - - - -

Rims 3A - - - - - -

Front Rear 4A - - - - - -

W15L [W14L - W16L] DW20B [W18L] 1B 1893 2372 1414 1716 2314 1118

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1995 2474 1516 1822 2420 1224

Front Rear 3B 2097 2576 1618 1920 2518 1322

479 598 4B 2199 2678 1720 2026 2624 1428

Tyres (unit D87) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1899 2329 1469 1628 2113 1142

420/70 R24 480/70 R38 2A - - - 1520 2005 1034

Rims 3A - - - - - -

Front Rear 4A - - - - - -

W13 [DW14L - W12L - W14L]

W15L [W16L - W14L] 1B 1893 2323 1463 1716 2201 1230

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1995 2425 1565 1824 2309 1338

Front Rear 3B 2097 2527 1667 1920 2405 1434

430 485 4B 2199 2629 1769 2028 2513 1542

Tyres (unit D79) P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1899 2294 1504 1628 2076 1179

380/85 R24 (14.9 R24) 420/85 R38 (16.9 R38) 2A - - - 1520 1968 1071

Rims 3A - - - - - -

Front Rear 4A - - - - -

W12 [W13 - W11]

DW15L [W14L - W15L - DW14L]

1B 1893 2288 1498 1716 2164 1267

Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 1995 2390 1600 1824 2272 1375

Front Rear 3B 2097 2492 1702 1920 2368 1471

395 449 4B 2199 2594 1804 2028 2476 1579

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly

and find out which track widths are available.

6-18

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

FRONT AND REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back

again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by

means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:

- First check after 10 work hours.

- Second check after 50 work hours.

- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

NOTE: With some types of tyres, some track widths are

not available (see tables in the following pages).

Always check the air pressure of the tyres.

NOTE: The centre disc must fit flush against the rim lugs

when assembled.

Tighten the fixing nuts to the prescribed torque.

6 nuts for front wheels (M18x1.5) 435 Nm (+-5%)

8 nuts for rear wheels (M18x1.5) 435 Nm (+-5%)

NOTE: after each wheel track adjustment or wheel

replacement, torque their nuts or bolts at the above pre-

scribed values.

Fig.6-3

Fig.6-4

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-19

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyres

The following is a list of possible tyre types and front/rear combinations: Please refer to your Argo Tractors Dealer for

more information about tyre combinations.

NOTE: only in countries where a 50 kph speed is allowed, in case of non suspended axle, when driving on road it is advis-

able to reduce the tyre pressure for greater comfort. Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer for any information.

Front to rear tyre size combinations

WARNING: Use bolted rims only for speeds under 50 Kph.

NOTE: Some of the tyre combinations considered here as acceptable MIGHT not be suited to all tractor models. To know

the tyre combinations not listed here or for further information, see your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Front Rear Type of axle

Tyre Rim Tyre Rim Wide Narrow

440/65 R24 W13 - 24 WAFFLE 540/65 R34 DWW15x34 WAFFLE

• •

13.6 R24 W12 - 24 C.V. 16.9 R34 DWW 15 X 34 D. L.

• •

14.9 R24 W12 - 24 C.V. 16.9 R38 DWW15L - 38 D.L.

•

380/70 R24 W12 - 24 C.V. 480/70 R34 DWW15 X 34 D.L.

• •

420/70 R24 W13 - 24 480/70 R38 DWW15L - 38

•

12.4 R24 W10 - 24 C.V. 13.6 R38 DWW12 - 38 D.L.

• •

*380/70 R24 W12 - 24 C.V. 16.9 R38 DWW15L - 38 D.L.

• •

WHEEL COMBINATIONS ON TRACTOR WITH FRONT RIGID AXLE

FOR TRACTORS 36 AND 40 ECO KPH, NEVER 50 KPH

* tyre combination only available for Germany

** With narrow axle, the wheel rims must be mount in inverted position.

Front Rear Type of axle

Tyre Rim Tyre Rim Wide Narrow

480/65 R24 W14LX24 WAFFLE 540/65 R38 DWW18LX38 WAFFLE

•

480/65 R24 W14LX24 WAFFLE 600/65 R34 DWW18L x 34 WAFFLE

•

420/70 R24 W13 - 24 WAFFLE 480/70 R38 DWW15L - 38 WAFFLE

• •

14.9 R24 W13 - 24 WAFFLE 16.9 R38 DWW15L - 38 WAFFLE

• •

WHEEL COMBINATIONS ON TRACTOR WITH FRONT SUSPENDED AXLE

FOR 50 KPH TRACTORS

6-20

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

The front fenders provide greater safety and keep the trac-

tor cleaner, therefore improving operation and durability.

To provide the necessary clearance between the fender

and other tractor components, the fender mounting posi-

tion and the total amount of swivel must be adjusted for

the tread width and tyre size being used.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Vertical adjustment

Loosen the support brace mounting bolts (1) and slide

the support brace (2) up or down to the correct position.

Tighten the mounting bolts to a torque of about 50 Nm

(37 Ib ft).

NOTE: The distance between tyre and support brace must

be 50-100 mm (2 to 4 in).

FRONT FENDERS (if equipped)

Horizontal adjustment

Loosen the 2 fender bracket mounting bolts (3) on the end

of the mudguard bracket and slide the fender bracket left

or right until the fender is central over the tyre. Tighten

the mounting bolts.

Swivel limit adjustment (if equipped)

Loosen the nut (1) and adjust the retainer rod (2) to have

the right amount of fender rotation. Then tighten the lock

nut (1).

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-21

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Wheel cover stop:

1. End of travel stud

2. Adjuster screw

3. Check nut

Front fender end of travel

To prevent the front fender from colliding with the engine

at the maximum steering angle, the wheel cover rotation

can be stopped while leaving the kingpin free to turn up

to the steering angle.

Screw down the screw (2) onto the stud (1) before the

wheel cover collides with the engine.

6-22

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Loads matched to tractor

The life of the tractor will be increased by operating in the

highest possible gear without labouring the engine. Match

the implement to the tractor to get the best forward speed.

Operating at 8 Kph (5 mph) or above is best for long life of

main components. Too much ballast and excessive loads

decrease tyre life, wastes fuel and often reduces output.

• The best traction occurs when wheel slip is between

12 - 16%.

• Remove the ballast when not needed for lighter loads.

• Pull lighter loads at a faster speed to do more work and

increase efficiency. Do not overweight the tractor to

pull very heavy loads.

Operating a tractor with too much weight can cause:

A. A decrease in horsepower available at the implement

and then, a decrease in amount of field worked.

B. An increase in amount of fuel used.

C. A decrease in tyre life.

D. The soil to be compacted.

E. Too much force on the power train which will decrease

the life of the power train and cause high operating cost.

The most important item in field operations is the amount

of horsepower available at the hitch or drawbar. Power

needed to move a tractor that has too much weight will

decrease the power that is available to pull the implement.

TRACTOR BALLAST [3.h] [3.i]

Tractor weight distribution

The optimum static weight distribution for this size trac-

tor is:

4WD

% FORECARRIAGE % REARCARRIAGE

40% 60%

The weight distribution ratios are based upon the trac-

tor (including ballast) with mounted equipment in the

lowered position.

The correct static weight distribution and the correct

amount of wheel slip will give maximum tractive efficiency,

maximum productivity and extended service life for the

tractor components.

The amount and type of front and rear mounted equipment

being used will affect the weight distribution to the front

and rear tyres. Add or remove ballast as necessary, to

your fully equipped tractor, to achieve the recommended

static weight distribution.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum

allowed operating weight. See Maximum permitted

operating weights in the Technical specifications section

of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible

legal limitations.

IMPORTANT: Whatever the state of loading of the tractor,

the weight transmitted to the road by the wheels of the

front axle must not be less than 20 percent of the unladen

weight of the tractor.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-23

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Front end weights, rear wheel weights and liquid ballast

in the tyres can be used to ballast your tractor. Inadequate

traction and excessive wheel slip can waste up to thirty

percent of tractor horsepower.

IDEAL WHEEL SLIP 12÷16%

Do not try to reduce wheel slippage to zero. Stay within

the a 12÷16% slip.

If you add weight to the tractor to reduce wheel slip to less

than 12%, the added weight will consume more engine

power due to the increased rolling resistance caused by

the tyres sinking into the soil.

Add ballast weight only as necessary to maintain the

correct tractor weight distribution and the recommended

amount of wheel slip.

Wasted energy, increased fuel consumption, decreased

tyre life and loss of productivity are all principle ingredients

that can increase operating cost.

6-24

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Measuring Wheel Slip Without a True Ground

Speed Sensor

If your tractor is not equipped with a True Ground Speed

Sensor, measure the amount of wheel slip you will need

the assistance of a second person:

STEP 1

Put a reference mark on the side of the tractor rear tyre.

STEP 2

Operate the tractor with the implement IN THE GROUND.

STEP 3

While the tractor is moving put a marker on the ground,

outside the implement width, where the reference mark

on the tyre comes down to the ground.

STEP 4

Continue to walk along with the tractor and count ten

wheel revolutions. Put a second marker on the ground

outside the implement width, where the reference mark

on the tyre comes down to the ground for the TENTH time.

STEP 5

Lift the implement out of the ground. Put the tractor in

position with the rear tyre next to the first ground marker

and put a new reference mark on the rear tyre aligned

with the first ground marker.

STEP 6

Operate the tractor, with the implement RAISED, from

the first ground marker to the second ground marker.

Count the number of wheel revolutions between the two

ground markers.

STEP 7

Find the percent of slip as follows:

Revolutions of wheel

with implement raised. Slip (%)

9-1/2 ........................................................................... 5

9 ............................................................................... 10

8-1/2 ......................................................................... 15

8 ............................................................................... 20

7-1/2 ......................................................................... 25

7 ............................................................................... 30

NOTE: When you have too much ballast installed on the

tractor, you will see the clear shape of the tyre tread in

the ground which is an indication of no slippage. With too

little ballast, the tyre tread marks will not show because

of the tyre slippage.

1 - WITHOUT SLIPPAGE: TOO MUCH BALLAST

2 - SLIP: CORRECT BALLAST

3 - TOO MUCH SLIP: TOO LITTLE BALLAST

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-25

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Front ballast [3.i] (Fig. 6-5)

(if equipped)

Front end weights can be mounted on the front of the

tractor with a weight frame. The weights and their frames

can be purchased at your Argo Tractors Dealer's.

FRONT BALLAST

N.of weights

(single plates)

Weight of a single

plate (kg)

Total weight of

plates (kg)

6 36 216

10 36 360

Use front end weights as needed to provide effective

steering control and front end stability and to achieve

maximum operating efficiency and tractor field perform-

ance.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum

allowed operating weight. See Maximum permitted

operating weights in the Technical specifications section

of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible

legal limitations.

CAUTION: Due to the great weight of each

ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast

weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means

of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices

(safety gloves and shoes) when applying or

removing ballast.

Front Ballast Weights

NOTE: these images are only shown as an example. They

do not represent all possible cases.

Fig.6-5

6-26

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Assembly of front ballast [3.i]

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each

ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast

weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means

of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices

(safety gloves and shoes) when applying or

removing ballast.

STEP 1

Park the tractor on hard level ground. STOP the engine

and apply the park brake. Remove the key.

STEP 2

Hook one weight (1) over the top lip of the weight frame

(2) towards its outer edge. Slide the weight towards the

centre of the frame until it is against tab (A) on the weight

frame. The bottom of the weight will interlock behind the

tab at the centre of the weight frame.

STEP 3

Repeat STEP 2 and install the second weight onto the

opposite side.

STEP 4

Continue to install weights equally to each side until the

required weight pack is installed. The tab on each weight

will interlock into the previous installed weight.

IMPORTANT:The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum

allowed operating weight. Check tyre capacities and any

possible legal limitations.

STEP 5

Once the correct quantity of weight is installed, mount

both ends (a) and check they do match both outer weights.

STEP 6

Push the stud (5) into the holes of the ballast unit. Install

the washer (6) and nut (7) to the opposite end of the stud.

Tighten the nut.

STEP 7

A bracket is available that can be mounted on the front of

the weights with bolts. Before mounting a bracket (3), let

the fixing bas (8) through the front weights.

Assemble the washer (9) and the nut (10). Tighten the nut.

NOTE: The retainer must be positioned so as to hold the

flat headed bolts fixed.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-27

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Rear wheel weights [3.i]

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each

ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast

weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means

of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices

(safety gloves and shoes) when applying or

removing ballast.

The 60 kg weight for rear wheels are available at your

Argo Tractors Dealer's.

Use the wheel weights as needed to provide safe and

efficient tractor operation. Do not add more weight to the

rear wheels of your tractor than is needed to achieve the

correct tractor static weight distribution and the correct

amount of wheel slip.

A maximum of 2 weights per wheel can be used. The 2

weights can be installed on the outside of the wheels

as shown.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum

allowed operating weight. See Maximum permitted

operating weights in the Technical specifications section

of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible

legal limitations.

IMPORTANT:

- Do not ballast the tractor over its rated carrying weight.

- When using the tractor for light work, transport and on-

road towing, remove the ballast to avoid unnecessary

strain on the mechanical components.

- With semi-mounted and fully mounted implements

(which inevitably increase the load on the rear axle

of the tractor), ballast must only be used when strictly

necessary. There is no point in increasing grip beyond

the level necessary for efficient work as this will reduce

tyre life.

- Carefully check the tyre inflation pressure since this will

make the tyre last longer and ensure a more regular

wear.

- The softer the soil, the lower tyre inflation must be, while

the tyre should be inflated to a greater extent as the soil

becomes more compact.

On each wheel, one or two rings (60 kgs each) can be

mounted for a max. total of 4 rings on both wheels.

REAR WEIGHTS

N. of

weights on

each wheel

Total

number

ballast

Weight of a

single plate

(kg)

Total weight of

plates (kg)

2 4 45 180

See the following page for installation instructions.

Fig.6-6

6-28

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Installing rear wheel weights [3.i]

STEP 1

Park the tractor on hard level ground. STOP the engine

and apply the park brake. Remove the key.

STEP 2 - 1 WEIGHT KIT

Secure the first weight (1) to the rim (6) using three screws

(2) and three spacer bolts (3). Secure with three washers

(4) and nuts (5).

Weights/wheel 1 x SET 2 x SET

1. Ballast 1 2

2. Screw 3 3

3. Spacer 3 6

4. Washer 3 3

5. Nut 3 3

6. Wheel rim - -

STEP 3 - TWO WEIGHT KIT

Then secure the second weight using three spacers (3)

screwed on the spacers fixing the first weight. Secure

with three washers (4) and nuts (5).

NOTE: Torque all nuts to 200÷220 Nm

2 x set of weights 1 x set of weights

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each ballast, manual lifting of front

and rear ballast weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices (safety gloves and shoes)

when applying or removing ballast.

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

6-29

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tyre liquid ballast

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Ballasting with water and calcium chlo-

ride antifreeze solution can increase corrosion of the

components that come into contact with the mixture.

Use tyre liquid ballast as needed to provide safe and ef-

ficient tractor operation. See Tractor weight distribution in

the previous pages in this section for more recommenda-

tions. The chart shows the liquid weight each tyre will hold

when 75 percent filled (filled to valve level), with water or

calcium chloride and water solution.

Calcium chloride (CaCl

) keeps the water from freezing.

Water will start to freeze at 0°C.

When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14 bar (2 PSI)

more than the recommended pressure. This will compen-

sate for aeration that occurs when the tyre is in motion.

When dual wheels are installed, use liquid ballast in the

inside tyres only.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use liquid ballast while driving

on roads.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum

recommend operating weight. See Maximum permitted

operating weights in the Technical specifications section

of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible

legal limitations.

Liquid ballast for tyres, in litres and kilograms

Tyre Size

Water only Protection at -15 °C Protection at -35 °C Protection at -50 °C

Litres

water

Weight

Litres

water

CaCl

Total

weight

Litres

water

CaCl

Total

weight

Litres

water

CaCl

Total

weight

18.4R34 361 361 337 61 398 310 130 440 293 176 469

16.9R38 317 317 296 53 349 272 114 386 257 154 411

18.4R38 390 390 364 66 430 335 140 475 317 190 507

20.8R38 509 509 475 85 560 436 183 619 413 248 661

460/85R38 390 390 364 66 430 335 140 475 317 190 507

480/70R38 337 337 314 57 371 289 121 410 273 164 437

520/85R38 509 509 475 85 560 436 183 619 413 248 661

20.8R42 633 633 591 106 697 543 228 771 514 308 822

520/85R42 633 633 591 106 697 543 228 771 514 308 822

14.9R46 303 303 - - - 257 108 365 246 147 393

18.4R46 325 325 - - - 280 117 397 265 159 423

380/85R46 303 303 - - - 257 108 365 246 147 393

460/85R46 325 325 - - - 280 117 397 265 159 423

NOTE: For any tyres not listed in the above chart, refer to the tyre manufacturers specifications or alternatively see your

Argo Tractors Dealer.

NOTE:This table contains only indicative data. The operator should ballast wheels with water on the base of the tables

issued by the tyre manufacturer and according to the use anticipated for the tractor.

6-30

Tyres - Wheels - Ballasting

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Filling procedure

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

STEP 1 (Mixing the solution)

WARNING: When you prepare a solution of

calcium chloride to ballast the tyres, NEVER

EVER pour the water on to the calcium chlo-

ride since this could lead to a violent reaction.

This danger can be avoided by adding the

calcium chloride very slowly to the water and

stirring until it has completely dissolved.

Add the correct amount of calcium chloride (CaCl

) into

the correct amount of water. See previous charts for the

required degree of protection from freezing.

STEP 2

Raise one side of the tractor and turn the wheel so that

the valve is at the top, see illustration opposite.

STEP 3

Remove the valve core and connect the hand pump.

STEP 4

Measure the amount of solution added to the tyre and

use the figures in the previous charts to calculate the

weight added.

STEP 5

When sufficient weight has been added, remove the

pump. Install the valve core. Inflate the tyres to the cor-

rect pressure.

NOTE: When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14

bar (2 PSI) more than the recommended pressure. This

will compensate for aeration that occurs when the tyre

is in motion.

How to deflate the tyres

– Jack up the tyre to be drained and set it with its valve

pointing downwards.

– Unscrew the mobile union of the valve and allow the

water to drain from the tyre.

– Screw the required union on the valve seat.

– Introduce air at a pressure through the union (4).

– When all water is drained, remove the union and replace

it with the valve retainer, then inflate the tyre to the

prescribed pressure.

NOTE: Never use ballasting systems differing from the

ones indicated above.

WARNING: Ballasting with water and calcium chlo-

ride antifreeze solution can increase corrosion of the

components that come into contact with the mixture.

1. Air

2. Water entering tyre

3. Water supply

4. Air supply

5. Air vent

Maintenance

7-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 7

Maintenance

7-2

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

* according to which condition occurs first

Frequency*

Step N.

Maintenance operations

Every 10 hours

(or daily)

VARIABLE MAIN-

TENANCE

General tractor inspection

2 Check of fuel level in the tank

3 Check of level in the AdBlue™ reservoir or DEF

4 Check of engine oil level

5 Check of transmission oil level

6 Check of exhaust system tightness, with all post-treatment components

7 Check of coolant level in the expansion vessel

8 Check of water level in the windshield washer reservoir

9 Check and clean cab suspension (if equipped).

10 Clean and grease cab door locks and hinges

11 Cleaning of radiators and heat exchanger grilles (6)

12 Drain the fuel/water separator

15 Check of oil level in axle and front final drives

16 Check front PTO oil level (if equipped)

17 Check of the moving elements of the tow hook (if installed)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

20 Battery - Checking for function

29 Various checks - tyre pressures and torques

36 Check of Auto hitch locking latches & lift rod adjustment (if equipped, depending on market)

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.

WARNING: Service operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake

are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TABLE

NOTE: Use your own discretion and experience when deciding the actual intervals for variable interval service and main-

tenance operations. Always remember, however, that it is better to carry them out too often than not often enough. These

operations should be carried out daily.

NOTE: always also refer to the general indications in the "General maintenance" pages, at the end of this section.

Maintenance

7-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

* according to which condition occurs first

Frequency*

Step N.

Maintenance operations

First 50 work

hours

2 Check of fuel level in the tank

3 Check of level in the AdBlue™ reservoir or DEF

4 Check of engine oil level

5 Check of transmission oil level

6 Check of exhaust system tightness, with all post-treatment components

7 Check of coolant level in the expansion vessel

8 Check of water level in the windshield washer reservoir

9 Check and clean cab suspension (if equipped).

11 Cleaning of radiators and heat exchanger grilles (6)

13 Change fuel pre-filter cartridge (3)

14 Change fuel filter cartridge (3)

15 Check of oil level in axle and front final drives

16 Check front PTO oil level (if equipped)

17 Check of the moving elements of the tow hook (if installed)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

21 Check of fan, compressor and alternator belt.

22 Check brake controls - adjustments

23 Clean cab air filters (1)

24 Clean cab air recirculation filters (1)

48 Check of the ball joints of steering ram (rigid axle)

After the first

150 hours

25 Replace front axle differential and side final drives oil

26 General lubrication (repeat every 100 hours)

27 Grease the front axle (repeat every 100 hours)

30 Grease rear 3-point hitch ( repeat every 100 hours )

31 Grease front 3-point linkage (if equipped) ( repeat every 100 hours )

After the first

250 hours

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

7-4

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Frequency*

Step N.

Maintenance operations

At 500 hours

(or after 6

months)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

28 Replace transmission oil filter (on the intake) (2)

32 Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

34 Transmission oil replacement

35 Engine oil replacement (4)

42 Engine oil filter replacement

47 Replace AdBlue™ supply pump filter and cleaning filters

Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

At 1000 hours

(or after 12

months)

13 Change fuel pre-filter cartridge (3)

14 Change fuel filter cartridge (3)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

25 Replace front axle differential and side final drives oil

32 Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

35 Engine oil replacement (4)

37 Replace engine air filter

38 Clean fuel tank

39 Change cab air filters

Check of starter motor, alternator and compressor

41 Check function of the operator detector micro-switch

42 Engine oil filter replacement

44 Check of ribbed v-belt tensioning

Replace

AdBlue™

supply pump filter and cleaning filters

48 Check of the ball joints of steering ram (rigid axle)

49 Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

* according to which condition occurs first

Maintenance

7-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Frequency*

Step N.

Maintenance operations

At 1500 hours

(or after 18

months)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

28 Replace transmission oil filter (on the intake) (2)

Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

Transmission oil replacement

Engine oil replacement

(4)

42 Engine oil filter replacement

47 Replace AdBlue™supply pump filter and cleaning filters

Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

At 2000 hours

(or after 24

months)

13 Change fuel pre-filter cartridge (3)

Change fuel filter cartridge

(3)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

25 Replace front axle differential and side final drives oil

Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

35 Engine oil replacement (4)

37 Replace engine air filter

38 Clean fuel tank

39 Change cab air filters

40 Check of starter motor, alternator and compressor

41 Check function of the operator detector micro-switch

Engine oil filter replacement

43 Engine coolant change

44 Check of ribbed v-belt tensioning

47 Replace AdBlue™ supply pump filter and cleaning filters

Check of the ball joints of steering ram (rigid axle)

Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

* according to which condition occurs first

7-6

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Frequency*

Step N.

Maintenance operations

At 2500 hours

(or after 30

months)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

Replace transmission oil filter (on the intake)

(2)

Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit

(2)

Transmission oil replacement

Engine oil replacement

(4)

Engine oil filter replacement

Replace

AdBlue™

supply pump filter and cleaning filters

Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

At 3000 hours

(or after 36

months)

13 Change fuel pre-filter cartridge (3)

Change fuel filter cartridge

(3)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

25 Replace front axle differential and side final drives oil

Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

35 Engine oil replacement (4)

37 Replace engine air filter

38 Clean fuel tank

39 Change cab air filters

40 Check of starter motor, alternator and compressor

41 Check function of the operator detector micro-switch

Engine oil filter replacement

Check of ribbed v-belt tensioning

Replacement of the ribbed v-belt

Replacement of the A/C system filter, mounted into the condenser unit

(5)

Replace

AdBlue™

supply pump filter and cleaning filters

Check of the ball joints of steering ram (rigid axle)

49 Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

* according to which condition occurs first

Maintenance

7-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

NOTES:

(1) In very dusty work conditions, the filters have to be cleaned every day.

(2) The following operations for the transmission oil filters must be carried out not only at the prescribed intervals, but

also whenever the indicator lights on the instrument panel come on.

(3)

During running-in, the fuel filters must be replaced at 50 hours. Then replace at the intervals indicated by the table.

(4) The oil must be changed more frequently (e.g. every 250 hours) if the tractor is used in heavy duty conditions. In such

cases, also replace the engine oil filter each time. Every time the engine oil must be changed, we advise a forced

standstill with the old oil, and only afterward to change it as prescribed.

(5)

The dehydrator filter must be replaced every time the air conditioning system is serviced. In such occasions, check

the oil level in the compressor.

(6) In very dusty work conditions, the cab filters have to be thoroughly cleaned every day.

Frequency*

Step N.

Maintenance operations

At 3500 hours

(or after 42

months)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

28 Replace transmission oil filter (on the intake) (2)

Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

34 Transmission oil replacement

35 Engine oil replacement (4)

42 Engine oil filter replacement

Replace

AdBlue™

supply pump filter and cleaning filters

49 Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

At 4000 hours

(or after 48

months)

13 Change fuel pre-filter cartridge (3)

Change fuel filter cartridge

(3)

18 Check of drawbar bolt torques

19 Check the torque of the trailer hitch bolts (if equipped)

25 Replace front axle differential and side final drives oil

Replace front PTO oil (if equipped)

33 Replace oil filter on the delivery of the steering circuit (2)

35 Engine oil replacement (4)

37 Replace engine air filter

38 Clean fuel tank

39 Change cab air filters

40 Check of starter motor, alternator and compressor

Check function of the operator detector micro-switch

Engine oil filter replacement

43 Engine coolant change

44 Check of ribbed v-belt tensioning

Replace

AdBlue™

supply pump filter and cleaning filters

Check of the ball joints of steering ram (rigid axle)

49 Check the concentration of additive in the coolant

Lubrication of PTO shaft

* according to which condition occurs first

7-8

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

RECOMMENDATIONS BEFORE YOU

SERVICE [2.h] [2.n]

CAUTION: Before servicing, carefully read the

instructions in this section. There is a risk of

injury or death if servicing is not carried out or

if the following instructions are not followed

correctly. If you do not understand a service

or adjustment procedure see your dealer.

CAUTION: Do not carry out inspections, main-

tenance work or adjustments on the tractor

whilst the engine is running, except when

specifically requested. Wait for all moving

parts to come to a complete stop.

- If the maintenance operation must be car-

ried out while the engine is hot (e.g. when

changing engine oil), start the engine and let

it idle for the required time, then turn it off

before the maintenance operation.

- If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open

the bonnet". In this case beware the risk of

burning and shearing.

- Always use specific personal safety devices

for each service operation.

Before any adjustments are made carry out

the following:

1. Park the tractor on hard level ground and

apply the parking brake.

2. Stop the engine and remove the key.

3. Put blocks in front of and behind the front

and rear wheels.

4. DO NOT smoke or use an open flame during

the service procedure. Use eye protection

and suitable DPI.

WARNING: When handling lubricants (oil, grease etc.)

and other chemical products, always follow instruc-

tions for their proper use. Use proper containers to

collect fluid. Dispose of fluids and filters responsibly

and in accordance with the law. [2.ag]

- Read the safety decals and information decals on this

tractor. Read the operator's manual. Understand the

operation of the tractor before you start servicing.

- Use the correct safety clothing and safety equipment.

If you wear clothing that is too loose or do not use the

correct safety equipment for your job, you can be injured.

Always wear clothing that will not catch on objects.

Extra safety equipment that can be required includes hard

hat, safety shoes, ear protection, eye or face protection,

heavy gloves and reflector clothing.

- Establish where your nearest first aid kit and fire extin-

guisher are located. Undertake suitable training to make

sure you know how the fire extinguisher works.

- Put a warning tag, as shown below, on or near the key

switch before carrying out servicing or repairs to the

tractor. Warning tags (publication number 2-1000) are

available from your dealer.

Environment

NOTE: Always dispose of replaced parts or substances

(filters, oil, battery etc.) according to rules and laws. Refer

to the manufacturer's specifications on the Material Safety

Data Sheet.

- Before you service this machine and before you dispose

of the old fluids, lubricants and filters always consider

the environment.

- DO NOT pour oil or fluids in the ground, down drains or

into containers that can leak.

- Dispose of all old fluids, lubricants and filters in accord-

ance with local regulations.

- Check with your local environmental recycling centre or

your dealer for correct information.

Diesel engine catalytic converter

The catalytic converter for Diesel engines has a catalytic

surface that is able to transform the noxious substances

in the exhaust gases into harmless substances. Carbon

monoxide and unburnt hydrocarbon emissions are caused

to react with oxygen and thus turned into carbon dioxide

and water. Further, nitrogen monoxide is turned into ni-

trogen dioxide. Temperatures of >250°C are required for

high performances.

Plastic And Resin Parts

- Avoid using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner, etc., when

cleaning plastic, e.g. console, instrument cluster, moni-

tors and gauges etc.

- Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when you

clean these parts.

- Using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc., will cause crack-

ing or deformation of the part being cleaned.

Maintenance

7-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Lubrication and maintenance [2.ag]

Foreword

This section described the operations required to correctly

service your tractor and keep it in top condition. The Rou-

tine Maintenance Table serves as quick reference. Each

step is numbered for easier reference.

CAUTION: Park the tractor on flat ground and, if pos-

sible, extend all the cylinders before you check the

oil levels.

Safety Precautions

Read and comply with all the safety precautions in the

“Tractor maintenance” part of the Safety Notes Section.

NOTE: Always dispose of replaced parts or substances

(filters, oil, battery etc.) according to rules and laws. Refer

to the manufacturer's specifications on the Material Safety

Data Sheet.

Sealed units

Do not remove the seals from the following parts:

injection pump and overspeed screw. These seals must

not be removed at any time.

If you need to repair or adjust any of these units, contact

your Argo Tractors Dealer. The warranty is automati-

cally invalidated if these seals are tampered with.

Maintenance of front power take-off

(if equipped)

Periodically throughout the year, additional attention must

be made to the following:

- Check all bolts, screws and fixings etc. are tight.

- Check the PTO gearbox for any leaks. Operating the

Front PTO at low oil levels can cause damage to the

housing, incorrect operation of the PTO clutch and also

damage to the environment.

- Check the condition of the flexible rubber drive cou-

pling, mounted to the crankshaft pulley. Make sure the

coupling is installed correctly and is not brittle.

- Apply grease to the drive shaft spline.

- Every 5 or 10 operation hours, check in the whole power

take-off system that all bolts are perfectly tightened and

there are no leaks in the hydraulic system.

- After 450 hours work, check that all bolts are tightened

to the prescribed torques and there are no leaks in the

hydraulic system. Grease all points periodically with

all grease nipples. Use a universal high grade grease.

Check for any wear or breakage.

Precautions against contact with hot

surfaces

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: do not place any loads on coverings.

7-10

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Running in

Fade-free efficiency and a long working life largely depend

on how the new tractor is treated during the running in

period. It is therefore extremely important to follow these

instructions:

- Your engine does not require any special running in

when new. You can use it at full power from the start,

but you must never overload it. Avoid using the engine

at full power before it reaches an operating tempera-

ture of at least 60°C (140°F).

- Every time you start the engine from cold, let it run

slowly without load for a few minutes to warm up. This

is particularly important with turbo-charged engines.

- Avoid idling the engine for long periods.

- Regularly check for oil leaks.

- To ensure long clutch life, carefully run in the clutch

plates. To do this, operate the clutch frequently but

gradually during the first 15 hours' service (setup with

mechanical reverse shuttle).

After the first 50 hours

• During running-in, the fuel filters must be replaced at

50 hours. Then replace at the intervals shown by the

table.

• Hydraulic circuit: replace the filter on delivery (open

centre setup) or on the intake (closed centre setup).

Then replace the filters at the intervals indicated by

the table.

• Check clutch pedal travel.

• Check the brake pedal travel.

• Check all oil levels. If necessary, top up with oil of the

prescribed type if required.

• Check the tension of the fan belt.

• Grease all points with grease nipples.

• Check to make sure that all bolts, screws and nuts are

correctly torqued.

• Check the tyre pressures.

How to prevent pollution

To prevent pollution when oil, filters and so forth are

changed, always clean the zone around fill, level and

drain plugs, dipsticks and filters. Before connecting the

auxiliary cylinders, make sure that the oil they contain is

clean, that it has not deteriorated owing to long storage

and that it is of the prescribed type.

Servicing intervals

The intervals suggested in the lubrication and mainte-

nance table are indications to use when the tractor is

used in normal conditions.

These intervals must be adapted to the real environmen-

tal and operational conditions. Servicing must be more

frequent in adverse work conditions (in the presence of

humidity, mud, sand, very dusty environments).

WARNING: If carried out at the prescribed intervals,

the operations described in this section will ensure

that the tractor operates in a regular way. However,

remember to carry out the inspections and adjust-

ments (of variable frequency depending on the envi-

ronmental conditions and type of work carried out)

according to your discretion and experience.

Miscellaneous checks

Periodically check the following components. If faults are

discovered, contact your Argo Tractors Dealer's special-

ised personnel and have the damaged parts replaced if

necessary:

• Hydraulic hoses: the hoses must not be pinched or

cracked. The outer sheath must not be swollen in

any way and there must be no oil leaks between the

hoses and unions.

• Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking

mechanism is secure and reliable.

• Make sure that all nuts in the wheels are well tightened.

Use suitable instruments, such as a calibrated torque

wrench.

• Tightness of safety frame fixing pins.

• Make sure that all other nuts and bolts are well tightened.

• Make sure that the bolts on rear couplings are well

tightened.

Indicator lights

Your tractor is equipped with indicator lights that keep

you informed about the condition of your machine. Some

of these indicate faults, so act promptly if they come on.

Fuel injection pump

Only your Argo Tractors Dealer's specialised personnel

may be allowed to work on the injection pump during

the warranty period. Removal of the seals from the pump

will relieve the manufacturer from all and every liability in

relation to warranty coverage.

Keeping the environment clean

When you need to fill the fuel tank or change the lubricant

oil, never forget to position a vessel under the component

in question in order to collect any fuel or oil that spills

out. These products are polluting, so it is very important

to protect the environment in this way.

Engine cooling system

It is advisable to replace the fluid in the system at least

every two years even if you have not reached 1000 hours

service in total.

Radiator

To ensure that the cooling circuit operates in a perfect

way, it is important to prevent the radiator fins from be-

coming clogged.

NOTE: These fins must be cleaned often, even several

times a day if the place of work is particularly dusty.

Maintenance

7-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Lubrication [2.ag]

Before carrying out any maintenance operations on your

tractor, e.g. lubrication by means of greasing points,

always abide by the safety precautions here under pre-

scribed.

WARNING: Service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. [2.c] [2.ag]

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine

parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

Before lubricating any parts provided with grease nipples,

carefully clean the surfaces of the nipples and make sure

that their seal ball moves freely.

After the lubrication, remove any trace of grease to avoid

it to collect dirt or dust.

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

General tractor inspection

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

- Power steering cylinder hoses: the hoses must not be

pinched or cracked. The outer sheath must not be swol-

len in any way and there must be no oil leaks between

the hoses and unions. [2.i]

- Check for leaks, rubbing, squeezed or damaged hoses,

loose nuts or bolts and dirt build up. Repair all leaks,

hoses and tighten loose nuts/bolts before operation. [2.i]

- Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking

mechanism is secure and reliable.

- Check for loose nuts, bolts and components.

- Use a calibrated torque wrench to make sure that the

wheel nuts are correctly torqued.

- Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are

well tightened.

- Make sure that all shields and guards are in the correct

position.

- Check all wiring for damage. If damaged, contact your

authorised Argo Tractors Dealer for the genuine Argo

Tractors spare parts.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Service operations must be carried out

with the engine off. Check that the gear and the park-

ing brake are both engaged and that the ignition key

has been removed.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

7-12

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Lubricants and fuels [2.l]

CAUTION: Comply with the following instruc-

tions when working with diesel fuel.

Do not smoke near diesel fuel. In no case must

petrol (gasoline), alcohol or mixtures of diesel

fuel or alcohol be added to the diesel fuel as

such action would notably increase the risk of

fire outbreaks or explosions. In a closed ves-

sel, such as a can, they are even more explosive

than pure petrol (gasoline).

- Never use such mixtures. Moreover, mixtures

of diesel fuel and alcohol are not approved

since the lubrication of the fuel injection sys-

tem would be impaired.

- Clean around the plug where the fuel is

poured and keep it clean.

- Fill the tank at the end of the day to prevent

the building up of overnight condensation.

- Never remove the plug or fuel the tractor

whilst the engine is running. Keep control of

the pump nozzle whilst the tank is being filled.

- The tank must not be completely filled. - Al-

low space for an increase in volume. If the

original tank plug is lost, it must be replaced

with an original spare which must be fully

tightened.

- Dry up any fuel spill immediately.

Fuel requisites

It is important to use good quality fuel if the engine is to

be long-lasting and give a good performance. Fuel must be

clean, well refined and non-corrosive for the fuel system

components. Make sure that you use fuel of a known

quality and reliable origin.

Fuelling

Before you fuel the tractor, clean the zone around the fill

plug to prevent foreign matter from entering the tank. After

fuelling, screw on the plug and tighten it well.

CAUTION: Do not smoke while filling the

fuel tank.

Keep clear of any sort of flames.

Diesel fuel

WARNING: Only use a Diesel fuel with a low sulphur

content. Otherwise you could experience a reduction in

engine power and an increase in fuel consumption (Fig.

7-2b).

Fig.7-2b

Fig.7-2

NOTE: Never use galvanised containers to store fuel.

Fuel

For a good operation of the injection system, always use

a high grade diesel fuel.

Diesel fuel must contain no suspended impurity. Therefore

the fuel must be allowed to settle for two or three days

before being used in the tractor.

Fuel oil can be decanted with a cheap, but safe system,

as illustrated in (Fig.7-1).

Never use fuel that has been stored in an open container

for any amount of time, as it could be polluted by water

or dust.

The fuel tank must be filled in the evening at the end of the

day's work. This will avoid water condensation in the tank.

Plan your fuel purchases so that summer fuels are not

kept for too long and used in the winter.

Fig.7-1 Setting up a tank for fuel storage and decant-

ing.

a. 25% slant.

b. Condensation water.

c. Sludge drain plug.

Maintenance

7-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Engine oil specifications

Modern Diesel engines set very high requirements to

lubricants. Specific performances of engines increased

constantly in the last years, thus dictating a higher

thermal stress on oils. Further, following to reduced oil

consumption and higher replacement intervals, lubricants

are prone to a higher pollution. Therefore it is necessary

to follow the requirements set in this operation manual

and to respect its recommendations in order not to affect

engine duration.

Lubricants are always composed by a basic oil and addi-

tives. The main functions of a lubricant (protection from

wear and corrosion, neutralisation of acids produced by

combustion, prevention of coke and soot formation on

engine components) are carried out by these additives.

The characteristics of the basic oil are also a crucial index

of product quality, e.g. for what concerns thermal load.

Essentially, all engine oils that have the same specifica-

tions can be mixed with each other. It is better, however,

to avoid mixing oils, as the worst characteristics of the

mix will predominate.

Lubricants approved by Argo are accurately tested for

each engine type. Their additives are matched very care-

fully. Therefore, no other additives may be used for engine

lubricants.

The quality of a lubricant greatly affects engine duration,

performances and therefore economy. The following is

substantially true: the better the quality of the lubricant,

the better these characteristics will be.

The viscosity of a lubricant describes how it flows depend-

ing on temperature. The viscosity only slightly affects the

lubricant's quality.

Synthetic lubricants are the most used and offer specific

advantages. They are stabler against temperature and

oxidation, and their cold viscosity is relatively low. As a

few procedures are important to calculate the intervals

at which the lubricants should be replaced, and are es-

sentially dependent on the lubricant quality (e.g. pollution

by soot and other materials), this interval should not be

increased beyond the indications, even if synthetic lubri-

cants are used.

Biodegradable lubricants may be used on engines if they

meet the requirements of this manual.

Change intervals for lubricant oil

The intervals depend on:

– lubricant quality

– Fuel sulphur content

– Engine usage

• The change interval should be reduced by a half when

at least one of the following conditions is present:

– permanent ambient temperature below -10 °C (14 °F)

or lubricant temperature under 60 °C (84 °F).

– Sulphur content in Diesel fuel >0,5 on % in its mass.

• If such change intervals are not reached in a year, the

oil change should be carried out at any rate at least

once a year.

Viscosity

To select the right viscosity class, the ambient tempera-

ture in the installation seat or the environment where the

tractor is used is critical. An excessively high viscosity can

cause a difficult ignition, while an excessively low viscos-

ity can put the lubricant effect at risk and cause a high

consumption of lubricant. If ambient temperatures are

lower than -40 °C, the lubricant should be pre-heated (e.g.

if the vehicle or the work machine are sheltered in a barn).

Viscosity is classified according to SAE. As a matter of

principle, all-purpose lubricants should be used. In en-

closed and heated environment, where temperature is

over 5 °C, the use of univalent lubricants is also allowed.

NOTE: To select the required viscosity class, it is manda-

tory to comply with the lubricant quality as prescribed or

recommended by your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Depending on ambient temperature, the following usual

viscosity classes are recommended (Fig. 7-3):

7-14

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.7-3

Maintenance

7-15

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Approved fuels

In order to comply with the rules concerning emissions,

Diesel engines provided with an exhaust gases treatment

system may be operated only with a Diesel fuel free of

sulphur.

Both the operation safety and the duration of each system

of exhaust gases post-treatment are not guaranteed in

case of not compliance.

Exhaust gas post-treatment systems

DOC Diesel engine catalytic converter

Fuels with the following specifications are allowed:

• Diesel fuels

– EN 590

Sulphur < 10 mg/kg

– ASTM D 975 Grade 1-D S15

– ASTM D 975 Grade 2-D S15

Sulphur < 15 mg/kg

• Light fuel oils – EN 590 quality

Sulphur < 10 mg/kg

The warranty becomes null and void if fuels not meeting

this operation manual are used. Certification measure-

ments to comply with the law limits are carried out with

test fuels defined by law. Such fuels match the ones de-

scribed in this manual and refer to standards EN 590 and

ASTM D 975. For other fuels mentioned in this manual

the emission values cannot be guaranteed.

Use the fuels prescribed by law to comply with national

indications on emissions (e.g. sulphur content).

Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Winter operation with Diesel fuel

For winter operation, special requirements are required

for cold operation (limit filterability temperature). In winter,

suitable fuels are available at service stations.

CAUTION: In Common-Rail DCR® DEUTZ

injection engines no addition with petrol or

other additives is allowed to guarantee fuel

fluidity.

At low ambient temperatures the fuel system could be-

come clogged by paraffin precipitations, that could cause

malfunctions. When outside temperatures drop under 0

°C (up to -20 °C) a winter fuel must be used, available at

service stations since the beginning of the winter season.

• In regions with an Arctic climate, with temperatures up

to -44 °C, special Diesel fuels should be used.

NOTE: For information concerning the use of suitable

fuels depending on climatic conditions of operation, refer

to your Argo Tractors Dealer.

AdBlue™ or DEF

WARNING: Only use a good quality AdBlue™ or DEF

fluid (for quantity of AdBlue™ or DEF fluid, refer to the

guidelines of DIN 70070).

The use of a poor quality AdBlue™ or DEF fluid could cause

severe engine malfunction.

7-16

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

In general

WARNING: Never operate the engine without

coolant, not even for a short time!

In water cooled engines, the coolant must be prepared

and checked to avoid damages to the engine due to:

• corrosion

• cavitation

• freezing

• overheating

Quality of the water

For coolant fluid treatment, the correct water quality is

crucial. Essentially, clean water must be used that com-

plies with the following analysis values:

Analytic values min max ASTM

pH value 6.5 8.5 D 1293

Chlorine (Cl)

[mg/l] - 100 D 512

D 4327

Sulphate (SO

) [mg/l] - 100 D 516

Total hardness

(CaCO

)

[mmol/l] 3.56 D 1126

[mg/l] 356

[°dGH] 20.0 -

[°e] 25.0

[°fH] 35.6

Data on water quality are supplied by local public utilities.

In case of variances from analysis values, water should

be treated.

• pH too low

Add diluted caustic soda or caustic potash. A few test

mixes should be carried out.

• Total hardness too high:

mix with softened water (neutral pH condensation or

water softened by means of ion exchangers).

• Too high values of chlorides or sulfates:

mix with softened water (neutral pH condensation or

water softened by means of ion exchangers).

Protective agent for the cooling sys-

tem

DANGER: Whenever nitrite-based protective

agents for the cooling system should be mixed

with amine-based products, nitrosamines are

formed that are dangerous for the health!

NOTE: Protective agents for the cooling system must be

disposed of with respect for the environment. Comply with

the safety data sheet indications.

Coolant treatment for liquid cooled compact engines is

carried out by mixing an antifreeze liquid with ethylene

glicol based corrosion inhibitors and water.

This protective agent for the cooling system contains no

nitrites, amines or phosphates and perfectly suits the

materials of our engines.

If this protective agent is not readily available, please refer

to your Argo Tractors Dealer.

The cooling system must be checked at regular intervals.

Besides checking the coolant level, such checks also

include the concentration of the cooling system protec-

tive agent.

Percentage of

protective agent

for the cooling

system

Water percent-

age

Protection from

cold up to

min. 35 % 65 % -22 °C

40 % 60 % -28 °C

45 % 55 % -35 °C

max. 50 % 50 % -41 °C

In case of temperatures below -41 °C, refer to your Argo

Tractors Dealer.

Use of other protective agents (e.g. chemical anti-corro-

sion agents) is only allowed in exceptional cases. Refer

to your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Maintenance

7-17

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AdBlue

™

(urea solution AUS 32)

NOTE: The urea solution AUS 32 is known in the US and

North America with the name Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).

CAUTION: always wear protective gloves and

goggles while using AdBlue

™

Do not ingest. Ensure a good ventilation.

Ensure a proper cleaning. AdBlue

™

rests mus

be disposed of according to rules.

Comply with the safety data sheet indications.

AdBlue™ is a 32.5% urea solution in water, of high pure-

ness level, used as a NOX reduction agent in the SCR

post-treatment of exhaust gases in Diesel engines.

The product denomination is AdBlue™ or AUS 32 (AUS:

from the English name Aqueous Urea Solution) and it

complies with the DIN 70070, ISO 22241-1 or ATSTM D

7821 rules.

Storage conditions may affect the good quality of Ad-

Blue™ in time.

It crystallizes at -11 °C and sparks off a hydrolisis reaction

at +35 °C, that is it slowly decomposes in ammonia and

carbon dioxide.

Direct sun radiation on containers without any protections

must be absolutely avoided.

The containers must non be stocked for longer than a year!

Protect the used materials and of the AdBlue™ contain-

ers in stock.

AdBlue™ freezes up at an ambient temperature of -11 °C.

When ambient temperature is below -11 °C it is required

a pre-heating of the selective catalytic reduction system.

The AdBlue™ reservoir may only be filled up with Ad-

Blue™. Filling up with different liquids can damage the

system.

In this case, the dosing pump will require replacement.

AdBlue™ should remain in the reservoir for no longer

than 4 months.

Keep a note of this.

In case of a long idle period, drain all AdBlue™ from the

reservoir and clean it.

Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

7-18

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Exhaust gas post-treatment system

Fig.7-4 - Purely indicative image, not comprehensive of all possible cases

Example:

1. Coolant tubed

For AdBlue™ reservoir pre-heating

2. AdBlue™ reservoir

3. Electromagnetic valve

4. Engine controller

5. AdBlue™ supply pump

6. Catalyzer of the selective catalytic reduction (SCR)

7. NOx sensor

8. Meter

9. Pressure transducer

10. Pressure transmitter

11. Diesel engine catalytic converter

12. Coolant tubed

To cool the meter

13. AdBlue™ tubes

Maintenance

7-19

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Selective catalytic reduction

(Selective Catalytic Reduction)

After complete shut-off (even of the inertial functions) and

provided the following requirements are complied with,

the SCR system may be left idle for 4 months maximum.

• In case of a long idle period, the tractor or the engine

must be sheltered, e.g in a garage or a barn.

• Fill up the AdBlue™ reservoir completely. The water

contained in AdBlue™ must not evaporate.

• Do not disconnect electrical or hydraulic couplings.

• Max. storing duration at -40 °C to 40 °C, 2 months.

• Max. storing duration at -40 °C to 25 °C, 4 months.

If the above mentioned idle period of 4 months is ex-

ceeded, proceed as follows:

• AdBlue™

– Drain the reservoir.

– Fill up the reservoir with fresh AdBlue™.

– Replace the filtering element in the supply pump.

• Heat the engine up to the operation temperature and

load it up to pressure increase and to AdBlue™ meter-

ing.

If an error is detected:

• Stop the engine.

Wait for the inertial period of EDC (Electronic Diesel

Control).

• If required, carry out this procedure repeatedly.

If the problem still is not solved, ask your authorised

Argo Tractors Dealer.

7-20

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Filling with AdBlue™ or DEF

(Fig. 7-5a)

WARNING: avoid any contacts with your eyes, skin

or garments.

• If ingested. If a great amount of the fluid is ingested,

seek immediately medical help. DO NOT induce vom-

iting it not expressly indicated by medical personnel.

Do not administer liquids to an unconscious person.

• In case of contact with your skin, wash with plenty of

water and remove the contaminated garments..

• In case of contact with your eyes, wash immediately

with plenty of water. In case of rash, seek medical help.

• If gases should be inhaled, go immediately in the open

air and seek medical help, if necessary.

• Avoid any contacts of AdBlue™ or DEF with other

chemicals.

• Do not drain AdBlue™ or DEF spills into the sewers.

Fig.7-5a

AdBlue™ filling up

CAUTION: Only fill up when the engine at a

standstill.

Only fill up with AdBlue™!

Any other fluid (e.g. diesel fuel), though in a

small quantity, will damage the system.

If a different fluid was introduced, e.g. diesel

fuel, and it reached the system, the whole

AdBlue™ injections system must be replaced!

If the fluid (e.g. diesel fuel) did not reach the

tubes or the supply pump or metering module,

it will enough to drain and carefully clean the

AdBlue™ reservoir.

Ensure a proper cleaning.

Maintenance

7-21

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fuel tank filling [4.1.l]

(Fig. 7-5b)

WARNING: before filling fuel, always turn off the

engine.

CAUTION: Never smoke while refuelling. Keep

away from naked flames.

Fig.7-5b

7-22

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Master Disconnect Switch [2.aa]

Use the master switch (1) to disconnect supply of the

battery to the electrical systems of the tractor when dis-

mounting. IT IS OBLIGATORY to disconnect the battery

during maintenance.

Remove the key from the ignition block to prevent unau-

thorized use or accidents.

IMPORTANT: Do not use the master disconnect switch

(1) to STOP the engine, or the machine controllers will be

damaged. The engine would not stop anyway. For safety,

the battery is not disconnected when the engine is running.

Even if not actually required, it is advisable to insulate the

machine electric system at the end of each work day by

means of the master disconnect switch. This operation

increases safety and prolongs battery life.

NOTE: The master disconnect switch must be used for any

operation on the electric system. It is at any rate OBLIGA-

TORY to disconnect the battery completely if welding is

carried out on the machine.

IMPORTANT: In case of fire, immediately detach the

cable from the positive terminal or, if equipped, operate

the master disconnect switch.

The master disconnect switch disconnects the battery

from the tractor electric system.

The master disconnect switch (1) can only be activated

with the ignition key in the OFF position.

CAUTION: Before any maintenance opera-

tions, always disconnect the battery by means

of the master disconnect switch and remove

the terminals from the battery. [2.l]

If the tractor is not used for a long time, it is

advisable to disconnect the battery.

WARNING: When the engine is running, the battery

cannot be disconnected by means of the master dis-

connect switch.

This switch has two positions:

● Position A (knob turned clockwise): battery connected,

all systems are supplied

● Position B (knob turned anti-clockwise): battery discon-

nected. Only the following items are powered: instru-

ment cluster (clock inner memories), courtesy light in

cab, radio inner memories, transmission diagnostic

sockets, electronic master disconnect switch circuit

Maintenance

7-23

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig.7-7

Access for inspection and mainte-

nance

It may be necessary to open the bonnet in order to ac-

cess the engine components and carry out inspections,

lubrication and servicing operations.

DANGER: Danger of shearing. Open the

bonnet and remove the side panel only for

servicing, with engine off and rotating parts

completely at standstill.

CAUTION: All the surfaces inside the bonnet

are hot. High burning danger. Be extremely

careful and wait for the surfaces to cool down

before operating inside the bonnet to avoid

burns. [2.n]

CAUTION: In a few particular cases some serv-

ice operations may require an open bonnet.

Always turn off the engine, as with an open

bonnet the protection from rotating parts is

reduced. In this case, pay also great atten-

tion to hot parts. Wear specific DPI and keep

away any persons not required for the service

operations.

CAUTION: A gas ram controls opening and

closing of the bonnet. Replace the gas ram if

not properly operating to avoid accidental fall

of the bonnet.

CAUTION: if the tractor is equipped with front-

end hitch and power take-off, before open-

ing the bonnet lower the links completely,

whether there are implements or not.

Bonnet opening

Park the tractor on hard, level ground, engage the first

gear, engage the parking brake, turn the engine off and

remove the ignition key from the dashboard. Put the key

away in a safe place, not accessible to children and not

authorised persons.

To open the bonnet:

- Insert the tool (1-Fig. 7-6) in the front slit in the right side

of the bonnet.

- Press and release the locking mechanism.

- Raise the bonnet (1) that is kept raised by the gas ram

(2-Fig.7-7).

- To shut the bonnet again, lower the bonnet against the

resistance of the gas ram (Fig.7-5).

CAUTION: NEVER use the tractor without the

bonnet.

Fig.7-6

7-24

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tool Box

The tool box (1) (if provided) is placed on the outer right

side, just beneath the ladder.

The tool box can be removed by removing the retaining

pin, located at the centre back of the tool box. Lift the

toolbox and pull it out.

The tool box position may vary according to tractor model.

Maintenance

7-25

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 1

General tractor inspection

Visual inspection

– Power steering cylinder hoses: the hoses must not

be pinched or cracked. The outer sheath must not

be swollen in any way and there must be no oil leaks

between the hoses and unions. [2.i]

– Hydraulic circuits tubes. Check for leaks, rubbing,

squeezed or damaged hoses, loose nuts or bolts and

dirt build up. Repair all leaks, hoses and tighten loose

nuts/bolts before operation. [2.i]

– Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking

mechanism is secure and reliable.

– Check for loose nuts, bolts and components.

– Use a calibrated torque wrench to make sure that the

wheel nuts are correctly torqued.

– Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are

well tightened.

– Make sure that all shields and guards are in the cor-

rect position.

Daily checks on the engine

Before starting the tractor, it could be best practice to carry

out a series of simple checks that could effectively prevent

even serious malfunctions during tractor's operation.

– Check levels and any leaks in fuel, coolant and lubrica-

tion systems.

– Inform the service personnel if any problem is found.

Top up where necessary.

When the engine is started and running, carry out the

following checks:

– Check for any leaks in fuel, coolant and lubrication

systems.

– Make sure there are no unusual noises and knocks

during operation.

– Use the vehicle instruments to control the allowed

values of pressure, temperature etc.

– Visual check of fumes (colour of exhaust gases).

– Visual check of the coolant fluid level in the coolant

recovery reservoir.

VARIABLE MAINTENANCE (every 10 hours or daily)

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure the parking brake is

engaged and remove the ignition key. Put it away in a safe place, not accessible to children and not authorised

persons.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

Check tyre pressures

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

To check air pressure in tyres, refer to section 6 in this

manual.

Check tightening and conditions of

the auxiliary organs belt

Only operate if the engine is not running and not hot, to

avoid burning.

• Check the belt for tears, evident wear or soiling by

lubricants or fuels. Replace the belt if this is the case.

• Use a ½ inch wrench with square connection to check

the automatic belt stretcher operation.

CAUTION: when the engine is off, but still hot,

the belt can start moving without a warning.

Wait for the engine temperature to drop to

avoid any risk of serious injuries.

Check the conditions of the exhaust

pipe

Visually check that the exhaust system is not clogged,

corroded or damaged. In case of faults, carry out the

required steps to restore the exhaust system.

Wheel nuts tightening check

Every time the wheels are removed and fit back again,

and at regular intervals, it is important to control toe-in of

the wheels and the tightening of nuts.

Use a calibrated torque wrench to check the tightening.

Intervals:

- First check within the first 10 work hours.

- First check after the first 50 work hours.

- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

NOTE: If particularly heavy works are carried out, the

checks of wheel nuts tightening should be carried out

more frequently than every 500 hour work.

The torque values are indicated in section 6 of this manual.

7-26

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 2

Check of fuel level in the tank

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day after work has

been completed to prevent condensation in the fuel tank.

Diesel fuel

Use a high grade diesel fuel. The use of a low grade

fuel will result in loss of engine power and high fuel

consumption.

IMPORTANT: Different grades of diesel fuel are required

for summer and winter operations. Ask your Argo Tractors

Dealer for winter fuel requirements in your area.

CAUTION: Never refuel the machine when the

engine is hot or running. Never smoke while

refuelling.

CAUTION: Engine fuel is flammable and can

cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the

fuel tank or service the fuel system near an

naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-

rettes etc.

CAUTION: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking

under pressure can penetrate the skin and

cause infection or other injury. To prevent

injury: release all pressure, before disconnect-

ing fluid lines. Before applying pressure, make

sure all connections are tight and components

are in good condition. Never use your hand

to check for suspected leaks under pressure.

Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this

purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your

doctor immediately.

Maintenance

7-27

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 3

Check of level in the AdBlue™ reser-

voir or DEF

In order to comply with laws concerning emissions from

exhaust gases, electronic engines are equipped with SCR

(Selective Catalytic Reduction).

To reduce emissions, a fluid made up of AdBlue™ or DEF

at 32,5% must be injected into the exhaust gases. When

gases enter the catalytic converter, this fluid causes a

chemical reaction that splits up noxious gases into nitro-

gen and water vapour.

The fluid is contained in the reservoir with a blue cap (1)

beside the fuel tank. The system is provided with a control

unit for fluid injection into exhaust tubes.

Check level of AdBlue™ or DEF fluid in the reservoir and

fill up through the blue cap (1), if required, to prevent an

empty reservoir.

The fluid percentage on fuel consumption is 2 to 5%.

Therefore the reservoir needs a new filling every 2 fillings

of the fuel tank.

The absence of fluid causes a power reduction and if the

worked is carried on without fluid injection, the control

unit finally stops the engine.

The instrument cluster displays the percentage of AdB-

lue™ or DEF fluid in the reservoir, and an indicator light

signals when the level is too low. Top up immediately with

the fluid specified in the Lubricants and Fuels chart. An

indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on in case

of a fault in the fluid injection system. See the Instruments

and programming section in this manual for more details.

For storing AdBlue™ or DEF fluid, follow the instruc-

tions of the fluid manufacturer and ask your Dealer

if you need more information. As AdBlue™ or DEF

fluid hardens at -11°C and decomposes quickly at

temperatures over 35°C, the fluid must be stored in a

sheltered place, out of direct sunlight and must not be

stored for a long time at temperature below -11°C or

over 35°C. Always handle this fluid carefully and only

with dedicated objects, clean and made of materials

complying with the technical sheet of the fluid you

are using. AdBlue™ or DEF is a clear fluid, not toxic

and not dangerous when handled. Not explosive, not

flammable, not dangerous for the environment. If your

hands come into contact with AdBlue™ or DEF, just

rinse with water, Do not pour AdBlue™ or DEF on the

ground, as the surface can become slippery. In case

of spills, rinse with water.

CAUTION: Never fill up AdBlue™ or DEF when

the engine is hot or running. Do not smoke

during refilling.

CAUTION: DO NOT fill the AdBlue™ or DEF

reservoir or service the system near a naked

flame, during welding, near burning cigars,

cigarettes etc.

CAUTION: Fluids leaking under pressure can

penetrate the skin and cause infection or other

injury. To prevent injury: release all pressure,

before disconnecting fluid lines.

Before applying pressure, make sure all con-

nections are tight and components are in good

condition. Never use your hand to check for

suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of

cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured

by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

CAUTION: WARRANTY for the AdBlue™ or DEF

fluid injection system.

A warranty on the AdBlue™ or DEF injection

system is granted only if a SYNTHESIS PROD-

UCT or equivalent is used. In no case is a war-

ranty granted if dissolved products are used

(urea prills dissolved in demineralised water),

because these products contain additives that

can cause early clogging of the catalytic con-

verter. Use EXCLUSIVELY the fluid indicated

by the fuel and lubricants table or equivalent.

CAUTION: never pour AdBlue™ o DEF into

the diesel fuel tank and, on the other hand,

never pour diesel fuel or lubricating oil into

the AdBlue™ or DEF tank.

7-28

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

AdBlue™ or DEF - What is to do

– Use exclusively the original synthetic product.

– - Use exclusively suitable, dedicated and clean

equipment to supply and store the fluid.

– Always keep the handling equipment for AdBlue™

or DEF clean and preserved from dirt and dust.

– Only pour AdBlue™ or DEF into its own reservoir.

– If your hands come into contact with AdBlue™ or

DEF, just rinse with plenty of water.

AdBlue™ or DEF - What is not to do

– Do not expose the product to direct sunlight.

– Avoid longer exposure to temperatures over 35°C

or below -11°C.

– Do not pour AdBlue™ or DEF into the fuel tank.

– Do not pour diesel fuel into the AdBlue™ or DEF

reservoir.

– Do not mix the product with other substances or

dilute it with water.

– Do not pour AdBlue™ or DEF onto the ground

as the surface could become slippery. In case of

spills, rinse with water.

Maintenance

7-29

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 4

Check of engine oil level

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

CAUTION: Do not service a running engine!

Do not smoke and avoid any naked flames!

Beware of hot lubricant. Danger of burns!

NOTE: During any service on the lubricating system,

ensure best cleanliness. Carefully clean the areas around

each components you are servicing. Dry wet points with

of a compressed air jet. For lubricants handling, comply

with safety rules and local specific safety practices.

Dispose of spilt lubricant and filter elements according to

rules. Do not pour lubricants on the soil.

Carry out a test cycle after each servicing. In this occasion,

make sure there are no leakages, check the lubricant pres-

sure, then also check the lubricant level.

CAUTION: The engine could be damaged if the

lubricant level is either too low or too high.

Check oil level only with the engine in a hori-

zontal position and not running. The oil level

should be checked when still hot, 5 minutes

after stopping the engine. [2.n]

CAUTION: Beware of hot lubricant. Danger

of burns!

Do not remove the dipstick while the engine

is running. Danger of injury! [2.n]

• Remove the dipstick (1) and wipe it with a clean, lint-

free cloth.

• Push down the oil dipstick (1) until it stops.

• Remove the dipstick (1) again and read the oil level.

• Oil level must always be between the MIN and MAX

marks! If required, top up to the MAX mark.

Never fill up to a level higher than the MAX mark on the

dipstick.

WARNING: Never ever use the engine with the oil level

below the “MIN” mark.

7-30

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 5

Check of transmission oil level

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: When working on steep slopes, oil level

in the transmission MUST BE AT LEAST AT THE

MAXIMUM LEVEL indicated by the dipstick (1).

Otherwise, top up with oil of the specified type

through the plug (2).

Check at regular intervals the oil level in the gearbox and

in the hitch and steering circuits.

Park the tractor on flat ground, with the engine at standstill

and lower the hitch links. Remove the dipstick (1) and

check the oil level.

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the gearbox and rear final

drives before checking the level.

The oil level in the gearbox must be over the midline, be-

tween the minimum and maximum marks of the dipstick:

If needed, fill up through the filler (2) to the required level

with oil of the prescribed type.

When operating external hydraulics, such as hydraulic

front loaders, rams, motors etc. that require a certain

amount of oil, top up the oil level to ensure a correct oil

level in the transmission at any time (refer to the lubricants

and fuels table in the section 9 of this manual).

NOTE: in no case the level should drop under the Min.

mark: when using external hydraulic circuits, the oil level

must always be between the min. and max. marks.

NOTE: When working with the tractor on slopes, add 5

extra litres of oil to guarantee a minimum oil level even in

the most difficult conditions. Refer to your Argo Tractors

Dealer.

NOTE: The hydraulic rams of the implements being

hitched to the tractor contain the same oil used in the

transmission of the tractor. This excludes any oil contami-

nation that could cause malfunction.

Oil in the gearbox

The tractor's gearbox and the steering and hitch circuits

contain the same type of oil (refer to the Lubricants and

Fuels table in the section 9 of this manual).

Maintenance

7-31

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 6

Check of exhaust system tightness,

with all post-treatment components

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

The SCR system on this tractor continuously reduces the

nitrogen oxide (NOx) produced by the engine.

A reduction agent such as AdBlue™ or DEF that is injected

into the SCR catalyzer reacts with the nitrogen oxide

(NOx) emissions in the exhaust gases and reduces them

to nitrogen (N2) and water (H2O).

The injected quantity of AdBlue™ or DEF is controlled by

the electronic engine controller.

AdBlue™ or DEF is injected in the SCR system by the

Supply Module (1).

The SCR system is monitored to check for any crystal-

lization.

As soon as a crystallization is detected, a regeneration

request at standstill (“Standstill”) will come up.

This is required to the operator by the coming up of a

dedicated indicator light in the instrument panel.

The standstill procedure must be manually activated by

the operator that pushes on a specific button (1).

The required standstill procedure should be carried out

as soon as possible.

If the standstill procedure is not promptly carried out, the

engine controller will activate the preset engine protection

functions (for further information on engine “Inducement”

protection levels, refer to section 4 in this manual).

Every standstill procedure will dilute the engine oil with

fuel to a little extent. Therefore the number of the standstill

procedures will be monitored by the engine electronic

management system.

WARNING: during the standstill procedure, at the end

of the exhaust tube a temperature of about 600°C is

possible.

During the standstill procedure a special engine opera-

tion state is activated and the machine cannot be used.

Danger of burns!

7-32

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 7

Check of coolant level in the expan-

sion vessel

(Fig. 7-8)

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: NEVER remove the plug from the

radiator while the engine is still hot. Always

unscrew the plug slowly by one position and

allow the pressure to drop before you loosen

it completely.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: The concentration of the protective agent

for the cooling system must be the prescribed one!

Never operate the engine without coolant, not even

for a short time!

NOTE: The cooling system protective agents must be

ordered by your Argo Tractors Dealer.

CAUTION: Hot coolant may cause burns! The

cooling system is under pressure! Open the

plug only after the system has cooled down.

For coolants handling, comply with safety

rules and local specific safety practices. [2.n]

Check regularly the coolant level with the engine stopped

and when the coolant is cold. DO NOT REMOVE THE

RADIATOR CAP.

The coolant level must be within the normal cold range

marks stamped on the reservoir (1). If the level is below

the minimum mark, fill the reservoir to the top mark with

correct coolant mixture (this will depend upon market

requirements). Remove the plug (2) and top up.

Precautions against freezing temperatures

To prevent ice from forming in the radiator, add specific

products according to the instructions given by the anti-

freeze manufacturer.

Antifreeze also possesses antioxidant and rust-inhibiting

properties and is suitable for all seasons.

The following amounts are indicatively required:

Percentage of

protective agent

for the cooling

system

Water percent-

age

Protection from

cold up to

min. 35 % 65 % -22 °C

40 % 60 % -28 °C

45 % 55 % -35 °C

max. 50 % 50 % -41 °C

CAUTION: Hot coolant can spray out if the

coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator cap

is removed while system is still hot. DO NOT

REMOVE THE RADIATOR CAP. To remove the

coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator cap,

let system cool, turn cap to first notch, then

wait until pressure is released. Scalding can

result from fast removal of radiator cap. [2.n]

IMPORTANT: use AGROLUBE MUREX as anti-freeze after

correctly mixing it with distilled water, according the quan-

tities indicated in the table. Never use tap water, rain water

or well water to avoid problems connected to pollution.

If a wrong mix is used, Argo Tractors will take no respon-

sibility for any damages.

To top up, do not pour distilled water into the cooling

system. Top up only with correctly diluted AGROLUBE

MUREX, according the quantities indicated in the table

below.

Never use plain water as coolant.

Always check the protection level of the mix before winter.

Fig.7-8

Maintenance

7-33

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 8

Check of water level in the wind-

shield washer reservoir

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

Regularly check water level in the windshield water

reservoir.

If the fluid level is low fill the reservoir.

7-34

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 9

Check and clean cab suspension (if

equipped).

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

On a daily basis check to make sure the cab suspension

support assemblies and corresponding area are clean,

on both sides.

Pay extra attention to the slot in the bracket, make sure

any mud, dust, straw etc. is removed and not restricting

movement.

Maintenance

7-35

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 10

Clean and grease cab door locks and

hinges

Thoroughly clean locks and hinges in the cab doors and

lubricate with suitable commercial products.

7-36

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 11

Cleaning of radiators and heat ex-

changer grilles

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine

parts. [2.n]

Periodically check to make sure that the radiator surface

is not clogged.

CAUTION: These operations must be carried

out when the engine is cold. When hot, the

grilles and radiator will burn the hands and

fingers.

Lift the bonnet to access the air conditioning condenser

(5), the transmission oil radiator (1), the aftercooler radiator

(2) and the engine coolant radiator (6).

1. Grasp both ends of the AC condenser (5) and lift it

carefully out in order not to damage the cooling fins.

2. Take out the grid (4).

3. Clean the engine radiator surface (3) by means of an

air jet from the inside to the outside.

4. Clean the transmission oil radiator surface (1) by

means of an air jet from the inside to the outside.

5. Clean the aftercooler radiator (2) with an air jet from

the inside to the outside.

6. Clean the AC condenser surface (5) with and air jet

directed from the inside to the outside.

7. Clean the fuel radiator surface (6) with and air jet

directed from the inside to the outside.

Check that the cooling fins are not warped. In this case

the damage must be repaired.

Proceed in inverse order to remount. Take care not to

damage the cooling fins.

NOTE: We recommend a daily cleaning when front im-

plements are used, especially front mower-conditioners.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to bend or damage the fins

during cleaning. Areas with restricted access should be

carefully cleaned with compressed air.

IMPORTANT: If you clean using compressed air, use an

air hose with a safety ON/OFF control nozzle and ALWAYS

WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

CAUTION: DO NOT steam clean any air con-

ditioning system parts while the system is

charged. The heat will cause the refrigerant to

rise to a pressure that could cause the system

to explode.

NOTE: The best results are obtained with a steam cleaner

that softens up the dirt. Use a lamp to check the cleaning

between the radiator fins. We recommend a daily clean-

ing when front implements are used, especially front

mower-conditioners.

Maintenance

7-37

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 12

Drain the fuel/water separator

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine

parts. [2.n]

During running-in, the fuel filters must be re-

placed at 50 hours. Then replace at the intervals

indicated by the table.

Regularly drain off the water that collects from the cock

of the water/fuel separator filter (5).

Shift the gear to neutral and engage the parking brake.

The drain plug is located on the bottom of the fuel/water

separator. Loosen the plug to let any water or sediment

drain from the filter.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of fuel and filters in accordance

with local regulations. DO NOT drain on the ground, into

a drain or into a leaky container. Be responsible for the

environment.

1. Fuel supply to pump

2. Breather screw

3. Electric connection for water level sensor

4. Drain plug

5. Filter cartridge

6. Fuel tank inlet

Draining the water collector

• Stop the engine.

• Place a suitable collection vessel.

• Loosen the drain screw.

• Drain liquid until pure Diesel fuel comes out.

• Install the drain plug.

Driving torque value 1,6 ±0,3 Nm

7-38

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 13

Fuel pre-filter cartridge change

During running-in, the fuel filters must be replaced

at 50 hours. Then replace at the intervals indicated

by the table.

• Place a suitable collection vessel.

• Electrical connection:

- remove the connections of the cables concerning

the filter area.

• Loosen the plug and drain the liquid.

• Remove the filter element.

• Clean from any dirt the seal surface of the new filter

cartridge and the opposite side of the filter head.

• Smear the seal surfaces of the filter cartridge with

a little fuel and screw down onto the filter head in a

clockwise direction (approx. 17÷18 Nm).

• Install the drain plug.

Driving torque value: approx. 1.6 ±0.3 Nm

• Electrical connection:

- fit back again the cables that were previously discon-

nected.

• Open the fuel cock and vent the system.

Vent the fuel distribution system

The fuel distribution system is vented by the electrical

fuel delivery pump.

Do not attempt starting while venting the system, other-

wise fault messages could be generated.

Proceed as described below:

• Starting activated

The electronic fuel delivery pump starts for 20 seconds

to vent the fuel distribution system and generate the

required pressure.

Wait for the electronic fuel delivery pump to be stopped

by the controller.

• Starting off

Repeat at least 2 times, until the fuel distribution system

is completely vented.

Maintenance

7-39

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 14

Change fuel filter cartridge

During running-in, the fuel filters must be replaced

at 50 hours. Then replace at the intervals indicated

by the table.

The following operations must be carried out with the

engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake are

both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the op-

eration concerned. If you need to open the bonnet,

follow the procedure indicated under "How to open

the bonnet".

Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine

parts. [2.n]

Clean the filter head, filter and engine area next to the

filter before removing the filter.

NOTE: The fuel filter is not equipped with a drain plug.

The drain plug is located on the bottom of the fuel/water

separator.

Use a filter wrench to remove the filter.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of fuel and filters in accordance

with local law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel onto the

ground, into a drain or into a container that can leak. Be

responsible for the environment.

Wipe any spilt fuel.

Clean the seal face of the filter housing with a clean,

lint-free cloth.

Smear the seal of the new cartridge of the original filter

with a thin oil film.

Screw down by hand the new filter, then tighten to a

torque of approx.: 10÷12 Nm

IMPORTANT: DO NOT fill the new filter with fuel before

installing.

IMPORTANT: Only use an approved fuel filter, these fil-

ters have been specifically designed to provide superior

engine protection.

Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel system. See

Fuel System Air Removal on the following pages.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing

all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump

can be damaged.

CAUTION: Engine fuel is flammable and can

cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the

fuel tank or service the fuel system near an

naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-

rettes etc. [2.l]

7-40

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 15

Check of oil level in axle and front

final drives

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the

operation concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot

tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

Regularly check the oil level in the differential of the front

axle and in the front axle side final drives.

Front final drives

Park the tractor on level ground.

Position the final drive plugs (1) on the wheel centre line.

Remove the plugs and check the level. The level is correct

when oil flows out of the hole. Top up if necessary using

the specified type of oil, using the same plugs.

Front differential

Remove the level plug (2) from the central axle housing.

The oil must reach the level of the plug. Top up if neces-

sary with oil of the specified type through the plug (1).

NOTE: if required, an additive for limited slipping can be

found at your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer's. Add 30

ml additive for each litre of oil in the housing.

NOTE: for oil specifications, refer to the Lubricants and

Fuel chart in section 9 of this manual.

Maintenance

7-41

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 16

Front PTO oil level (if equipped)

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

To check the power take-off oil level, put the tractor on

level ground.

Remove the fill/level plug (1) located on the front of the

housing. If the oil level is low, add the recommended oil

type to raise the oil level to the bottom edge of the fill

hole. Install the plug and tighten.

Servicing the front power take-off

Periodically throughout the year, additional attention must

be made to the following:

– Check all bolts, screws and fixings etc. are tight.

– Check the PTO housing for any leaks.

Operating the Front PTO at low oil levels can cause

damage to the housing, incorrect operation of the PTO

clutch and also damage to the environment.

- Every 5 or 10 operation hours, check in the whole power

take-off system that all bolts are perfectly tightened and

there are no leaks in the hydraulic system.

- After about 450 hours work, check that all bolts are

tightened to the prescribed torques and there are no

leaks in the hydraulic system. Grease all points periodi-

cally with all grease nipples. Use a universal high grade

grease.

7-42

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Locking devices for automatic hitch-

ing of the Pick Up Hitch

(if equipped, according to market)

Locking latches and rear pivots, 4 points.

1. The hitch should be carefully cleaned every 250 hour

operation, and the moving parts (also inner slide rails)

should be greased to avoid corrosion.

2. Make sure that all moving parts move freely and oper-

ate correctly.

NOTE: In heavy duty operating conditions, the hitch could

require a more frequent greasing to ensure it operates

correctly.

STEP 17

Check of the moving elements of the

tow hook (if installed)

Hitch clevis, 1 point (depending on model)

The hitch should be thoroughly cleaned and all moving

parts, including the inner slide rails, should be greased to

protect from corrosion.

Make sure that all moving parts move freely and operate

correctly.

Pin grease nipple, 1 point (depending on hitch model)

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

Maintenance

7-43

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 18

Check of drawbar bolt torques

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried

out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand

brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the

dashboard.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

– Tighten bolts (1) [4 off] to a torque of 295 to 330 Nm.

STEP 19

Check the torque of the trailer hitch

bolts (if equipped)

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried

out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand

brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the

dashboard.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

– Tighten the rear retaining bolts (2) [10 off] of the PTO

housing, to a torque of 430 to 455 Nm.

7-44

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 20

Battery - Checking for function

WARNING: always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

At regular intervals, check the battery charging and re-

charge if required.

CAUTION: battery electrolyte contains sulphu-

ric acid and can cause serious burns.

Avoid any contacts with the skin and eyes.

Keep naked flames, sparks and lighted ciga-

rettes well clear of batteries which are being

charged. Keep the area in which batteries are

being charged well ventilated. [2.l]

CAUTION: when connecting the battery to a

charger, make sure that the positive (+) lead

of the charger is connected to the positive of

the battery and the negative (-) to the negative.

Incorrect connection will damage the diodes

and the other circuit components. [2.l]

NOTE: make sure that the battery terminal nuts are well

fixed to their terminals.

CAUTION: battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and

reproductive harm. Wash your hands after

handling.

WARNING: according to the law it is mandatory to

dispose of batteries in suitable containers provided to

this purpose at authorised centres. DO NOT dispose

of them in the environment.

Battery cables and terminals

The battery terminals must be kept clean and tight.

Remove all corrosion with a wire brush, then wash with

a weak solution of baking soda or ammonia. Put some

petroleum jelly or light grease on terminals to prevent

more corrosion.

CAUTION: when connecting the battery to a

charger, make sure that the positive (+) lead

of the charger is connected to the positive of

the battery and the negative (-) to the negative.

Incorrect connection will damage the diodes

and the other circuit components.

[2.l]

Fig.7-6a

Maintenance

7-45

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 21

Check of fan, compressor and alter-

nator belt.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

Fan and alternator belt

Periodically check the tension of the alternator and fan

belt (1).

To adjust the belt tension, loosen the fixing screws and

check nut on the idler and move the alternator until the

correct tension has been obtained.

Now tighten all the screws and check nuts.

NOTE: Check the belt conditions frequently. The belt

must be replaced if it is cracked or needs to be frequently

adjusted. This operation must be carried at your Argo

Tractors Dealer's.

Air conditioning compressor belt

Check periodically the compressor (3) belt (2).

If the belt appears slack or cracked, it should be replaced.

NOTE: Check the belt conditions frequently. A belt must

be replaced if it is cracked or needs to be frequently

adjusted. This operation must be carried at your Argo

Tractors Dealer's.

7-46

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 22

Check brake controls - adjustments

Parking brake

WARNING: handle all parts with the utmost care. Do

not reach with your hands or fingers between parts.

Wear approved safety garments such as eye protection,

gloves and safety footwear.

4 marks

The travel of the parking brake control lever should be

adjusted when the lever has a too long idle travel at the

4 marks.

Proceed as follows:

1. Pull the parking brake lever up to the fourth mark on

the sector.

2. Apply a force of 80 ÷ 100 N to the bottom lever (1).

3. Loosen the check nut (2) and tighten the adjuster nut

(3) up to the position of the bottom lever.

4. Tighten the check nut (2) and check if the brake oper-

ates correctly.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

Adjustment of pedal brakes

The service brakes require no adjustment.

Check at regular intervals that the free travel of the pedals

does not exceed the normal value of 3.5 cm (dimension

“A”).

If the free travel is too long, ask your Argo Tractors Dealer

for the braking system diagnosis.

Maintenance

7-47

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 23

Clean cab air filters

2 filters in the rear posts in the cab

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: When maintenance, fill-up, adjust-

ment, cleaning and any other operations are

required on elements at an height over 1.5

meters, e.g. cab air filters or field lights lamps,

a stable and safe climbing means is mandatory,

such as a ladder solidly secured on the ground.

It is forbidden to climb or grab on to elements

such as the tractor access ladder. They must

only be used to climb up and down the con-

trol compartment of the tractor. Maintenance

operations such as window and roof cleaning

or cab filters replacement must be carried

out in utter safety for the operator and the

vehicle. Always use specific personal safety

devices for each operation. If it is required to

work suspended high on above the ground,

always make sure to be in a safe position so

as to avoid falling. [2.h]

CAUTION: Do not stand on the tractor to

service the filter, use the correct equipment

for a safe standing platform or injury can

result. [2.h]

For best performance, this filter must be serviced more

often when working in particularly dusty environment.

Replace with a genuine part if damaged or when the filter

can not be cleaned.

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and

protective clothing appropriate to the environment that

the filter has been in contact with MUST be used during

the cleaning of the filter.

1. Unscrew and remove the fixing knob (1) of the cover

(2).

2. Lift the cover.

3. Loosen the filter fixing nut (3).

4. Remove the filter (4) and clean as follows:

Clean the filter housing with a cloth.

When the filter is remounted, the cartridge (4) must be

oriented as indicated on the cartridge itself.

Fig.7-8

WARNING: Take the filter off before washing the cab.

If the cab is washed and the special filter has not been

demounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from

splashing on to the protective grille. otherwise your

cab's special filter will be irreparably damaged.

IMPORTANT: before fitting the filter back, visually check

that the filter seals are not damaged. They must not be

bent or damaged in any way. Replace the complete filter

if required.

7-48

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Indications for filter cleaning

The filter element can be cleaned by following two

methods:

METHOD A

If the dirt mainly consists in dust, this method can be

used to clean the filter. Tap the dusty side of the filter on

a flat surface. Do not use excessive force that can cause

damage to the filter.

METHOD B

Use compressed air to blow dust away. Move the flow of

air up and down the clean the side of the filter. Maximum

air pressure must exceed 2 bar. Too much pressure will

damage the filter.

IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF

control nozzle and ALWAYS WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

Maintenance

7-49

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 24

Cleaning of cab air recirculation fil-

ters

Step to be carried out each 100 hours

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

NOTE: there are 2 filters for air recirculation in the cab.

This step must be carried out on both filters in the rear

posts in the cab.

CAUTION: Do not stand on the tractor to

service the filter, use the correct equipment

for a safe standing platform or injury can

result. [2.h]

For best performance, these filters must be serviced more

often when working in particularly dusty environment.

Replace with a genuine part if damaged or when the filter

can not be cleaned.

IMPORTANT: respiratory protection equipment and pro-

tective clothing appropriate to the environment that the

filters has been in contact with MUST be used during the

cleaning of the filters.

1. Unscrew the screw (1) and remove the protective grill.

2. Access, remove and clean the paper filter.

Clean the filter housing with a cloth.

When the filter is remounted, the cartridge must be ori-

ented as indicated on the cartridge itself.

IMPORTANT: before fitting the filter back, visually check

that the filter seals are not damaged. They must not be

bent or damaged in any way. Replace the complete filter

if required.

Fig.7-9

7-50

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 25

Replace front axle differential and

side final drives oil

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the

operation concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot

tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

NOTE: It is advisable to change the oil for the first time

after 150 hours, then at the intervals as shown by the table.

Differential housing (oil draining)

Place a vessel under the plug (1), remove the plug and

drain out all oil.

Side final drives (oil draining)

Position the final drive plugs (1) downward.

Place a vessel under the plugs (1) (one for each final drive),

unscrew the plug and drain out all oil.

NOTE: For oil specifications, refer to the Lubricants and

Fuels chart in section 9 of this manual.

Differential housing (oil filling)

Fit the plug (1) back when no more oil is coming out and

fill up with fresh oil through the filler (3) up to the level

of the plug (2).

Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top

up if necessary.

Fit all plugs back on.

Side final drives (oil filling)

Position the plugs (1) on the wheel centre line. Fill up with

oil of the specified type to the level of the holes.

Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top

up if necessary. Fit the plugs back (1).

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil in accordance with local

law requirements. DO NOT drain oil on the ground, into a

drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for

the environment.

Maintenance

7-51

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 26

General lubrication

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

Lubricate the grease points every 100 hours or more often,

depending on the working conditions.

- Brake control cross link (Fig.7-10)

- Rear hitch

- Three-point linkage (Fig.7-11)

- Third point

- Bearing of the 2WD transmission shaft (Fig.7-12b)

- Cross bar of suspended cab (Fig.7-12a)

NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the

Lubricants and Fuels chart.

NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more

frequently.

NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pres-

surised water.

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

Fig.7-10 Brake control cross link. Inject grease

of the prescribed type.

Fig.7-12b Grease nipple of the bearing of the front trans-

mission shaft.

Fig.7-11 - Grease nipples of the rear three point linkage.

Fig.7-12a

7-52

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Locking devices for automatic hitch-

ing of the Pick Up Hitch

(if equipped, according to market)

Locking latches and rear pivots, 4 points.

1. The hitch should be carefully cleaned every 100 hour

operation, and the moving parts (also inner slide rails)

should be greased to avoid corrosion.

2. Make sure that all moving parts move freely and oper-

ate correctly.

NOTE: In heavy duty operating conditions, the hitch could

require a more frequent greasing to ensure it operates

correctly.

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

Trailer hitch slide rails and hitch cou-

pling operating parts

(if equipped)

Hitch clevis, 1 point (depending on model)

The hitch should be thoroughly cleaned and all moving

parts, including the inner slide rails, should be greased to

protect from corrosion.

Make sure that all moving parts move freely and operate

correctly.

Pin grease nipple, 1 point (depending on hitch model)

Maintenance

7-53

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 27

Front axle lubrication

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

Lubricate the following grease points every 100 hours

or more often, depending on the working conditions.

• Kingpins of 4WD axle (2 pcs). (1, Fig.7-13)

Set-up with rigid axle

• Central pivot bushings of the front axle (1, Fig.7-14 e

2, Fig.7-15)

Fig.7-15 Set-up with rigid axle.

2 - Grease nipple of front pivot bushing of the

axle.

Fig.7-14 Set-up with rigid axle.

1 - Grease nipple of rear pivot bushing of the

front axle

Fig.7-13

7-54

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Set-up with suspended axle

WARNING: Always use the specific DPIs for

the operation to be carried out. Beware of burns

caused by hot tractor and engine parts.

[2.n]

Lubricate the greasing point of the pivot bar, of the sus-

pension rams and of the rear support.

• Pivot bar (2 pcs). (1 Fig. 7-16A)

• Suspension rams (2 pcs. each side) (2 Fig.7-16A)

• Rear drawbar bearing (1 piece) (4 Fig. 7-16B)

• Rear articulation bearing (1 pc) (5 Fig.7-16B)

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

NOTE: use lithium grease of the prescribed type.

NOTE: In severe operating conditions these points must

be lubricated more frequently.

NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pres-

surised water.

Fig.7-16A

Fig.7-16B

Maintenance

7-55

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 28

Replace transmission oil filter (on

the intake)

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

The following operations for the transmission oil filters

must be carried out not only at the prescribed intervals,

but also whenever the indicator lights on the instrument

panel come on.

Warning lights for transmission and hydraulic sys-

tem oil filter blockage

1 - Red warning light (steady) for low pressure in hydrau-

lic transmission system. If it comes on during work,

contact your Argo Tractors Dealer.

2 - Yellow warning light (steady) for transmission and

hydraulic system oil filter blockage.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: replace the oil filter on hydraulic pumps

intakes any time the transmission oil is changed.

Always refer to the intervals indicated by the table.

1 - Loosen the screws (1) and remove the cover (3) of

the intake filter (2).

2 - Remove the filter cartridge (2) and wash it in a suitable

solvent. Be sure to remove any metallic fragments

from the filter cover and housing.

NOTE: replace the cartridge if damaged or excessively

clogged.

3 - Clean and reassemble the cover.

4. Check the oil level. Top up if necessary with oil of the

prescribed type.

NOTE: After you have fitted the filter, allow the engine to

run and make sure that there are no leaks. Check the oil

level at regular and top up if required.

NOTE: Use the oil prescribed in the Lubricants and Fuels

chart in the section 9 of this manual.

NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-

nected to the tractor's hydraulic circuit uses the same

type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage the

hydraulic circuit.

7-56

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 29

Various checks - tyre pressures and

torques

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

•

Power steering cylinder hoses: the hoses must not

be pinched or cracked. The outer sheath must not

be swollen in any way and there must be no oil leaks

between the hoses and unions.

•

Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking

mechanism is secure and reliable.

•

Use a calibrated torque wrench to make sure that the

wheel nuts are correctly torqued.

•

Make sure that the safety frame screws are well tight-

ened.

•

Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are

well tightened.

•

Check the tyre pressure.

Check of nuts tightening of front and rear

wheels

Every time the wheels are removed and fit back again,

and at regular intervals, it is important to control toe-in of

the wheels and the tightening of nuts.

Use a calibrated torque wrench to check the tightening.

Intervals:

- First check within the first 10 work hours.

- First check after the first 50 work hours.

- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

NOTE: if particularly heavy works are carried out, the

checks of wheel nuts tightening should be carried out

more frequently than every 500 hour work

Maintenance

7-57

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 30 [2.ag]

Grease rear 3-point hitch ( repeat

every 100 hours )

NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the

Lubricants and Fuels chart.

NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more

frequently.

NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pres-

surised water.

Turnbuckles, 2 points each side

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

7-58

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 31 [2.ag]

Lubrication of front 3-point linkage

(if equipped) (repeat every 100 hours)

Before carrying out any maintenance operations on your

tractor, e.g. lubrication by means of greasing points,

always abide by the safety precautions here under pre-

scribed.

WARNING: Service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine

parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

Before lubricating any parts provided with grease nipples,

carefully clean the surfaces of the nipples and make sure

that their seal ball moves freely.

After the lubrication, remove any trace of grease to avoid

it to collect dirt or dust.

CAUTION: if the tractor is equipped with

front-end hitch and power take-off, before

opening the bonnet lower the links com-

pletely, whether there are implements or not.

Lubricate the following grease points every 100 hours or

more often, depending on the working conditions:

- Top of lift cylinder, 2 points.

- Bottom of lift cylinder, 2 points.

NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the

Lubricants and Fuels chart.

NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more

frequently.

NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pres-

surised water.

NOTE: the greasing point may be protected by a coloured

cap. Replace it if worn or damaged.

Top of lift cylinder, 2 points.

Bottom of lift cylinder, 2 points.

Maintenance

7-59

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 32

Change front PTO oil

(if installed)

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried

out when the engine is off. Make sure the parking

brake is engaged and remove the ignition key. Put it

away in a safe place, not accessible to children and

not authorised persons.

STEP 1

Park the tractor on level ground.

Remove the drain plug (1) under the PTO housing and

collect oil in a suitable container.

For best results drain the oil after operation when the

oil is warm. Once the oil has completely drained, fit the

plug back on (1).

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil according to local law re-

quirements. DO NOT DRAIN THE OIL ON THE GROUND

OR INTO A DRAIN. Be responsible for the environment.

STEP 2

Remove the plug (2) and top up with oil of the prescribed

type (refer to the "Lubricant and fuel chart" in section 9

of this manual). oil must be level with the bottom edge

of the hole.

Wait approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level again

and add oil as necessary. Install the plug (2) and tighten.

Check in the whole power take-off system that all bolts

are perfectly tightened and there are no leaks in the hy-

draulic system.

Grease all points periodically (450/500 hours) with all

grease nipples. Use a universal high grade grease.

7-60

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 33

Replace oil filter on the delivery of

the steering circuit

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: Change the paper filter on the delivery

after the first 50, 250, 500 hours. Then replace it at

500 hours intervals, in particular every time the trans-

mission oil is changed. Always refer to the intervals

indicated by the table.

An indicator light on the instrument cluster comes on

when the filter must be replaced.

Change the element of the filter on the delivery of the

steering circuit as follows:

1 - Unscrew the holder (1), remove and discard the filter

element (3).

2 - Fit the new filter element (3) into the cover of the

filter (2).

To prevent the filter element from being dirtied (with

mud, etc.) only completely remove the plastic protection

after fitting.

3 - Mount the holder (1) after oiling its threaded part, the

washer (4) and seal (5) with clean new oil. Take great

care to fit the individual parts in the right directions.

Change the seal (5) and the washer (4) every 1000

hours service or whenever necessary.

4 - Fully screw on the holder (1) by hand.

NOTE: After you have changed the filter, allow the engine

to run and make sure that there are no leaks. Check the oil

level at regular intervals and top up if required.

NOTE: Use the oil prescribed in the Lubricants and Fuels

chart in the section 9 of this manual.

NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-

nected to the tractor's hydraulic circuit uses the same

type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage the

hydraulic circuit.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in accordance with

local regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into

a drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible

for the environment.

1 - Vessel

2 - Cover

3 - Filter element

4 - Washer

5 - Ring seal

Maintenance

7-61

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 34

Transmission oil replacement

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: When working on steep slopes, oil

level in the transmission MUST BE AT LEAST AT

THE MAXIMUM DRAW LEVEL indicated by the

dipstick (1).

Otherwise, top up with oil of the specified type

through the plug (2).

NOTE: It is advisable to change the oil in the gearbox for

the first time after 500 hours, then after every 1000 hours

service. Always refer to the intervals indicated by the table.

1 - Lower the lift arms to the ground.

2 - Remove the fill plug (2).

3 - Place vessels under the drain plugs (3) of the trans-

mission and axle housings. Place a vessel under the

drain plug (4) of the auxiliary reservoir (if provided).

4 - Remove the plugs and drain out the oil.

5 - Fit the drain plugs back in place, then pour oil of the

approved type into the transmission (through the filler

(2) until the correct level has been reached. See the

Lubricants and Fuels chart.

NOTE: Let the oil stabilize before checking its level in the

transmission as described in the section 9 of this manual.

NOTE: In special weather conditions, e.g. low tempera-

tures, always ask you Argo Tractors Dealer for specific

indications on correct use of oils and fuels. The use of

materials not approved by Argo Tractors exempts the

company from any responsibilities.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil in accordance with local

law requirements. DO NOT drain oil on the ground, into a

drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for

the environment.

NOTE: when the transmission is filled, it could be of

advantage to remove the plug (1) on the rear near the

PTO shaft. This will ease oil flow inside the transmission.

7-62

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 35

Engine oil replacement

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

WARNING:

Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

NOTE: Every time the engine oil must be changed, we

advise a forced standstill with the old oil, and only after-

ward to change it as prescribed.

For the engine, it is necessary to use a detergent oil as

indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels Chart. Detergent

oils contain additives that reduce corrosion, oil oxidation

and deposits and have a high dispersion power of carbon

matters produced by combustion.

Personal safety devices (DPI) must be worn for the in-

dicated operations. Beware of burns caused by hot oil

and engine parts. If required, let the engine idle for the

prescribed time to reach the required temperature to let

the oil flow easily. Then turn off the engine.

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

CAUTION: Do not service a running engine!

Do not smoke and avoid any naked flames!

Beware of hot lubricant. Danger of burns!

NOTE: During any service on the lubricating system,

ensure best cleanliness. Carefully clean the areas around

each components you are servicing. Dry wet points with

of a compressed air jet. For lubricants handling, comply

with safety rules and local specific safety practices.

Dispose of spilt lubricant and filter elements according to

rules. Do not pour lubricants on the soil.

Carry out a test cycle after each servicing. In this occasion,

make sure there are no leakages, check the lubricant pres-

sure, then also check the lubricant level.

CAUTION: The engine could be damaged if the

lubricant level is either too low or too high.

Check oil level only with the engine in a hori-

zontal position and not running. The oil level

should be checked when still hot, 5 minutes

after stopping the engine.

DANGER: Beware of hot lubricant. Danger

of burns!

Do not remove the dipstick while the engine

is running. Danger of injury! [2.n]

Fig.7-17 - Engine oil

1. engine oil drain screw (2 screws on each side

of the crankcase)

Maintenance

7-63

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

• Heat up the engine (oil temperature >80 °C).

• Place the engine or the vehicle on a horizontal surface.

• Stop the engine.

• Place a vessel under oil draining screws.

• Loosen the oil draining screws (1) on both sides, and

let the oil drain out.

• Tighten the oil draining screws, complete with a new

seal ring.

Driving torque value: 55 Nm

• Fill with oil. See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the

correct type of oil required.

NOTE: Never fill up to a level higher than the MAX mark

on the dipstick.

• Heat up the engine (oil temperature >80 °C).

• Place the engine or the vehicle on a horizontal surface.

• Check the oil level. Top up if required.

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the engine sump be-

fore checking the level. The oil must be changed more

frequently (e.g. every 250 hours) if the tractor is used in

heavy duty conditions.

If the tractor is used infrequently, change the engine oil

at least once a year regardless of the actual number of

hours worked.

7-64

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 36

Check of Auto hitch locking latches

& lift rod adjustment (if equipped,

depending on market)

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried

out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand

brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the

dashboard.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

As necessary or at least every 500 hours check the opera-

tion of the auto hitch and make sure the locking latches

engage and the hitch is operating correctly.

CAUTION: when checking the operation of the

auto hitch, stay well clear of moving parts or

injury can result.

CAUTION: Never start the engine in a closed

place. Always sure that there is suitable ven-

tilation.

If the locking latches do not engage correctly the

cable and/or the lift rods may need adjustment. Ask

your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer for the required

adjustments.

Maintenance

7-65

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 37

Replace engine air filter

CAUTION: Always stop the engine before re-

moving the filter elements.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the

operation concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot

tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

The cartridges of the engine air filter should be replaced

every 1000 hours service (or once a year) or more often

if operating in a very dusty environment, or whenever the

red indicator on the control panel lights up.

Release the clips (1), remove the cover (2) and replace the

external cartridge (3) along with the internal safety car-

tridge (4). Carefully clean the filter cover (2) and bowl (5).

Always check to make sure that the filter housing is not

damaged and make sure that all the pipes and unions

are tight.

NOTE: It is advisable to replace the two filter cartridges

at least once a year even if you have not reached 1000

hours service in total.

CAUTION: The internal cartridge (4) must always be

replaced. It must never be cleaned.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accordance

with local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

CAUTION: NEVER attempt to clean the filter elements

with exhaust gas from the engine. NEVER EVER use

oil on a dry filter. NEVER EVER use wash oil, diesel

fuel, paraffin or solvents to clean the filter elements.

Filter restriction indicator lamp

When the air filter restriction indicator lamp (1) on the

instrument cluster comes on, the primary (outer) filter

element needs cleaning. Service the element after the

day's work is completed.

NOTE: If the air filter restriction indicator lamp illuminates

after the primary filter has been serviced, check the fol-

lowing possible causes:

A. Secondary (inner) element is dirty.

B. Grille screen is dirty.

In case of fixed light, contact your authorised Argo Trac-

tors Dealer.

7-66

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 38

Clean fuel tank

The fuel tank is cleaned by removing the plug (1).

NOTE: Drain off the sludge when the tank is almost empty

and only after having placed a suitable vessel under the

drain plug.

NOTE: Air in the fuel circuit makes it difficult to start the

engine. Bleed the circuit as described under General

Maintenance in this section.

Maintenance

7-67

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 39

Change cab air filters

2 filters in the rear posts in the cab

The cab air filters in the cab posts must be re-

placed at least once a year or every 1000 hours

service.

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

CAUTION: When maintenance, fill-up, adjust-

ment, cleaning and any other operations are

required on elements at an height over 1.5

meters, e.g. cab air filters or field lights lamps,

a stable and safe climbing means is mandatory,

such as a ladder solidly secured on the ground.

It is forbidden to climb or grab on to elements

such as the tractor access ladder. They must

only be used to climb up and down the con-

trol compartment of the tractor. Maintenance

operations such as window and roof cleaning

or cab filters replacement must be carried

out in utter safety for the operator and the

vehicle. Always use specific personal safety

devices for each operation. If it is required to

work suspended high on above the ground,

always make sure to be in a safe position so

as to avoid falling. [2.h]

CAUTION: Do not stand on the tractor to

service the filter, use the correct equipment

for a safe standing platform or injury can

result. [2.h]

For best performance, this filter must be serviced more

often when working in particularly dusty environment.

Replace with a genuine part if damaged or when the filter

can not be cleaned.

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and

protective clothing appropriate to the environment that

the filter has been in contact with MUST be used during

the cleaning of the filter.

1. Unscrew and remove the fixing knob (1) of the cover

(2).

2. Lift the cover.

3. Loosen the filter fixing nut (3).

4. Remove the filter (4) and clean as follows:

Clean the filter housing with a cloth.

When the filter is remounted, the cartridge (4) must be

oriented as indicated on the cartridge itself.

Fig.7-18

WARNING: Take the filter off before washing the cab.

If the cab is washed and the special filter has not been

demounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from

splashing on to the protective grille. otherwise your

cab's special filter will be irreparably damaged.

IMPORTANT: before fitting the filter back, visually check

that the filter seals are not damaged. They must not be

bent or damaged in any way. Replace the complete filter

if required.

7-68

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Indications for filter cleaning

The filter element can be cleaned by following two

methods:

METHOD A

If the dirt mainly consists in dust, this method can be

used to clean the filter. Tap the dusty side of the filter on

a flat surface. Do not use excessive force that can cause

damage to the filter.

METHOD B

Use compressed air to blow dust away. Move the flow of

air up and down the clean the side of the filter. Maximum

air pressure must exceed 2 bar. Too much pressure will

damage the filter.

IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF

control nozzle and ALWAYS WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

Maintenance

7-69

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 40

Check of starter motor, alternator

and compressor

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried

out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand

brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the

dashboard.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot engine

parts. [2.n]

Starter motor

The starter motor (1) must be thoroughly cleaned at least

once a year. Particularly check the condition of the brushes

and collector.

Alternator

Let your Argo Tractors Dealer check the operation condi-

tions of the alternator (1).

Air conditioning compressor

Have the air conditioning system operation checked by

specialised personnel at your Argo Tractors Dealer. Also

check the lubricating oil level in the compressor (1).

7-70

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 41

Check function of the operator de-

tector microswitch

Check the sensor for correct function every 1000 hours

of operation or at least once annually. When doing the

following checks, do so in a clear open area with no other

persons or objects near the tractor:

NOTE: For further information on the operator detector

sensor, see "Operator present sensor" in section 3 of this

manual.

To check the correct operation of the sensor, reproduce

the conditions described in the following table. If even

one of the conditions is not met, ask your authorised Argo

Tractors Dealer for service to the system.

CAUTION: DO NOT bypass the circuit of the

operator detector sensor. Otherwise the situ-

ation can be risky both for the operator and

the people near the tractor.

If the operator detector sensor circuit is

bypassed, the electronic system will sense

the change and transmit the error code. The

exclamation point in the instrument cluster

will light up. The circuit must be enabled in

any case.

With ignition key turned to ON, engine running:

In the cases given in the following table, the indicator

on the instrument cluster and the buzzer are active

until

the conditions for a correct use of the tractor are restored.

Position

operator

Reverse shuttle

lever position

Parking

brake

Buzzer sounding Indicator on instrument

cluster

sittiNg Neutral eNgaged

OFF

steady oN

sittiNg Neutral released

OFF OFF

sittiNg selected directioN eNgaged

OFF

steady oN

sittiNg selected directioN released

OFF OFF

Not seated Neutral eNgaged

OFF

steady oN

Not seated Neutral released

oN aNd FlashiNg

Not seated selected directioN eNgaged

steady oN

Not seated selected directioN released

oN aNd FlashiNg

Maintenance

7-71

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 42

Engine oil filter replacement

NOTE: Never preload the filter cartridge. Danger of

soiling!

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

• Loosen the old filter (1) with the tool and unscrew from

its housing.

• Collect any spilt oil.

• Clean the seal face of the filter housing with a clean,

lint-free cloth.

• Smear the seal of the new cartridge of the original filter

with a thin oil film.

• Screw down by hand the new filter, then tighten to a

torque of approx.: 15÷17 Nm

NOTE: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the correct

type of oil required.

CAUTION: Only use genuine filter cartridges. Use of

spurious cartridges could damage the engine and

shorten its working life.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in accordance with

local regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into

a drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible

for the environment.

Fig.7-19

7-72

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 43

Engine coolant change

IMPORTANT: use MUREX as anti-freeze after correctly

mixing it with distilled water, according the quantities indi-

cated in the table below. Never use tap water, rain water

or well water to avoid problems connected to pollution. If

a wrong mix is used, Argo Tractors will take no responsibil-

ity for any damages. To top up, do not pour distilled water

into the cooling system. Top up only with correctly diluted

MUREX, according the quantities indicated in the table

below. Never use plain water as coolant. Always check

the protection level of the mix before winter.

During all maintenance and regulations, be careful not

to touch hot surfaces in the engine and transmission. In

particular, avoid any contacts with hot oil when changing

or filling up oil. If the oil is hot, let it cool down somewhat

before going on.

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water

and engine parts. [2.n]

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

CAUTION: NEVER remove the plug from the

radiator while the engine is still hot. Always

unscrew the plug slowly by one position and

allow the pressure to drop before you loosen

it completely.

Remove the filler plug (2) from the expansion tank (1).

Put a hose on the radiator drain valve (3) and open valve.

Drain coolant into a suitable container.

Drain the coolant out also from the plug (4) of the engine

monoblock.

Close the drain plug (3) and the plug (4), then fill with

coolant fluid up to the mark on the vessel (1).

Allow the engine to run at 1000 RPM for a few minutes.

Now check the level and top up if necessary. Shut the

fill plug (2) once the cleaning operation has terminated.

NOTE: in an emergency, to make up for sudden leaks,

the system can be topped up with water by pouring it

through the fill plug (2).

Precautions against freezing tem-

peratures

To prevent ice from forming in the radiator, add specific

products according to the instructions given by the anti-

freeze manufacturer.

Antifreeze also possesses antioxidant and rust-inhibiting

properties and is suitable for all seasons.

The following amounts are indicatively required:

Percentage of

protective agent

for the cooling

system

Water percent-

age

Protection from

cold up to

min. 35 % 65 % -22 °C

40 % 60 % -28 °C

45 % 55 % -35 °C

max. 50 % 50 % -41 °C

Maintenance

7-73

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

This mixture can be permanently maintained in the circuit

for 1 year so long as the service hours did not amount

to 1000 during this period. In this case, the mixture must

be changed.

Flush out the system whenever you change from using

pure water to antifreeze mixtures and vice versa.

Check of anti-freeze in engine cool-

ing system (before winter)

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: maintenance operations must be carried

out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand

brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the

dashboard.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot engine

parts. [2.n]

Once a year, before winter, check the anti-freeze fluid in

the engine cooling system.

7-74

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 44

Check of ribbed v-belt tensioning

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

• Lower the indicator lever (1) of the tester.

• Position the guide (3) between two pulleys on the V-

belt (2). The stop must be on one side.

• Press uniformly on the button (4) in the right corner

with respect to the V-belt (2), until the spring click is

clearly heard.

• Lift the tester gently, without changing the position of

the indicator lever (1).

• Read the value measured on the intersecting point

(arrow) between scale (5) and indicator lever (1).

• Correct the tension as required and repeat the meas-

urement.

NOTE: the belt must be replaced if it is cracked or needs

to be frequently adjusted. This operation must be carried

at your Argo Tractors Dealer's.

Maintenance

7-75

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 45

Replacement of the ribbed v-belt

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: service operations must be carried out with

the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking

brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has

been removed. Put it away in a safe place, not acces-

sible to children and not authorised persons.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

1. Belt stretcher roller

2. Retainer pin

3. Mounting hole

Proceed in the following way to replace the belt:

• With the pipe wrench, push the belt stretcher in the

direction of the arrow until it is possible to set a retainer

pin into the mounting hole. Now the ripped belt ha no

tension.

• First of all, remove the ribbed belt from the smaller roller

and the belt stretcher.

• Mount a new ribbed belt.

• Use a pipe wrench to hold the belt stretcher roll and

remove the retainer pin.

• Stretch the ribbed belt again by means of the stretcher

roller and the pipe wrench. Check that the ribbed V-belt

seats correctly in its guide.

7-76

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 46

Replacement of the A/C system filter,

mounted into the condenser unit

Replace the filter (1) every three years, and on each service

operation involving gas circulation in the air conditioning

system.

Maintenance

7-77

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 47

Replace AdBlue

™

supply pump filter

and cleaning filters

CAUTION: while working on components of

the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR), always

wear protective gloves.

Ensure a proper cleaning.

The replacement of the main filter of the AdBlue™ or DEF

injection system, located under the system control unit,

must be carried out by the specialised personnel of your

authorised Argo Tractors Dealer.

Proceed as follows:

• Stop the engine.

• Electrical connection

– Remove cable connections.

• Place a suitable collection vessel.

• Remove the cover.

Use a 27 mm socket wrench

• Slide the filter element and the compensator out.

• Insert the new filter element and the compensator.

• Assemble the cover.

Driving torque value 22,5 ±2,5 Nm

• Electrical connection

– Fit the cable connections back.

• Start

IMPORTANT: Only use original parts; these parts have

been specifically designed to provide superior engine

protection.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local

law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into

a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible

for the environment.

NOTE: at every replacement of the main filter, also clean

the filters (4) mounted in the supply module connection

lines.

1 - Cover

2 - Compensator

3 - Filter cartridge

4 - Filter

7-78

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 48

Check tightening of steering cylin-

der ball joints

Have the knuckle joint nuts (1) checked by your Argo Trac-

tors Dealer after the first 50 hours and then after every

1000 hours service.

Maintenance

7-79

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 49

Check the concentration of additive

in the coolant

CAUTION: Hot coolant may cause burns!

The cooling system is under pressure! Open

the plug only after the system has cooled

down.

The concentration of the protective agent for

the cooling system must be the prescribed

one!

For coolants handling, comply with safety

rules and local specific safety practices.

In case of radiator on the outside, follow the

directions of the manufacturer. Dispose of

any spilt coolant fluid according to the rules

in force and do not let it seep into the soil.

The cooling system protective agents must be

ordered by your Argo Tractors Dealer.

Never operate the engine without coolant, not

even for a short time!

• Open the cooling system plug very carefully.

• With a tester for antifreeze as available on the market

(1) (e.g. hydrometer or refractometer), check the con-

centration of additive in the coolant in the radiator or

the compensation vessel (2).

• Additive concentration in the coolant as content ratio

in the coolant mix:

Percentage of

protective agent

for the cooling

system

Water percent-

age

Protection from

cold up to

min. 35 % 65 % -22 °C

40 % 60 % -28 °C

45 % 55 % -35 °C

max. 50 % 50 % -41 °C

7-80

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

STEP 50

Lubrication of PTO shaft

WARNING: always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion to be carried out. Beware of burns caused by hot

tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

Every 500 hours, lubricate the inner and outer splining of

the PTO shaft.

NOTE: use lithium grease of the prescribed type.

The imagines are shown here for explanatory purposes

only.

Maintenance

7-81

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

CAB FILTER - MAINTENANCE ON REQUEST

NOTE: it is advisable to inspect and clean the cab intake

air filter at suitable intervals, especially when working in a

dusty environment (always refer to the intervals prescribed

by the table). Keep the air filter clean for efficient operation

of the heating and cooling system. Replace with genuine

parts if damaged or when the filter cannot be cleaned.

CAUTION: Remember that the cab filter is not

suitable for chemicals in general.

Absolute protection against these products

can therefore only be achieved by taking

the precautionary measures required by the

degree of harmfulness of the actual products

used.

It is essential to strictly conform to this latter

precaution for all types of filter whose use

requires compliance with the envisaged opera-

tion and maintenance instructions.

However, even use of filters to protect against

chemicals in general does not exempt opera-

tors from taking all the personal precautions

recommended for use of such products.

These specific filters must only be mounted

when the actual chemicals are being used and

must then be replaced with the normal paper

filters supplied with the machine at the end

of each treatment.

Do not use them during the other processes

since the dust would quickly clog them.

Carefully comply with the operating instruc-

tions on the filter packages or labels. Contact

your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer if spe-

cific filters against chemicals must be used.

IMPORTANT: Always wear protective clothing, e.g.

overalls, goggles, gloves and face mask when preparing

equipment for chemical spraying operations and ALWAYS

follow the chemical manufacturers instructions.

This type of tractor CANNOT be used to spray chemicals,

unless the operator within the cab is wearing a complete

protective suit.

The air filters in the cab must be checked weekly or daily

if used in extreme conditions.

NOTE: This element gives no protection against chemi-

cal spray.

WARNING: Always wear the right sort of personal protec-

tive equipment to protect against the harmful products

used.

WARNING: Take the filter off before washing the cab.

If the cab is washed and the special filter has not been

demounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from

splashing on to the protective grille. otherwise your cab's

special filter will be irreparably damaged.

WARNING: If active carbon filters are used, mount only

original filters supplied in a sealed package: comply with

Fig.7-20

7-82

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

the operating instructions on the container and enclosed

in the filter package. Carefully comply with the operating

instructions on the filter packages or labels. Replace the

filters at the intervals specified by the filter manufacturer.

Contact your Argo Tractors Dealer if specific filters against

chemicals must be used.

Always wear the right sort of personal protective equip-

ment to protect against the harmful products used.

WARNING: The Manufacturer has no responsibility

whatever, either direct or indirect, for application of spe-

cial filters and/or changes to the air intake system of the

cab. Every change to the cab intake system can result in

a health hazard for the operator and significantly alter the

performance of the air conditioning system. In any case,

the cab is not guaranteed as perfectly dust-tight. Always

wear individual protections when working in particularly

dusty environment.

IMPORTANT: before fitting the filter back, visually check

that the filter seals are not damaged. They must not be

bent or damaged in any way. Replace the complete filter

if required.

Protection level [6.3.2.b]

CAUTION: Tractors with cabs have no protection

against dangerous substances, but do have protection

against dust (protection level 2). If the tractor is used

to spray phytosanitary products or chemicals gener-

ally thought of as hazardous to health, the operator

must wear individual protections (mask) suitable to

the harmfulness of the actual product used.

Maintenance

7-83

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Air conditioning system

CAUTION: Never attempt to open the air conditioning system. Liquid refrigerant can cause severe and

painful frostbite. Contact your dealer, who is experienced in servicing and handling of refrigerants.

Air conditioned cab

Besides being able to provide an optimum temperature

in the cab, this system also lowers the degree of humid-

ity in the air.

Safety notes

The air conditioner is a safe system that is able to ensure

lasting and risk-free use. However, it is important to com-

ply with certain simple precautions (listed below) in order

to prevent possible accidents.

• Never work on the conditioning system yourselves.

Always contact the specialised technicians of the

Assistance Service.

• Keep naked flames well away from the air conditioning

system as leaking coolant could give rise to a deadly

gas: punzione..

• The mixture of oil and coolant in the air conditioning

system is under pressure.

Never ever loosen any unions or tamper with the

pipes.

For the same reason, you must never unscrew the

compressor's oil level check plug.

• Coolant can freeze the skin and particularly the eyes.

Proceed in the following way if accidents occur:

– if coolant has splashed into the eyes, wash them out

immediately with a few drops of mineral oil, then

continue to wash them with a solution of boric acid

and water (one teaspoon of acid in 1/4 of a cup of

water) and immediately seek medical help;

- areas frozen by coolant fluid can be treated by pro-

gressively warming the injured zone with cold water

and then applying a greasy cream.

However, always seek medical help if such accidents

occur.

•

Keep the air conditioning system well away from heat

sources as explosions could occur.

System check

The cab air conditioner is equipped with a system to

protect the compressor from high or low refrigerant

pressures.

Have your conditioning system checked once a year by

specialised personnel at your Dealer's.

DANGER: Always wear protective clothing in

case of leaks. Coolant can injury the eyes.

The coolant produces a toxic gas if it contacts

a flame.

7-84

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Periodical inspections

At least once every three months:

– remove any foreign bodies from between the evapora-

tor and condenser fins;

– check the tension of the compressor belt;

– allow the engine to run at a rate of 1500 rpm. In the

meantime keep the dehydrator filter under observation:

the glass should be clear, without air bubbles or white

liquid.

– check the conditions of the pipes, unions and support-

ing brackets;

– make sure that the drain pipes are efficient and remove

the condensation from the evaporator;

– make sure that the screws and fixing nuts of the pul-

leys and compressor are well tightened.

Maintenance

If the conditioning system remains unused for a long pe-

riod of time, it must be turned on for a few minutes each

month to allow the oil to circulate around the circuit and

to keep the seals in an efficient condition.

Only operate the conditioner when the engine is hot and

the temperature in the cab has reached 20°C.

Yearly maintenance

Have your Dealer's specialised personnel carry out the

following operations at the beginning of the season:

– check the level of the oil in the compressor and top it

up if necessary;

– make sure that the system is tight by means of a leak

tester and top up the HFC 134a gas if necessary, or

– replace the dehydrator filter only if strictly necessary;

– carry out a functional test on the system.

General maintenance of the cab

After servicing the outer parts of the cab, proceed with

the following inspections:

Periodically check to make sure that no water has col-

lected in the zones covered with mats or upholstery.

2. Protect the hinges and locks of the doors, sun roof

and openable windows with

water-repellent lubricating products.

3. Use special cleaning products to clean the windows,

or sulphuric ether, if necessary.

4. Detach the windscreen wiper and sprinkle talcum on

the rubber wiper.

5. Leave the doors or sun-roof partially open.

Washing the outside of the tractor

For a correct washing of the outside of the tractor, pro-

ceed as follows:

1. Disconnect any tools or implements to be cleaned

separately.

2. Close each window, side doors and the roof hatch

correctly.

3. Wash the outside of the tractor with a high-pressure

washer, with the following precautions:

- The water jet must hit the tractor with an angle between

45° and 90°.

- Adjust the pressure to maximum 30 bar.

- Keep a distance higher than 80 cm.

- Adjust the temperature to maximum 50° C.

Cab upholstery

WARNING: Use water and a neutral detergent to clean

the coatings, the controls and the PU dashboard. Any

commercial product to clean car interiors may be used

DO NOT use any products deriving from hydrocar-

bons, ketonic or aromatic solvents, or cleaning spirits

of any kind.

Specifications

Coolant fluid .........................................................R 134 A

Air conditioning system reloading

- Quantity of gas to be loaded: 1050 g (± 25 g)

- Keep the gas unit steady when filling the circuit, in

order to allow for a precise reading of the gas weight

in any moment.

- Operating pressure (20 bar).

IMPORTANT: This tractor uses a R134 coolant that does

not damage the ozone layer. Never recharge the air condi-

tioning system with refrigerant other than HERTZ-134a as

this will result in loss of cooling and permanent damage

to all air conditioning components.

Check the tension of the compressor belt as indicated in

the Routine Maintenance chapter.

DANGER: Wear safety garments and goggles

in case of leaks. Coolant can injury the eyes.

The coolant produces a toxic gas if it contacts

a flame.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.

WARNING: Service operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake

are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.

Maintenance

7-85

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.

WARNING: Service operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake

are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.

WARNING: beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [2.n]

Cleaning of viscous fan drive

– During cleaning and maintenance of the engine and

radiator, be careful not to cause damage to the viscous

fan drive.

– DO NOT restrict the fan blade rotation during engine

operation.

– DO NOT remove the bi-metal coil (1) on the front of

the drive.

– Check the fan and drive for external damage or erratic

operation. See your dealer if service is required.

Cleaning of operator and passenger

seats

Before removing stains, use a vacuum cleaner to remove

loose dirt.

Find what type and how old the stains are. Some stains

can be removed with water or soap solution.

CLEANER FLUID - This type of cleaner can be used for

grease or oil stains, follow manufactures instructions.

FOAM CLEANER: This type of cleaner is good for all

stains, follow manufactures instructions.

CAUTION: Never use petroleum spirit, naph-

tha or any other volatile material for any

cleaning purposes. These materials may be

toxic and/or flammable.

NOTE: Do not make the material wet or clean with a hard

brush. Clean with a damp cloth only. Immediately after the

material is clean, dry the material with dry cloth.

Dashboard and control coverings

WARNING: Use water and a neutral detergent to clean

the coatings, the controls and the PU dashboard. Any

commercial product to clean car interiors may be

used.

DO NOT use any products deriving from hydrocar-

bons, ketonic or aromatic solvents, or cleaning spirits

of any kind.

Functional test of the safety belts

CAUTION: Always securely fasten your safety

belt. Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab

or frame for your protection. The seat belt

can help insure your safety if it is used and

maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or

with slack in the belt system. Never wear the

belt in a twisted condition or pinched between

the seat structural members.

- Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage,

away from the belt.

- From time to time, check belt, buckles and mounting

bolts for damage.

- Replace all parts that are worn or damaged.

- Replace a belt that has cuts that can weaken the belt.

- Check that the bolts are tight on the seat bracket.

- Keep seat belt clean and dry.

- Clean belt only with a soap solution and warm water.

- Do not use bleach or dye on the belt because this can

make the belt weak.

General tractor inspection

Inspect the hoses and fittings for damage and leaks.

Check all hoses for damage and that hose clamps are

tight, correct torque is about 3.4 Nm.

Check all wiring for damage. If damaged, contact your

Dealer for the genuine Argo Tractors spare parts.

7-86

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Preparing for long idle periods

Take the following precautionary measures when your

tractor is not going to be used for a long period of time.

To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the

sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.

Always use specific personal safety devices for each

service operation.

park the tractor in a dry, sheltered place

- turn the master battery disconnector switch anticlock-

wise to deactivate it.

- drain, flush and fill the cooling system with the correct

antifreeze mixture to protect the tractor from the lowest

expected temperature.

- grease all points provided with grease nipples

- clean the fuel filter

- generally clean the tractor, particularly the bodywork

components. Protect the painted parts by applying

silicone wax and the unpainted metal parts by applying

protective lubricant. Park the tractor in a dry, sheltered

and possibly ventilated place

- make sure that all controls are in idle and/or neutral

position

- always remove the ignition key from the ignition switch

- make sure that the cylinder stems (of the power steer-

ing, hitch systems, etc.) are positioned

- empty the fuel tank and fill it with new diesel fuel until

the maximum level is reached

- the batteries do not need to be removed from the trac-

tor, except for extended storage (more than 30 days)

below freezing temperatures. The batteries must be

fully charged to prevent freezing. Disconnect the nega-

tive (-) ground cable at the batteries to prevent possible

discharge.

- for long idle periods, remove the battery, clean the cover

and spread Vaseline on the terminals and terminal caps.

Now place the battery in a ventilated place where the

temperature is not liable to drop below 10°C and where

it is not exposed to direct sunlight

- check the battery charge with a voltmeter as described

in the battery part of this section. Recharge if required

- store the tractor where there is protection from sunlight.

Clean the tyres

- place stands or other supports under the axles in order

to take the weight off the wheels. When the tractor is

raised in this way, it is advisable to deflate the tyres. If

this is not possible, the tyre pressure must be periodi-

cally checked.

- cover the tractor with a tarpaulin (not plastic or water-

proof).

WARNING: At the end of the idle period, when you

start the engine again, pay particular attention to the

instructions about starting the engine in the Opera-

tion chapter.

Removing the tractor from storage

WARNING: At the end of the idle period, when you

start the engine again, pay particular attention to the

instructions about starting the engine in the Opera-

tion chapter.

To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the

sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.

Always use specific personal safety devices for each

service operation.

- Open the fuel filter drain plug and remove contaminated

fuel. Close the drain plug.

- Top up the level of oil in the engine crankcase.

- Check the coolant level in the reservoir and radiator.

- Check that the batteries are fully charged.

- Connect the ground cable(s) (-) and tighten all terminals.

- Check the transmission/hydraulic fluid level and link-

ages.

- Check the front (if equipped) and rear hitch.

- Check and adjust the tension on all drive belts.

- Inflate the tyres to the correct operating pressures.

- Make sure that all shields and guards are in the correct

position.

- Do not accelerate the engine rapidly, or operate at high

RPM immediately after starting.

CAUTION: Before starting the engine, be sure

all operating controls are in neutral and the

park brake applied. This will eliminate acci-

dental movement of the machine on start-up

or power driven equipment.

CAUTION: Do not operate the engine in a

closed building. Always make sure that there

is adequate ventilation.

Maintenance

7-87

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fire prevention

To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the

sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.

Always use specific personal safety devices for each

service operation.

Fire risks can be minimised by frequent removal of accu-

mulated crop material, trash or debris from the machine.

Remove all crop material, trash or debris at the start of

each working day. Take extra care to make sure the engine

area and exhaust system are clean.

It is your responsibility to remove and/or clean your ma-

chine on a regular basis.

Fire risk can also be minimised by prompt repairing of

leaks and cleaning up fuel and oil spills.

Engine fuel is flammable and can cause a fire or an

explosion. DO NOT fill the fuel tank or service the fuel

system near an naked flame, welding, burning cigars,

cigarettes etc.

Sparks or flames can cause the hydrogen gas in a battery

to explode. To prevent an explosion, do the following:

- When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the

negative (-) cable first. When connecting the battery

cables, connect the negative (-) cable last.

- DO NOT connect jumper cables to start the engine. The

engine can be started ONLY by the ignition procedure

described in this manual.

- DO NOT short circuit the battery posts with metal

items.

- DO NOT solder or smoke near the battery.

Check the electrical system for loose, tampered with or

poorly insulated connections. Repair or replace the loose

or damaged parts.

Bleeding of left reservoir in the air

braking system (if equipped)

The reservoirs are provided with an automatic drain (1)

of condense water.

Before any service operation on the air braking system,

air in the system MUST be discharged by means of the

discharge valves in the air reservoirs.

If the tyres are replaced, always take care that a suitable

space is left to the tubes and reservoirs of the air braking

system to avoid any malfunctions.

7-88

Maintenance

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Electrical system

8-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 8

Electrical system

8-2

Electrical system

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

BATTERY

With a maintenance free battery (1 Fig.8-1), it is normally

not necessary to frequently check the electrolyte and

charge levels.

To check its charge, proceed as follows, with the engine

stopped, the battery at rest and cold, and the tractor

parked on level ground.

1. Turn the battery disconnector switch anti-clockwise,

to the “disconnected battery” position (1).

2. Open the bonnet.

3. Connect the voltmeter and check the battery status.

4. Recharge the battery.

5. Close the bonnet.

WARNING: Do not use acid to top up the bat-

tery. The electrolyte will boil over. Use only

deionised distilled water and top up to a level

of 5/6 mm over the battery cells.

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling.

Check the charge condition with a voltmeter. Do not use

quick battery chargers to recharge the batteries.

NOTE: if the battery must be topped up frequently or

tends to discharge, have the electric system of your trac-

tor checked by your authorized Argo Tractors Dealer’s

specialised personnel.

WARNING: Remember to disconnect the wires

before you recharge the battery. It is advisable

to remove the battery from its housing and to

recharge it well away from the tractor.

WARNING: The place in which the battery is

recharged must be well ventilated. Do not

smoke or work with tools liable to produce

sparks or flames whilst the battery is being

recharged.

[2.l]

NOTE: See the Maintenance section of this manual for a

description of battery replacement procedure.

WARNING: According to the Law it is mandato-

ry to dispose of batteries in suitable containers

provided to this purpose at authorised centres.

DO NOT dispose of them in the environment.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

Fig.8-1

Fig. 8-1A

Electrical system

8-3

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Recommendations [2.l]

The following rules must be respected to preserve an

efficient battery:

- Keep the battery clean and dry, particularly on top.

- If the battery acid must be topped up, use distilled water

only,

- Make sure that the cable terminal nuts are well fixed to

the battery terminals.

- Always use a wrench and not pliers to tighten and

loosen the terminal nuts.

- Smear terminals with petroleum jelly (not grease) to

protect them from oxidation.

- Never let the battery run completely down. If possible,

recharge monthly.

WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sul-

furic acid and can cause serious burns. The

following good practices are therefore recom-

mended.

- Wear leather heavy-duty gloves and protective

clothes. In case of contact with the skin, wash with

plenty of water.

- Batteries release flammable gases that can cause an

explosion.

- DO NOT go near the battery with naked flames or

cigarettes.

- In case of contact with the eyes, first flush with water,

then seek medical help.

- Keep batteries well out of children's reach.

- It contains lead: NEVER dispose of batteries in gen-

eral waste.

- Deliver and dispose of exhausted batteries only

in suitable containers provided to this purpose at

authorised centres, according to local rules.

NOTE: Proceed as described below when the old battery

must be replaced with a new one:

- Turn the master disconnect switch clockwise on OFF.

- first disconnect the terminal with the negative (-) sign

and then the one with the positive (+) sign;

- fit the new battery into its housing without tightening

the fixing screws too much;

- clean the terminals and connect them to the battery

poles. Make sure you connect the positive (+) pole

first and the negative (-) pole last;

- fully tighten the terminal screws on to the poles and

protect them with Vaseline.

Battery system servicing

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Follow these general rules to prevent damage to the

electrical system.

• Before working on the electrical system, disconnect

the battery cables, ground cable first, or turn off the

master switch and remove the key.

• Do not make a reverse battery connection.

• When you use an auxiliary battery for starting, connect

negative (-) to negative (-) and positive (+) to positive

(+). Use the auxiliary battery connections provided on

the tractor (if equipped).

• When charging the tractor batteries, use the auxiliary

battery connections on the tractor (if equipped). Do not

attach directly to the battery terminals. Do not use a

battery charging machine for starting the tractor.

• Never operate the tractor when the battery cables are

disconnected.

• When you carry out maintenance on the engine, cover

the alternator to prevent foreign material from entering.

• If electric welding is necessary, do the following to

protect the electrical components:

A. Disconnect the batteries or turn off the master

switch (if equipped).

B. Disconnect the instrument cluster harness.

C. Disconnect the alternator.

D. Disconnect all controllers and in particular the en-

gine controller.

Put the welding equipment ground cable as close as you

can to the weld area.

Do not put the ground cable where the current can flow

through bearings or along channels with wiring harnesses.

When batteries are no longer used

When the tractor is not used, the batteries should be

charged every six weeks to maintain their charges. The

battery will slowly discharge when it is not used. A dis-

charged battery may freeze at low temperatures, causing

damage to the tractor and to the battery itself.

NOTE:

Do not discard batteries along with normal waste as

they damage the environment. Contact your local selective

waste collection centre or your dealer for information about

how to dispose of batteries in the correct way.

8-4

Electrical system

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Electrical system - General warnings

It is absolutely forbidden to make changes or connections

to the data interconnecting lines between control units

(CAN-BUS lines). They are to be considered as INVIOLA-

BLE. All diagnostic and maintenance operations may only

be carried out by authorised technicians, with specific

appliances approved by Argo Tractors.

Use only fuses with the rated capacity for their specific

function. Do not ever use fuses with higher rated capacity.

Replace a blown fuse only after correcting the relative mal-

function and turn off any keys and users before replacing.

Please keep in mind that electrical systems made by un-

qualified persons might severely damage the systems on

board the tractor (control units, harnesses, sensors etc.),

and jeopardize the riding safety and good operation of

the tractor. Such damages ARE NOT COVERED BY OUR

CONTRACT WARRANTY.

Never disconnect control unit and sensor connectors

while the engine is running and the control units are

powered.

Negative conductors connected to a grounding point of

the system must be as short as possible and star con-

nected with each other.

As a principle, the grounding connections of the tractor

may not be changed.

If the creation of further grounding points is required, the

holes already provided on the frame must be used, taking

care of the following

- remove lacquer from the frame

- use a suitable highly conductive lacquer between frame

and cable terminal.

- connect the ground within 5 minutes from lacquer ap-

plication.

THE POINTS PROVIDED FOR ENGINE CONNECTION

TO GROUND MUST BE ABSOLUTELY AVOIDED FOR

GROUND CONNECTIONS - Fig.8-2

1- Ground connection; A. Efficient grounding point;

B. Not efficient grounding point.

2 - Cable fastening: A. Screw; B. Cable terminal; C.

Washer; D. Nut.

3- Correctly grounded cable.

Fig.8-2

Starter motor

The starter motor should be thoroughly cleaned after pe-

riods of 1000 hours or at least once a year. Particularly

check the condition of the brushes and collector.

Alternator

The alternator keeps the battery fully charged.

The alternator is a brushless model and requires no special

maintenance. However, the following precautions must

be observed.

1 - When fitting a battery, make sure that the positive

and negative terminals are connected to the same

leads as the alternator. If the battery terminals are

inverted, you will short circuit the battery through the

alternator diodes.

2 - When connecting the battery to a charger, make sure

that the positive (+) lead of the charger is connected

to the positive of the battery and the negative (-) to

the negative. Incorrect connection will damage the

diodes and the other circuit components.

3 - Never run the alternator unless it is properly con-

nected.

If the battery is not connected, high voltages can build

up inside the alternator that can be extremely danger-

ous if the output terminal is touched.

Make sure that all connections are firm and tight

before carrying out any inspections or tests on the

electrical system.

4 - Never short circuit or earth any of the alternator ter-

minals. This could damage the electrical system.

5 - Never invert the alternator connections. The battery

and alternator earths must be of the same sign or

the alternator diodes will be damaged.

6 - Always disconnect both alternator terminals before

undertaking any electric arc welding on the tractor.

CAUTION Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Electrical system

8-5

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Headlights

As you can use your tractor on public roads, the lighting

must comply with the applicable traffic and road regula-

tions. Periodically check headlight alignment in the fol-

lowing way:

Checking headlight alignment (Fig.8-4)

- Halt the tractor on level ground facing a shaded wall

(preferably white). The tractor must be unloaded and

the tyres correctly inflated. Mark two crosses on the

wall in front of the tractor headlight centres.

- Reverse the tractor 5 meters (16.4 ft) away from the

wall.

- Switch on the main beam.

The centre of each beam must be vertically aligned with

the crosses on the wall.

A maximum outward divergence of 130 mm (5 in) is

acceptable.

- Switch on the dipped beams.

The line separating the lighted area from the dark area

must fall below the crosses and must be separated

from their centres by at least 1/20th of the height of

the crosses from the ground.

- Adjust the headlight alignment screws to correct align-

ment as necessary (1-Fig.8-3).

Fig.6-3 - Screws for headlight alignment.

Fig.8-4 - Checking headlight alignment

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

8-6

Electrical system

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Replacement of bulbs in the head-

lights. Fig.8-5

1 - Remove the connector (3).

2 - Remove the rubber guard (2).

3 - Slacken off the retention spring (4).

4 - Remove the faulty bulb (1).

5 - Fit in a new bulb. Remember not to hold the bulb in

your hand. Use a cloth to handle the bulb whilst it is

being fitted.

6 - Fit the parts back in place by proceeding through the

instructions in reverse order.

How to replace the bulbs in the rear

side lights and hazard lights

1 - Loosen the screws (1 - Fig.8-6) and remove the glass

cover.

2 - Press the bulb inwards and turn it in the anti-clockwise

direction to replace it.

3 - Fit the glass again with the screws (1 - Fig.8-6).

Fig.8-5

How to replace the bulbs in the front

side lights and hazard lights - Fig.8-8

1 - Loosen the screws (1) and remove the glass cover.

2 - Replace the faulty bulb (2 or 3, Fig.8-8).

Press the bulb inwards and turn it in the anti-clockwise

direction to replace it.

3 - Fit the glass again with the screws (1).

Fig.8-8

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

Fig.8-6

Fig.8-7

Electrical system

8-7

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Field lights

Front - Fig.8-9

1. Turn the field light (1) to access the lamp to be replaced.

2. Rotate the lamp in a clockwise direction and remove it

3. Fit a new lamp (1). Remember not to touch the lamp

surface with your fingers.

4. Adjust the field light position as required.

Rear - Fig.8-10

1. Loosen the screws (1) and remove the glass cover.

2. Rotate the lamp in a clockwise direction and remove it

3. Fit a new lamp (2). Remember not to touch the lamp

surface with your fingers.

4. Fit the glass again with the screws (1).

Fig.8-10

Fig.8-9

8-8

Electrical system

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

FUSES AND RELAYS

The tractor’s electrical system is protected by fuses

against short circuits and excessive power draw. The

number of the fuses in the electrical system depends on

the tractor model.

The PDU box, with power fuses, is mounted in the front,

near the power battery.

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be

ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake,

remove the ignition key and disconnect the battery.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [2.n]

Fig.8-11A

Fig.8-12A

Position

User - Fig. 8-11A - Fig. 8-12A Amp.

FF1 Engine controller fuse 30

FF2 Fuse for controller power supply 20

FF3

AdBlue

™ pre-heaters power fuse

FF4 EBS socket fuse for trailer 25

FF5 Power fuse to engine accelerators sensors 5

FF6 Starter motor power fuse 20

FF7 Fuel pump fuse 20

FF8 Power fuse for Nox sensor SCR 15

AdBlue

™ quality sensor fuse

F3 Fuse for ceiling light and radio memory 10

Instrument cluster fuse (direct BUS BAR) - PDU

7.5

Glow plugs preheating fuse

100

Fuse for cab and roof users

125

Relay

Function - Fig. 8-11A

KF1 Fuel pump relay

KF2

AdBlue

™ control relay

KF3 Relay for control unit power supply

KF4 Starter motor relay

Electrical system

8-9

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fuses and relays

Main fuses and relays are installed in the dashboard line

wiring, in the control turret on the left side, under the

covering of the storage space. Remove the covering of

the storage space on the left side to access them. Loosen

the screw (1 - Fig.8-13A) and remove the glass cover.

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be

ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake

and remove the ignition key.

Fig.8-13A

Fuse User - Fig. 8-13A Amp.

FA1 Transmission controller fuse (key-operated) 7,5

FA2 Emergency switch fuse 15

FA3 Left sidelight fuse 5

FA4 Right sidelight fuse 5

FA5 Front field light fuse 10

FA6 High beam fuse 15

FA7 Low beams fuse 10

FA8 Air seat fuse 10

FB1 Turn indicator fuse 10

FB2 Brake lights and diff lock sol.valve fuse 10

FB3 Fuse for field lights on bonnet 15

FB4 Turn indicator fuse (NAO setup) 7,5

FB5 Not used -

FB6 Fuse for trailer hydraulic and air braking 5

FB7 Controller fuse CAN/ISO 11786 10

FB8

Fuse for key-operated right covering auxiliary

socket

FC1

Fuse direct power supply to auxiliary socket

right covering

FC2 4WD fuse 5

FC3 Fuse for rotary beacon 15

FC4

Fuse for marker lights, horn, flash coil of the

high and low beams

FC5 Ignition key block fuse 20

FC6 Ignition lock relay fuse 5

FC7 Key-operated instrument fuse 7,5

FC8 Electronic hitch fuse 7,5

FD1 Rear roof field light fuse 10

FD2

Front+rear window washer fuse - front+rear

window wiper + radio

FD3

Transmission controller fuse (direct from

battery)

7,5

FD4 Key-operated EBS socket fuse 10

FD5 Front PTO fuse 5

FD6

Fuse for auxiliary and key-operated relays for

front hitch line

FD7 Cigarette lighter fuse 10

FD8 Not used -

FE1 Rear hydraulic valve system fuse 7,5

FE2 ISOBUS power fuse 10

FE3

Fuse for supply to satellite autoguide an-

tenna

FE4 Suspended axle fuse (direct from battery) 10

FE5 Suspended axle fuse (key operated) 5

FE6 Trailer brake controller fuse (direct from battery) 10

FE7 Not used -

FE8 Rear LED field lights fuse 10

8-10

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

7.5 A

15 A

5 A

10 A

15 A

10 A

20 A

7.5 A

5 A

10 A

5 A

POSITION

LIGHT

25 A

15 A

10 A

25 A

5 A

7.5 A

10 A

15 A

5 A

10 A

T.C.

POSITION

LIGHT

STOP

NAO

11786

CAN/ISO

CONTR.

12V

00000

KEY ON

CLUSTER

HITCH

FUSE

FREE

25 A

START

7.5 A

10 A

5 A

10 A

FUSE

FREE

5 A

10 A

EBS

10 A

+12V

KEY 12

BATTERY

7.5 A

LOCK

PARK

20 A

30 A

3 A

7.5 A

FAN AIR FAN AIR FAN AIR FAN AIR

FUSE

FREE

FUSE

FREE

FUSE

FREE

FUSE

FREE

FUSE

FREE

FUSE

FREE

T.C.

RPM x 100

1/2

4/4

125

540

540E

Electrical system

8-11

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fuses and relays (cab roof line)

(Fig. 8-13A)

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be

ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake

and remove the ignition key.

Fuse User - Fig. 8-13A Amp.

FG1 Fan fuse (pos. 1). 20

FG2 Fan fuse (pos. 2). 30

FG3 Fan fuse, left (pos. 3). 30

FG4 Fan fuse, right (pos. 3). 30

FG5 Fuse for key-operated power supplies on roof 3

FG6 A/C compressor fuse 7.5

Relays Function - Fig. 8-13A

KA1 Park Lock relay

KA2 Relay for low beams on bonnet

KA3 PTO stationary control relay

KA4 Auxiliary relay

KB1 Brake pedals control relay

KB2 Auxiliary relay

KB3 Differential lock self-retaining relay

KB4 Auxiliary relay

KC1 Immobiliser relay

KC2

Hand brake enabling relay, trailer air and hydraulic

braking system

KD2 Relay for high beams on bonnet

KD3 Relay for diverter valve control

KD4 Auxiliary relay for users on roof

KE1 Right brake pedal relay

KE2 Left brake pedal relay

KE3 Relay for 4WD engagement with brake pedals

KE4 Trailer brake controller relay

Relays Function - Fig. 8-13A

KG1 Fan relay (pos. 1).

KG2 Fan relay (pos. 2).

KG3 A/C compressor relay

KH1 Fan relay, left (pos. 3).

KH2 Fan relay, right (pos. 3).

Relay to manage the AdBlue™ system

The relays in the following table are used to manage the

AdBlue® system. They are mounted on the left side, near

the diesel fuel and AdBlue™ tanks. Remove the relative

protective cover to access the relays.

Relays Function - Fig. 8-13B

KI1

Relay enabling AdBlue

™ heaters

KI2

Relay for power to AdBlue

™ heaters

KI3

Relay to AdBlue

™ heater 1

KI4

Relay to AdBlue

™ heater 2

KI5

Relay to AdBlue

™ heater 3

Fig.8-13B

8-12

Electrical system

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

7-pin power socket for trailer

A 7-pole power socket is installed on the rear of the trac-

tor (1 - Fig.8-14). This socket is used to connect the light

circuits of the trailer.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

Connections (Fig.8-15)

1. Left turn indicator; 2. Not used; 3. Earth; 4. Right turn

indicator; 5. Rh rear side light; 6. Brake lights; 7. Lh rear

side light.

Connections and correspondences for 7-pole

power socket according to ISO-SAE standards

(Fig.8-15).

1. Left turn indicator.

2. Not used (Fog lights - if equipped);

3. Ground;

4. Right turn indicator;

5. Rh rear side light;

6. Brake lights.

7. Lh rear side light.

Connections in versions for North America:

1. Ground;

2. Rear field light;

3. Left turn indicator;

4. Battery positive;

5. Right turn indicator;

6. Parking lights;

7. 12 Volts key operated.

In the set-ups with front hitch, a 7-pole electric socket can

be mounted as an option for the trailer onto the radiator

core support (Fig. 8-15a).

Fig.8-14

Fig.8-15 View of 7-pin socket, cable insertion side

Fig. 8-15a

Electrical system

8-13

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

EBS power socket for trailer diagnosis

(ISO 7638) (if equipped)

In the rear part of a tractor a further “EBS” power socket

(1) can be fitted to standard ISO 7638, to connect the

diagnostic system of the trailer.

By the connection to the EBS socket (1) on the tractor, the

diagnostic system of the trailer will alert of any malfunc-

tion in the trailer.

Any malfunction will be signalled to the operator by the

alarm light

on the instrument cluster.

Should this indicator come up, immediately refer to your

authorized Argo Tractors Dealer.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. beware of burns caused by hot tractor

and engine parts. [2.n]

WARNING: when inspecting the area of the three-point

hitch and of the trailer brake hitch, e.g. to view how the

connected implements are operating, it is mandatory

to keep a safety distance from these organs. No opera-

tion must be carried out that can be dangerous for

you or any other bystander. Maximum priority should

be given to the safety of all persons near the tractor.

Fig. 8-16

8-14

Electrical system

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 8-17

ISO socket (to standard ISO 11783)

(if equipped)

The socket (1) is mounted on the rear side outside the cab.

It allows exchange of information between an implement

(e.g. a controller) and the tractor according to international

standard ISO 11783.

In the cab a further socket ISOCAB can be mounted, on

the left side, also to ISO 11783.

NOTE: Always read the operator's manual supplied by the

manufacturer of the connected implement. Also view and

follow all safety warnings before using the implement.

NOTE: The TECU controller (Tractor Electronic Control Unit)

on this tractor is approved according to AEF standards.

Electrical system

8-15

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Fig. 8-18

Fig. 8-20

Fig. 8-19

Diagnostic connectors

The power sockets for diagnosis of any alarms in the trac-

tor are located on the left-hand side, just under the lining

of the storage space, near the main fuse box.

Remove the covering of the storage space on the left

side to access them.

Loosen the screw (1 - Fig.8-18) and remove the lining.

1. Transmission diagnosis power socket (interface to

DIAG4 Argo Tractors)

2. Engine diagnostic power socket.

NOTE: these sockets are exclusively reserved to the

specialized personnel of your Argo Tractors Dealer. It is

forbidden to connect other unauthorized equipment to

these sockets, to avoid damaging the electric and elec-

tronic circuits and the relative components of the tractor.

ISO sockets (if provided)

On the left side of the console, the following ISO sockets

can be mounted as an option:

1. ISO socket (to standard ISO 11786)

2. ISO socket (to standard ISO 11783)

For more information about the function of these sockets,

refer to section 3 “Controls - Cab” in this manual.

8-16

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Specifications - Alphabetical index

9-1

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Section 9

Specifications

Alphabetical index

ARGO TRACTORS constantly updates its range of products and

therefore reserves the right to undertake modifications, if appropri-

ate ad necessary, without prior notice.

All data and information contained in this publication could be

subject to changes.

Dimensions and weights are only approximate values and the

equipment shown by the pictures could not correspond to standard

models.

Precise data and information about models and equipment are

available at your ARGO TRACTORS Dealer.

9-2

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS OF TRACTOR

IMPORTANT: The dimensions and weights shown on the following pages are only approximate. They depend on many

factors, such as: tyre size, ballast, amount of fuel, tyre pressure etc.

Fig. 9-1

The above mentioned weights and dimensions are rough values, as they may change according to tyres.

NOTE: Overall width of the tractor may change according to the type of axle and to the rear track width setting.

NOTE: (only for UE Member States): An overall width over 2500 mm (8 feet) MAY REQUIRE local authorization for use on

the highway. For an overall width over 3000 mm (10 feet) a local authorization is MANDATORY.

General specifications of model

X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Setup with

wide axle

Setup with

narrow axle

Weights

In running order, without ballast and without front

hitch (with driver and full levels and tanks)..........

kgs 4600 ÷ 4670

In running order, without ballast and with front

hitch (with driver and full levels and tanks)

kgs 4850 ÷ 5000

Dimensions

A. Height to cab roof .......................................... mm 2605 ÷ 2655

B. Wheelbase ...................................................... mm 2420

C. Max. length with front ballast ......................... mm 4552

Max. length without front ballast weights ...... mm 4256

D. Ground clearance (under front axle) ............... mm 437÷487

E. Min. - max. width* .......................................... mm 1763 ÷ 2500

F. Front track ...................................................... mm

See tracks table on page 6-12

G. Rear track ....................................................... mm

H. Height from rear wheel axis to cab roof (set-up

with rigid cab)

mm 1900

H. Height from rear wheel axis to cab roof (set-up

with suspended cab)

- in neutral middle position

- in max height position

1950

1985

* for road driving, see note hereunder

9-3

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

ENGINE

X6.35 X6.45 X6.55

ENGINE

Tier 4 final DEUTZ-AG DEUTZ-AG DEUTZ-AG

ISO max. power rating hp/kW 110 / 81 119 / 88 126 / 93

ISO rated power rating hp/kW 105 / 77 113 / 83 120 / 88

Rated speed RPM 2200 2200 2200

Maximum torque Nm 440 476 500

Maximum torque rate rpm 1600 1600 1600

Bore/stroke mm 98 / 120 98 / 120 98 / 120

Swept volume (cm

) / cylinders n./ valves n. 3600 / 4 TA 3600 / 4 TA 3600 / 4 TA

Exhaust system S.C.R. + D.O.C. • • •

Air Intake System

Air filter Two dry elements, with dust ejector (if installed)

Engine cooling system

Type Pressure system, thermostat controlled bypass, centrifugal type pump

Radiator In-line Tube and Fin Type

Radiator cap pressure ............................................................................................................................................. 1.03 bar

Fan drive type Viscous

Engine fuel system

Fuel injectors .............................................................................................................................................................. Bosch

Fuel primer pump ...................................................................................................................................................Electrical

Water trap and drain location ................................................................................................................Bottom of fuel filter

Cold starting aid .............................................................................................................................................Thermostarter

9-4

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

General Specifications

Type of system ..................................................................................................................................... 12 V, negative ground

Battery (cold climate) .......................................................................1 12 V battery, 950 A (peak value) 95 Ah (rated value)

Standard battery , maintenance free type .....................................1 12 V battery, 850 A (peak value) 105 Ah (rated value)

Main battery disconnecting switch in the cab, on the left side of the control turret

Alternator............................................................................................................................................................. 12 V / 120 A

Voltage regulator ................................................................................................................................. 12 V, part of alternator

Starter motor, with solenoid switch ....................................................................................................................12 V, 3.2 kW

Auxiliary sockets

1 7-pin socket for trailer lights (rear): ......................................equipped for directional turn lamps, brake lamps, tail lamps

1 7-pin trailer lights socket (front - if equipped):..................................equipped for directional turn lamps, brake lamps, tail

lamps

1 3-pin cab socket: ..........................................................................................................................................................12 V

1 EBS trailer socket (ISO 7638), outside on the rear (option) ..........................................................................................12 V

1 ISO socket (ISO 11786) (optional) (in the cab) .............................................................................................................12 V

ISOBUS connection (ISO 11783) (optional): socket in cab .............................................................................................. 12 V

9-5

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

NOTE: These specifications are purely indicative and not comprehensive of all possible cases. The given specifications

are of a general character. For technical specifications of each market, please refer to the information material supplied

by your authorised Argo Tractors Dealer.

WARNING: To drive the tractor on public roads, it is mandatory to abide by the laws in force

in the country where the tractor is being used, including the dictated speed limit and the

correct use of lights, hazard light and slow moving vehicle signs.

When driving on public roads, it is also mandatory to use the tractor with the brake pedals

coupled with the relative latch.

TRANSMISSION

The gearbox is available with a number of different options, allowing the user to choose the combination most able to

meet his specific needs.

Number of speeds Speed

HML (High-Medium-Low) and

reverse shuttle

Park Lock available as option

without creeper 36AV + 12RM 40ECO kph - 50* kph

with creeper 48AV + 16RM 40ECO kph - 50* kph

Shuttle command

Park Lock available as option

without creeper

without creeper 12FWD+12REV speeds 40ECO kph - 50* kph

with creeper 16AV + 16RM 40ECO kph - 50* kph

* if available according to tractor configuration

WARNING: The driver is always responsible of the selected gear in any situation, specially when operating on

steep slopes or towing trailers.

CLUTCH UNIT

Number of clutches 4

Disc number 6 oil cooled

Control (each clutch) Electro-hydraulic

NOTE: All models are equipped with a potentiometer to adjust the engagement speed of electro-hydraulic clutches.

9-6

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Rear axle

Rear axle with bevel gear pair and epicyclical rear final

drives.

Interflange: .................................................. 1659.50 mm

Bevel gear pair: .......................................49/11 = 4.4545

Rear final drives: .........................................................6.6

Total reduction ratio: ...........................................29.4000

Front and rear axle ratio

Rigid axle ................................... ........................... 1.3679

Differential lock

Rear differential lock with electro-hydraulic control and

hydraulic engagement.

The diff lock is disengaged by means of the brake pedals.

Front and rear differential locking takes place at the same

time by means of the Twin-Lock system in four-wheel

drive tractors.

Power take-off [3.d]

Independent operation.

Engagement by means of hydraulic clutch with electro-

hydraulic control through cab switch.

Available in the following layouts:

Two speeds:

1st Type: 540/540ECO rpm

2nd Type: 540/1000 rpm.

With four speeds:

3rd Type: 540/540ECO/1000/1000ECO

PTO speed rate - Engine rate for all configurations:

PTO version

2 speeds 4 speeds

PTO type Engine rate PTO type Engine rate

540 1944 540 1944

540E 1377 540E 1580

1000 1917 1000 1952

1000E 1586

Different PTO output shafts are available for independent

PTO according to A.S.A.E. standards

- 1 3/8" (34.9 mm) diameter shaft with 6 splines.

- 1 3/8" (34.9 mm) diameter shaft with 21 splines.

NOTE: before replacing the PTO output shaft, the speed

selection lever must be shifted to the neutral position.

Never force the engagement of a new PTO shaft. The

substitution must be smooth and gradual.

Synchronized ground drive PTO mode engaged

(optional)

Speed rate in the synchro mode (PTO shaft revolutions

for each turn of the rear wheel):

PTO rpm ratio (with 2-speed PTO)

9,800 rpm with Power take-off at 540 rpm

13,835 rpm with Power take-off at 540E rpm

18,407 rpm with Power take-off at 1000 rpm

PTO rpm ratio (with 4-speed PTO)

9,800 rpm with Power take-off at 540 rpm

12,057 rpm with Power take-off at 540E rpm

18,078 rpm with Power take-off at 1000 rpm

22,242 rpm with Power take-off at 1000E rpm

PTO engagement and selection by a hand lever on the

left side of the seat.

9-7

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Rear brakes

Multiplate oil-cooled brakes mounted on rear differential

transaxles.

Number of friction discs: 2 (1 each side)

Friction material ....................................................... N670

Hydraulic braking control by means of two pedals located

at driver's right. The two pedals can be coupled by a

locking device to provide simultaneous braking action

on both sides.

Parking brake controlled by a hand lever and independent

control wire, by direct control on a multiplate oil-cooled

brake (6 plates) mounted on the 4WD shaft.

Plates in sintered bronze.

Hydraulic trailer brake mounted on request.

Air trailer brake mounted on request.

Front axle

In spheroidal cast iron, pivoting at the centre within two

supports

Front drive engaging control, electro-hydraulic by hydraulic

clutch.

Spring-on - Pressure off type.

Drive shaft mounted on the longitudinal axis

• without universal joints (setup with rigid axle)

Transmission via central differential and epicyclical final

drives in wheel hubs.

Maximum steering angle ............................................55°

'Twin-Lock' diff lock with electro-hydraulic control as

standard. Diff lock is engaged simultaneously with rear

diff lock. The diff lock is disengaged by means of the

brake pedals.

Front interflange:

1687 mm (setup with narrow axle)

1887 mm (setup with wide axle)

Distance between spindles

• Setup with wide axle 1530 mm

• Setup with narrow axle 1330 mm

Reduction ratios:

Bevel gear pair ............................................8/31=3.8750

Epicyclic final drives .......................... 15/15+63=5.2000

Total reduction .....................................................20.1500

9-8

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Track adjustment

To adjust the track widths that can be got for both front

and rear axle, see the tables in section 6 of this manual

(Tyres - Wheels - Ballast).

Power steering system

Power steering controlled by the steering wheel.

Telescopic steering column, adjustable in height and tilt.

Gear pump with flow rate 38 l/min at 2200RPM engine

rate.

Paper filter on delivery line.

Double-acting balanced steering cylinder mounted on

axle housing.

Max. operating pressure in power steering system .........

.........................................150±5 bar

Steering radius without braking, 4WD: ............ 5200mm

Single steering pump, mounted on engine (setup with

piston pump).

9-9

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Setup with gear pump

Two-stage hydraulic gear pump powered directly by the gears of the timing system.

wire mesh filter on the intake: 100 micron

pump flow rate (high flow stage): 66 l/min with engine at 2200 rpm.

It supplies:

The hydraulic trailer brake, max. operating pressure:

- Italy type “Cuna”, 130±10 bar

- for "EEC” markets, 140±10 bar

- According to the prescriptions of the REGULATION (EU) n. 167/2013, 140±10 bar

- suspended axle (if provided)

- The auxiliary control valves, max. operating pressure 190±5 bar

- The hydraulic hitch, max. operating pressure 190±5 bar

pump flow rate (low flow stage): 38 l/min with engine at 2200 rpm

Paper filter on delivery line: 15 micron

It supplies:

- The power steering circuit, max. differential operating pressure 150±5 bar

- low pressure circuit (21±1 bar) including HML gearbox, 4WD, hydraulic PTO, hydraulic PTO brake and differential

lock

- oil cooling circuit, max. pressure 9.5±1 bar

- transmission lubrication circuit, max. pressure. 7±1 bar

Electronically controlled hitch

It controls draft, position and, in the 'Intermix' mode, both

draft and position. Also operates in float mode.

Control system................................................. Electronic

Control type...........................................Electro hydraulic

Draft control by means of 2 sensors fitted to the lower

links of the three point linkage.

Operating voltage...................................................12 volt

9-10

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Three-point linkage [3.g]

Cat. 2 three-point linkage with side stabilisers to regulate

horizontal swing of the implements.

Rh vertical rod with adjuster crank or optional hydraulic

adjuster ram.

Left vertical rod adjustable by a crank and two-position

bottom end: one is fixed, the other one sliding.

Lower links with quick couplings.

Top link with quick hitch mechanism, optional hydraulic

adjuster ram.

Three-point linkage operated by a simple-acting ram,

diam. 100 mm, coupled to two auxiliary cylinders, 60

mm diameter.

Max. lifting capacity at the ends of lower rods in horizontal

position:

• with 2 auxiliary cylinders, 60 mm diameter (max. pres-

sure 200 bar) (if equipped) 6000 kg

Auxiliary control valves

Open centre auxiliary control valves with quick 'Push-Pull'

attachments (with gear pump).

The auxiliary control valves use the hydraulic hitch pump:

the max. operating pressure is thus 200 bar.

NOTE: Ask your Argo Tractors Dealer for complete setups

of auxiliary control valves.

Cab

Cab and platform tested to OECD international standards.

Noise level complies with EEC standards.

Platform completely supported on Silent-Block dampers

and cab in pressed structural steel with isothermal blue-

tinted glass panes.

Heating, ventilation and air conditioning.

Openable roof with ample visibility upwards.

Cab is available with mechanical suspension by means

of spring shock absorber.

Optional extras

- Open-centre auxiliary control valves, complete with hy-

draulic hoses and 'Push-Pull' couplings. Various types

available.

- Trailer hydraulic brakes (available compliant to CUNA,

CEE, Regulation 167/2013)

- Air braking system for trailer.

- Two-speed hydraulic power take-off 540/540ECO rpm

as alternative to 540/1000 rpm

- Four-speed (540, 540ECO, 1000, 1000E rpm) hydraulic

power take-off.

- Power take-off proportional to ground speed to oper-

ate self-propelled trailers (on request and according

to market).

- 1” 3/8 (34.9 mm) PTO shaft with 21 splines.

- Front axle ballast weights: 6-10 cast iron weights each

weighing 36 kg.

- Ballast weights on rear wheels, 4 cast iron rings for each

wheel, 45 kg each.

- Seat adjustable in height and horizontally.

- Second passenger seat.

- Front fenders (according to market)

- Three-point linkage, with hydraulic right link rod.

- Front PTO and integrated front hitch.

- Ejector to expel dirt from the engine air filter connected

to the engine exhaust.

9-11

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

MP3/WMA player Radio (MW AM)

Signal/noise ratio > 55 dB Frequency range 520 kHz- 1,710 kHz

Channel separation > 55 dB (1 kHz) Sensitivity ≤30 dB µV (S/N=26dB)

Frequency response 20 Hz- 20 kHz

Compatible formats MP3/WMA - ID3 Front AUX-IN input

Frequency response 20 Hz- 20 kHz

Radio (FM) Sensitivity 775 mV

Frequency range 65 MHz- 108 MHz Impedance 20 kOhm

Sensitivity ≤12 dB µV (S/N=26dB)

Stereo separation ≥25 dB (1 kHz) General information

Signal/noise ratio ≥50 dB Power 12V cc (10.8V - 15.6V)

Channel spacing 50 kHz Speaker impedance 4 Ohm - 8 Ohm

Output power 40W x 4 channels

Radio (Weatherband - USA only) Fuse 15 A

Frequency ranges Band of 162.4-162.55 Mhz

Sensitivity ≤10 dB µV

Area

FM / MHz AM / MHz

Notes

Start Start

Spacing /

kHz

Start Start Spacing

Europe 87.5 108 50 522 1620 9 -

USA 87.5 107.9 200 530 1710 10 WB available

Oirt 65 74 10 522 1620 9 -

Japan 76 90 100 522 1629 9 -

Middle East 87.5 108 100 531 1602 9 -

Latin Am. 87.5 108 100 520 1620 10 -

Australia 87.5 108 100 522 1710 9 -

Asia 87.5 108 100 531 1602 9 -

FM only 87.5 108 50 - -

Radio specifications

9-12

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Tractors with rigid cab

Commercial model

Noise level in the cockpit

dBA

Noise level when driving

dBA

Closed doors Open doors

X6.35 83 84 84

X6.45 83 84 84

X6.55 83 84 84

THE FOLLOWING TABLES GIVE THE NOISE LEVEL VALUES,

MEASURED FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT IN INSTANTANEOUS CONDITIONS

CONFORMITY TO UE 2018/830 (ANNEX XIII).

Noise levels as perceived by the operator [4]

Tractors with suspended cab

Commercial model

Noise level in the cockpit

dBA

Noise level when driving

dBA

Closed doors Open doors

X6.35 74 77 84

X6.45 74 77 84

X6.55 74 77 84

9-13

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

WARNING: The vibration level transmitted

to the body as a whole depends on different

parameters, some of them relating to the ma-

chine, others to the terrain, others to the type

of work and to any connected machine and

many specific for the operator. The prevailing

parameters are the type of terrain or work sur-

face, the ground speed and the type of work.

WARNING:

Machine vibrations are transmitted to the

operator, who in some cases may undergo

risks for his/her health and safety. Therefore

you must:

- Make sure that the tractor is in good condi-

tion and that all routine servicing is correctly

and regularly carried out.

- Check that the operator's seat and adjust-

ment systems are in good condition, then ad-

just the seat to the operator's weight and size.

- Evaluate the vibration level transmitted to

the operator from the tractor or from the

tractor-machine assembly and schedule work

hours so as to alternate suitable rest periods

concerning exposure to vibrations.

IMPORTANT: More information on Whole Body Vibra-

tion (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found in more

specific publications. In order to correctly estimate values

based on your daily work on the tractor, a specific measure

instrument is required, such a three-axis accelerometer

applied to the seat.

NOTE: Visit the dedicated Internet web sites for further

information and documentation on risks of whole body

vibration.

INFORMATION PAGE ON VIBRATION LEVELS OF THE TRACTOR

DANGERS RELATIVE TO EXPOSITION TO VIBRATIONS [2.a][2.ah][5]

In compliance to EU Directive 2018/830 (Annex XIV) the following table shows vibration levels measured on seats, in aws.

* aws = correct weighted value of the vibration acceleration (m/s

Seat type

Vibrations * m/s

(at the applied test weights)

Light-weight operator Heavy-weight operator

Cobo MT SC79M200 aws* = 1,22 m/s

aws* = 1,06 m/s

Grammer MSG93/721 aws* = 1,21 m/s

aws* = 1,05 m/s

9-14

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Issue of authorization

To install any type of mounted or semi-mounted equipment not provided for by road traffic laws, it is mandatory to request

the express written authorization of the vehicle manufacturer.

We insist at any rate on our recommendation to mount always exclusively CE marked equipment complying with the

Machinery Directive 2006/42/CE.

Masses [3.m]

Maximum weight declared by manufacturer for road circulation

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the maximum load bearing capacity of the tyres used. Consult the payloads and inflation

pressures suggested by the type manufacturers for further details.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceeds the load on the axles and the maximum weight of the tractor established by the pertinent

laws when driving the tractor on public roads.

Maximum weight permitted for the tractor

MAXIMUM WEIGHT permitted for the tractor, including the tractor itself, the implements and ballast.

The MAXIMUM WEIGHT allowed for each axle includes the tractor, the implements, the ballast and any implements

coupled to the three-point hitch.

Model *Front kg Rear kg Total kg

X6.35 X6.45 X6.55

(setup with narrow axle)

3300 5000 8000

X6.35 X6.45 X6.55

(setup with wide axle)

3800 5000 8500

* The given values are for set-up with both rigid and suspended axle.

DO NOT use the tractor with a load on the front axle that is less than 25% or more than 55% of the total weight.

9-15

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

* capacity including reserve and not used up volume.

** setup with narrow axle

*** setup with wide axle

**** Before carrying out any maintenance operation on the air conditioning system, refer to the indications in the section 7 of this

manual, at the “General maintenance” chapter.

(1) Argo Tractors specifications define additives and anti-noise properties. The use of different types of oil, or mixing other types of oil

into the oil supplied with the tractor can lead to increased noise.

(2) Add further 2 Lt max. with front hitch. Add further 2 Lt max. with front loader.

(3) Use ONLY synthetic products such as AdBlue™ or equivalent products, complying with the relevant international standards as

indicated by the chart, with the AdBlue™ mark on their labels. If dissolved products are used (urea prills dissolved in demineralised

water), the guarantee on the injection system of AdBlue™-DEF system and its components will become null and void.

Such system is identified in the European markets as AdBlue™ fluid injection system, in the USA ad DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid), in

Brazil as ARLA32.

(4) IMPORTANT: if the machine is operated in cold climates, replace this oil with a different of with a less viscous grade (Vela B or Vela C).

LUBRICANTS AND FUELS

COMPONENT

Q.ty litres

SPECIFICATI-

ONS

AMBIENT

TEMPERATURE

LUBRICANT

SPECIFICATIONS

X6.35

X6.45

X6.55

Cooling

COOLIND (6)

MUREX Concentrated antifreeze to be used in the following

percentages.

See table 1 in the next page

TANK CAPACITY

FUEL (about)

150

Viscosity at 40°C Viscosity at 100°C

ASTM method D445

/s mm

RESERVOIR AdBlue™ or DEF

(3)

19.6*

DIN70070

ISO22241

ANY TEMPERATURE

AdBlue

™ (3)

— —

ENGINE 9

ACEA E9

API CJ-4

CAT ECF-3

ANY TEMPERATURE

SOLEA

LD9 15W40

67 11.7

POWER STEERING CIRCUIT

AND TRANSMISSION HOUS-

ING (2) (5)

61 API GL - 4 ANY TEMPERATURE VELA C+ 56.0 9.3

FRONT AXLE -

MIDDLE BODY (1)

6.6** - 7.6*** API GL - 4 ANY TEMPERATURE

VELA B

(axle with brakes)

88.0 11.9

VELA C+

(axle without brakes)

56.0 9.3

FRONT AXLE FINAL DRIVES

(each side) (1) (4)

1.6 API GL - 5 ANY TEMPERATURE CARINA 80W-90 134 14.4

GREASING POINTS — — ANY TEMPERATURE

GENA GREASE

— —

FRONT POWER TAKEOFF (if

equipped)

0.5 API GL-4 ANY TEMPERATURE

VELA

UNIVERSAL

62 9.2

COOLANT FLUID

****

1,050 Kg

(±25 g)

R 134 A

— — — —

9-16

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Table 1

Quick reference guide

in the following percentages:

Ambient temperature

(°C)

-7 -10 -14 -18 -23 -28 -33 -38

Ambient temperature

(°F)

19 14 7 0 -9 -18 -27 -36

Antifreeze percent

Murex%

15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

(5) WARNING: When working on steep slopes, oil level in the transmission MUST BE AT LEAST AT THE MAXIMUM DRAW LEVEL

indicated by the dipstick. Otherwise, top up with oil of the specified type through the plug.

(6) IMPORTANT: use MUREX as anti-freeze after correctly mixing it with distilled water, according the quantities indicated in the table

below. Never use tap water, rain water or well water to avoid problems connected to pollution.

If a wrong mix is used, Argo Tractors will take no responsibility for any damages.

To top up, do not pour distilled water into the cooling system. Top up only with correctly diluted MUREX, according the quantities

indicated in the table below.

Never use plain water as coolant.

Always check the protection level of the mix before winter.

NOTE: In special weather conditions, e.g. low temperatures, always ask you Argo Tractors Dealer for specific indications on correct use

of oils and fuels. The use of materials not approved by Argo Tractors exempts the company from any responsibilities.

9-17

Specifications

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

96.5

115

445

60 90

110

4+4 HOLES M20

Implement attachment points (set-up with rigid axle) . Dimensions in mm [6.1.2]

M18x1.5

6 HOLES M18x1.5

Ø325

8 HOLES M18x1.5

ENGINE AXIS

2+2 HOLES M16

DEPTH 25

2+2 HOLES M16

DEPTH 25

4 HOLES M16

DEPTH 25

13 M16x2

DEPTH 31

2 PLUGS Ø16

DEPTH 17

4 HOLES M16

THROUGH

8 HOLES M18x1.5

Ø152.2

WHEEL CENTRE

4+4 HOLES M16

DEPTH 25

406

ENGINE AXIS

322

250

320 920

478.1

414

300

260

= =

840 680.8

2420

1500

75.6

111

9.4

= =

100

105

180

285

548

Ø284

WHEEL CENTRE

662

105

4 HOLES M16

DEPTH 25

= =

1659.5

M18x1.5

Ø203.2

PUMPREAR

ENGINE AXIS

AXLE VERSION “A”

NARROW 1687

WIDE 1887

The installation of frames to support and reinforce equipment must be carried out using the attachment points provided on the tractor,

as given in the Operation and Maintenance manual. In case of particularly demanding combined front and rear installation, it is manda-

tory to have a connection by means of suitable reinforcing struts between the relative support frames.

9-18

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Implement attachment points (set-up with suspended axle) . Dimensions in mm [6.1.2]

The installation of frames to support and reinforce equipment must be carried out using the attachment points provided on the tractor,

as given in the Operation and Maintenance manual. In case of particularly demanding combined front and rear installation, it is manda-

tory to have a connection by means of suitable reinforcing struts between the relative support frames.

440

285 105

434

130

616

= =

1887

180

440

1659.5

= =

30°

40°

30°

20°

Ø245

Ø325

Ø203.2

8 HOLES M18x1.5

ENGINE AXIS

12 HOLES M14

4 HOLES M16x32

152.2 WHEELS CENTERING

WHEELS CENTERING Ø285

4 HOLES M16

2 THROUGH HOLES M16

2 HOLES M16x32

4 HOLES M20

11 HOLES M16x38

2 HOLES M16

Ø335

6 HOLES M18x1.5

= =

FRONT VIEW OF ENGINE-GEARBOX ASSEMBLY

CONNECTION SIDE FINAL DRIVE TO GEARBOX HOUSING

147

9.4

5875

140

115

360

322

320

600

414

260

450

405

345

285

225

165

95130

300

= =

96.5

655 90

2420 270.6

240

478 701

660

9-19

Alphabetical index

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Additional cab features ............................................. 3-37

Air conditioner .................................................. 3-28, 3-29

Alphabetical index ....................................................... 9-1

Auxiliary control valves .............................................. 5-80

Ballast ................................................................. 6-1, 6-22

Battery ......................................................................... 8-2

Battery master disconnect switch ....................... 5-8, 3-8

Brakes, operation ...................................................... 5-36

Cab ............................................................................ 3-24

Cab filter - Variable maintenance .............................. 7-81

Cab ventilation .......................................................... 3-27

Check your equipment .............................................. 2-10

Cleaning .................................................................... 2-11

Cold temperature operation ........................................ 5-5

Commutators .............................................................. 3-3

Controls - Cab.............................................................. 3-1

Controls for cab temperature.................................... 3-28

Dangerous operations ............................................... 2-22

Decal positions, WEO countries ............................... 2-36

Differential lock ......................................................... 5-45

Drawbar ..................................................................... 5-55

Drive direction reversing lever .................................... 3-4

Electrical system ......................................................... 8-1

Electrical system - Battery .......................................... 8-2

Engine, starting and stopping ..................................... 5-3

Equipment, check ..................................................... 2-10

External PTO controls................................................ 5-26

Fan, alternator and compressor belt tension ............ 7-45

Front hitch ................................................................. 5-33

Front PTO .................................................................. 5-31

Fuel ............................................................................ 7-12

Fuses and relays ......................................................... 8-8

General information ........................................... 1-2, 1-12

Headlights ................................................................... 8-5

Height adjustable hitch. ............................................ 5-60

Highway Code regulations ........................................ 2-25

How to transport the tractor ..................................... 5-51

Indicator lights............................................................. 4-4

Instrument cluster ....................................................... 4-1

Instrument panel ......................................................... 4-2

Instruments ................................................................. 4-2

Lights, replacement .................................................... 8-6

Load capacity of tyres ................................................. 6-4

Lubricants .................................................................. 9-15

Lubricants and fuels .................................................. 9-15

Main controls .............................................................. 3-2

Maintenance ...................................................... 2-11, 7-1

Maintenance at request, overview of ......................... 7-2

Miscellaneous ........................................................... 3-11

Operation .................................................................... 5-1

Operation of the four-wheel drive ............................. 5-47

Parking brake ............................................................. 5-37

Parking the tractor ....................................................... 5-7

Pick up hitch .............................................................. 5-56

Power take-off, precautions ...................................... 5-30

Precautions.................................................................. 2-7

Pre-delivery claims .................................................... 1-12

Protection from noise ............................................... 2-35

Protective clothing ...................................................... 2-7

Radio ......................................................................... 3-30

Radio specifications .................................................. 9-11

Rear hitch .................................................................. 5-69

Rear Power Take-Off ................................................. 5-23

Rear Three-Point Hitch .............................................. 5-89

Regular service intervals ............................................. 7-2

Remote hydraulics operation .................................... 5-82

Risk of overturning .................................................... 2-18

Risks from noise ....................................................... 2-35

Road transport .......................................................... 2-25

Routine maintenance table ......................................... 7-2

Running in .......................................................... 5-4, 7-10

Running in of tractor ................................................... 5-2

Running in, recommendations .................................... 5-2

9-20

Alphabetical index

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Safety ................................................................. 1-13, 2-1

Safety - Cab ................................................................. 2-4

Safety decal locations - All markets .......................... 2-36

Safety notes ................................................................ 2-1

Safety, working in safety ........................................... 2-15

Safe use of the tractor ................................................ 2-1

Seat, adjustment ....................................................... 3-12

Seat belt .................................................................... 3-20

Starting procedure ...................................................... 5-3

Starting the tractor ...................................................... 5-4

Stationary .................................................................. 5-44

Stationary button ....................................................... 5-44

Stationary tractor ....................................................... 5-44

Steering wheel ............................................................ 3-9

Steering wheel adjustment ......................................... 3-9

Stopping the engine .................................................... 5-7

Stopping the tractor .................................................... 5-4

Synchronised Power take-off .................................... 5-25

Systems, checks ......................................................... 2-9

Technical specifications ....................................... 9-1, 9-2

Temperature, controls in the cab .............................. 3-28

Tow equipment - Front pull hook. ............................. 5-54

Tractor identification ................................................... 1-9

Tractor transport ........................................................ 5-51

Tractor, turning off the engine ..................................... 5-7

Trailer brake ............................................................... 5-38

Turning off the engine ................................................. 5-4

Tyre Inflation Specifications ........................................ 6-3

Tyre maintenance ........................................................ 6-4

Tyre mounting ............................................................. 6-7

Tyre pressures ............................................................. 6-4

Tyres ............................................................................ 6-1

Tyre Size Combinations ............................................. 6-19

Tyres, wheels, ballasting ............................................. 6-1

Use of the tractor ........................................................ 5-2

Use of the tractor on public roads ............................ 2-25

Variable maintenance (every 10 hours or daily) ........ 7-25

Warning and caution ................................................... 2-1

Warranty .................................................................... 1-12

Weights and dimensions ............................................ 9-2

Wheels ........................................................................ 6-1

Working in safety ...................................................... 2-15

Alphabetical index

9-21

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013

N. REGULATION (EU) n. 167/2013 Section

The Operator's manual must comply with ISO 3600:1996 standard, except the section 4.3, Machine

identification.

2 The operator’s manual shall further provide information about the following:

adjustment of the seat and suspension related to the ergonomic position of the operator with respect

to the controls and in order to minimise the risks from whole body vibration;

3, 9

b use and adjustment of the system for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning, when provided; 3

engine starting and shut-off, including the principles of safe on/off operations that envisage use of

the parking brake, shifting to neutral of controls and ignition key removal;

2, 5

d location and method of opening of emergency exits; 2, 3

and directions to get on and off the tractor; 2, 3

f the hazard area near to the pivot axis of articulated tractors; NA

g use of special tools, if any are provided; 2

h safe methods for service and maintenance, including cleaning and working at high levels; 2, 7

i information about the interval of inspection of hydraulic hoses; 2, 7

j instructions about how to tow the tractor; 2, 5

k directions on safe use of the jack and recommended points where the jack is to be inserted; 2, 6

l hazards related to batteries and fuel tank; 2, 7, 8

prohibited uses of the tractor, where overturning hazards exist with mention that the list is not ex-

haustive;

risks caused by contact with hot surfaces, including marginal risks such as topping up oil or coolant

in a hot engine or transmission;

2, 7

or the level of protection of the Falling Objects Protective Structure, if applicable; 1

p the level of protection of the protective structure against falling objects, if applicable; 1, 2, 7

q warning against contact with overhead electric lines; 2

r lightning; 2

s regular cleaning of the outer edges against sprays; NA

t risks concerning tyres, including their handling, repair, excessive pressure and mounting; 2, 6

u unsteadiness when working at high levels with heavy hitched implements 2

v risk of overturning on slopes or irregular terrain; 2

w transport of passenger only in approved passenger seats; 3

x use of the vehicle only by suitably trained operators; 1, 2

y information on safe loading of the vehicle; 5

Requirements of the Operation and Maintenance Manual

9-22

Alphabetical index

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013

N. REGULATION (EU) n. 167/2013 Section

z information about the trailer: position and safety conditions; 2

information on position and use of the master disconnect switch (mechanical devices, electrical

switches of electronic systems);

3, 5, 7

ab use of safety belts and other operator restraining devices; 3

ac for tractors with autoguide systems, pertaining directions and safety information; NA

for vehicles with folding ROPS frames, information about safe use of the ROPS frame, including

raising and lowering the frame and locking it in upright position;

2, 5

for vehicles with folding ROPS frame, warning about consequences in case of overturning with

folded ROPS;

for vehicles with folding ROPS, a description of the cases in which the ROPS needs to be folded

(work inside a building, in a fruit orchard or a vineyard), and a warning that the ROPS must be used

again when the above mentioned work is completed;

ag information about the greasing points and the safety during lubrication; 2, 7

information about the minimum requirements of the seats and their compatibility so as to comply

with the regulations concerning vibration, as in item 5.

Further information about mounting, splitting and work with mounted machines, trailers and inter-

changeable trailed machines.

The operator’s manual shall provide information about the following:

a warning to strictly follow the instructions outlined in the operator’s manual of the mounted or trailed

machinery or trailer, and not to operate the combination tractor-machine or tractor-trailer unless all

instructions have been followed;

a warning to keep a safe distance from the area of the three-point linkage and of the trailer hook (if

equipped) when they are inspected;

c a warning that mounted machinery must be lowered on the ground before leaving the tractor; 5

d speed of the power take-off drive shafts in function of the mounted machinery or trailed vehicle; 5

and

the instruction to use only a drive shaft with a PTO provided with suitable guards and to install a

cover if such guards are removed from the tractor;

2, 5

f information about hydraulic coupling devices and their function; 5

g information about the maximum lift capacity of the three-point linkage; 9

information about the determination of the total mass, the axle loads, the tyre load carrying capacity

and the necessary minimum ballasting;

5, 6, 9

information about the predictable use, the installation, the removal and the maintenance of ballast

weights;

j information about the available trailer braking systems and their compatibility with the trailed vehicles; 5

k the maximum vertical load on the rear hitch, related to the rear tyre size and type of hitch. 5

information about using implements with power take-off drive shafts and that the technically possible

inclination of the shafts depend on the shape and size of the master shield and/or clearance zone,

including the specific information required in case of PTO type 3 with reduced dimension;

m a repeat of the data on the statutory plate about maximum allowed trailed masses; 5, 9

n a warning to stay clear of the area between tractor and towed vehicle; 2

for tractors with mounted machines, the information prescribed by the operator's manual of the

mounted machinery according to Directive 2006/42/EC.

Alphabetical index

9-23

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013

N. REGULATION (EU) n. 167/2013 Section

Noise declaration

The operator's manual must give the noise level as heard by the operator, measured according to

annex XIII.

Vibration declaration

The operator's manual must give the vibration level measured according to annex XIII.

Operation modes

The operator's manual must contain information as to allow a secure operation of the tractor in the

following conditions:

a) work with front-end loader (risk of falling objects); 2

b) forestry application (risk of falling and/or penetrating objects); NA

c) work with crop sprayers, mounted or trailed (risk of hazardous substances). NA

The operator's manual must deal at length with the use of the tractor in combination with the above implements.

6.1 Front loader

6.1.1

The operator’s manual shall outline the hazards associated with front-end loader work, and explain

how to avoid those hazards.

6.1.2

The operator’s manual shall indicate the fixation points on the body of the tractor where the front-end

loader must be installed, together with the size and quality of the hardware to be used. If no such at-

tachment points are foreseen, the operator’s manual shall prohibit the installation of a front-end loader.

6.1.3

Tractors fitted with programmable hydraulic sequencing functions shall provide information on how

to connect the loader hydraulics so that this function is inoperable.

6.2 Forestry application

6.2.1

In case of use of an agricultural tractor in a forestry application, the identified hazards include the

following ones:

a) toppling trees, e.g. in case a rear-mounted tree grab-crane is mounted at the rear of the tractor; NA

penetrating objects in the operator’s enclosure, primarily in case a winch is mounted at the rear of

the tractor.

c) falling objects, such as branches or tree logs; NA

d) working on a steep slope or on irregular terrain. NA

6.2.2 The operator’s manual shall provide information about the following:

a) the existence of the hazards described in point 6.2.1; NA

b) any optional equipment that might be available to deal with those hazards; NA

fixation points on the tractor where protective structures can be fixed, together with the size and

quality of the hardware to be used. When no means are foreseen to fit adequate protective struc-

tures, this shall be mentioned.

the provided protective structures may consist of a frame protecting the operating station against

toppling trees or (mesh) grids in front of the cab doors, roof and windows;

9-24

Alphabetical index

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

Regulation (EU) n. 167/2013

NA: Not Applicable

N. REGULATION (EU) n. 167/2013 Section

e) FOPS level, if available. NA

6.3 Crop sprayers (protection against harmful substances):

6.3.1

In case of use of an agricultural tractor provided with a crop sprayer, the identified hazards are the

following ones:

a) hazards connected to spraying harmful substances with a tractor either with or without cab; NA

b) hazards connected to entering or leaving the cab while spraying harmful substances; NA

c) hazards connected to a possible contamination of the work space; NA

d) hazards connected to cleaning the cab and servicing the air filters. NA

6.3.2 The operator’s manual shall provide information about the following:

a) at least the hazards described in point 6.3.1; NA

protection level from harmful substances offered by the cab and filters. In particular the information

prescribed by the standards EN 15695-1:2009 and EN 15695-2:2009/AC 2011 shall be given;

1, 7

information about selecting and cleaning the cab air filters, as well as the replacement intervals re-

quired for an uninterrupted protection against harmful substances, with directions on how to carry

out such operations safely and without risks for the health;

directions on how to keep the work space uncontaminated, in particular if the tractor is used along

with personal protection devices;

indication that to safely carry out spraying the operator shall comply with the directions in the label of

the harmful substance and with the directions of the crop sprayer mounted on or towed by the vehicle.

9-25

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

9-26

P/N 6622427A2 - X6.35 - X6.45 - X6.55

To guarantee a correct and satisfactory operation of your tractor, Argo Tractors recom-

mends that only genuine spare parts are used

The best way to get the best performances from your McCormick is to use exclusively

hi-tech lubricants.

Original McCormick lubricants can guarantee an optimum output, improve the perfor-

mance of your machine, reduce consumptions and protect from wear at the same time,

thus extending the lifespan of your investment.

ORIGINAL McCORMICK LUBRICANTS